2011 Buick Regal Toledo Owners Manual

2011 Buick Regal Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12Performance andMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

Keys, Doors and Windows . . . 2-1Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1Additional Storage Features . . . 4-3

Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-21Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-29

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19

Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-16Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-24Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-31Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36Object Detection Systems . . . . 9-38Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-47

2011 Buick Regal Owner Manual M

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74

Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . 11-2Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . . 11-6

Maintenance Records . . . . . . . . 11-9

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-12Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1

Introduction iii

GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GMEmblem, BUICK, the BUICKEmblem, and the name REGAL areregistered trademarks of GeneralMotors LLC.

This manual describes features thatmay or may not be on your specificvehicle either because they areoptions that you did not purchase ordue to changes subsequent to theprinting of this owner manual.Please refer to the purchasedocumentation relating to yourspecific vehicle to confirm each ofthe features found on your vehicle.For vehicles first sold in Canada,substitute the name “General

Motors of Canada Limited” for BuickMotor Division wherever it appearsin this manual.

Keep this manual in the vehicle forquick reference.

Canadian Vehicle Owners

Propriétaires Canadiens

A French language copy of thismanual can be obtained from yourdealer or from:

On peut obtenir un exemplaire dece guide en français auprès duconcessionnaire ou à l'adressesuivante:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

1-800-551-4123Numéro de poste 6438 de languefrançaisewww.helminc.com

Using this ManualTo quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle, use the Index in theback of the manual. It is analphabetical list of what is in themanual and the page number whereit can be found.

Danger, Warnings, andCautionsWarning messages found on vehiclelabels and in this manual describehazards and what to do to avoid orreduce them.

Danger indicates a hazard with ahigh level of risk which will result inserious injury or death.

Warning or Caution indicates ahazard that could result in injury ordeath.

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 20834696 A First Printing ©2010 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.

iv Introduction

{ WARNING

These mean there is somethingthat could hurt you or otherpeople.

Notice: This means there issomething that could result inproperty or vehicle damage. Thiswould not be covered by thevehicle's warranty.

A circle with a slash through it is asafety symbol which means “DoNot,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not letthis happen.”

SymbolsThe vehicle has components andlabels that use symbols instead oftext. Symbols are shown along with

the text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specificcomponent, control, message,gauge, or indicator.

M : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see your owner manualfor additional instructions orinformation.

* : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see a service manualfor additional instructions orinformation.

Vehicle Symbol Chart

Here are some additional symbolsthat may be found on the vehicleand what they mean. For moreinformation on the symbol, refer tothe index.

9 : Airbag Readiness Light

# : Air Conditioning

! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)

g : Audio Steering Wheel Controlsor OnStar®

$ : Brake System Warning Light

" : Charging System

I : Cruise Control

B : Engine Coolant Temperature

O : Exterior Lamps

# : Fog Lamps

. : Fuel Gauge

+ : Fuses

3 : Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger

j : LATCH System ChildRestraints

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

: : Oil Pressure

} : Power

/ : Remote Vehicle Start

> : Safety Belt Reminders

7 : Tire Pressure Monitor

F : Traction Control

M : Windshield Washer Fluid

In Brief 1-1

In Brief

Instrument PanelInstrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Initial Drive InformationInitial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . 1-6Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Sensing System for PassengerAirbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 1-8Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-10Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

Vehicle FeaturesRadio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-13Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-14Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14

Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . 1-15Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 1-15Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16

Performance and MaintenanceTraction ControlSystem (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

Electronic StabilityControl (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-17Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-18Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . 1-18Driving for Better FuelEconomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

1-2 In Brief

Instrument Panel

In Brief 1-3

A. Exterior Lamp Controls onpage 6‑1 .

Fog Lamps on page 6‑4 .

Instrument Panel IlluminationControl on page 6‑5.

B. Air Vents on page 8‑3.

C. Turn and Lane‐Change Lever.See Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals on page 6‑3 .

Driver Information CenterButtons. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑21.

D. Cruise Control on page 9‑36.

E. Instrument Cluster onpage 5‑7 .

F. Horn on page 5‑2 .

Driver Airbag. See Where Arethe Airbags? on page 3‑25.

G. Driver Information CenterDisplay. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑21.

H. Steering Wheel Controls onpage 5‑2 .

I. Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑3 .

J. AM-FM Radio on page 7‑7.

K. Info Display.

L. Power Door Locks onpage 2‑5 .

Hazard Warning Flashers onpage 6‑3 .

M. Traction Control System (TCS)on page 9‑31.

Electronic Stability Control(ESC) on page 9‑33.

Ultrasonic Parking Assist onpage 9‑38.

N. Front Passenger Airbag. SeeWhere Are the Airbags? onpage 3‑25.

O. Hood Release. See Hood onpage 10‑5.

P. Data Link Connector. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5‑12.

Q. Instrument Panel Fuse Block onpage 10‑37.

Instrument Panel Storage onpage 4‑1 .

R. Steering Wheel Adjustment onpage 5‑2 .

S. Ignition Positions on page 9‑17.

T. Heated Front Seats onpage 3‑6 .

U. Storage Compartment.

V. Shift Lever. See AutomaticTransmission on page 9‑24.

W. Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8‑1.

X. Glove Box on page 4‑1.

1-4 In Brief

Initial DriveInformationThis section provides a briefoverview about some of theimportant features that may or maynot be on your specific vehicle.

For more detailed information, referto each of the features which can befound later in this owner manual.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemThe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter will work up to 20 m(65 ft) away from the vehicle.

Press K to unlock the driver door orall doors.

Press Q to lock all doors.

Lock and unlock feedback can bepersonalized.

Press and holdV to open thetrunk.

Press and release 7 to locate thevehicle.

Press and hold 7 for at leasttwo seconds to sound the panicalarm.

Press 7 again to cancel the panicalarm.

Press the button to extend the key.The key can be used for the ignitionand all locks.

See Keys on page 2‑2 andRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2‑3.

Door LocksTo lock or unlock the door, use theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter or the key from outsidethe vehicle, and the door lock knobor switch from inside the vehicle.

To unlock or lock the fuel door, usethe RKE transmitter or the door lockswitch from inside.

From inside the vehicle, pull thedoor handle once to unlock it and asecond time to open it.

See Door Locks on page 2‑4 foradditional information.

In Brief 1-5

Power Door Locks

The power door lock switches arelocated on the center of theinstrument panel.

K : Press to unlock the doors.

Q : Press to lock the doors.

See Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑29 for more information.

Trunk Release

To open the trunk, pressV on theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter or press the touchpadunder the vehicle emblem.

See Trunk on page 2‑7 foradditional information.

Windows

The power window switches arelocated on the driver door. Eachpassenger door has a switch thatcontrols only that window.

Press the switch to lower thewindow. Pull the front of the switchup to raise it.

See Power Windows on page 2‑12for additional information.

Seat Adjustment

Manual Seats

1. Pull the handle under the seat tounlock the seat.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition and release the handle.

Try to move the seat to be sure it islocked in place.

1-6 In Brief

Power Seats

A. Power Seat Adjustment Control

B. Reclining Seatbacks

C. Lumbar Adjustment

Move the seat forward or rearwardby moving the control (A) forward orrearward.

Raise or lower the entire seat bymoving the control (A) up or down.

See Power Seat Adjustment onpage 3‑4 .

To raise or recline the seatback, tiltthe top of the control (B) forward orrearward.

See Reclining Seatbacks onpage 3‑5 .

Press the front or rear of thecontrol (C) to increase or decreaselumbar support.

See Lumbar Adjustment onpage 3‑5 .

Heated Seats

Heated Front Seats

On vehicles with this feature, thebuttons are on the climate controlpanel. The ignition must be on tooperate the heated seats.

Press the M button to heat the seatcushion and seatback. Indicatorlights on the climate control displayshow the temperature setting.

For more information see HeatedFront Seats on page 3‑6.

Head RestraintAdjustmentDo not drive until the head restraintsfor all occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

To achieve a comfortable seatingposition, change the seatbackrecline angle as little as necessarywhile keeping the seat and the headrestraint height in the properposition.

For more information see HeadRestraints on page 3‑2 and SeatAdjustment on page 3‑4.

In Brief 1-7

Safety Belt

Refer to the following sections forimportant information on how to usesafety belts properly.. Safety Belts on page 3‑8.. How to Wear Safety Belts

Properly on page 3‑11.. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3‑15.. Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH System) onpage 3‑44.

Sensing System forPassenger Airbag

The passenger sensing systemturns off the right front passengerfrontal airbag and the seat‐mountedside impact airbag under certainconditions. The driver airbags androof‐rail airbags are not affected bythe passenger sensing system. SeePassenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 5‑11 for more information.

The passenger airbag statusindicator will be visible on theinstrument panel when the vehicleis started.

Mirror Adjustment

Exterior Mirrors

Controls for the outside powermirrors are located on thedriver door.

1. Turn the control knob to theL (left) or R (right) selecting thedriver or passenger mirror.

2. Push the control knob to the left,right, up, or down to adjust themirror.

See Power Mirrors on page 2‑10.

1-8 In Brief

Interior Mirror

The vehicle has an automaticdimming inside rearview mirror.Automatic dimming reduces theglare from the headlamps of thevehicle behind you. The dimmingfeature and the indicator light comeon each time the ignition is turned tostart.

See Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror on page 2‑11.

Steering WheelAdjustment

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel up,down, forwards, and backwards.

3. Pull the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.

Interior LightingDome Lamps

The interior lamps control located inthe overhead console controls boththe front and rear interior lamps.

* : Turns the lamps off.

1 : Turns the lamps on when anydoor is opened.

+ : Keeps the lamps on allthe time.

Reading Lamps

There are front and rear readinglamps.

The front reading lamps are locatedin the overhead console.

In Brief 1-9

#$ : Press to turn each lamp onor off.

The rear reading lamps are locatedin the headliner.

For more information about interiorlamps, see:. Dome Lamps on page 6‑5.. Reading Lamps on page 6‑5.. Instrument Panel Illumination

Control on page 6‑5.

Exterior Lighting

The exterior lamp control is locatedon the instrument panel on theoutboard side of the steering wheel.

O : Turns off the exterior lamps.The knob returns to the AUTOposition after it is released. Turn tooff again to reactivate theAUTO mode.

In Canada, the headlamps willautomatically reactivate once thevehicle is shifted out of P (Park).

AUTO: Automatically turns theexterior lamps on and off,depending on outside lighting.

The current status of the AUTOsystem is displayed in the DriverInformation Center (DIC) display.See Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 5‑21.

;: Turns on the parking lamps,instrument panel lights, and otherexterior lighting.

2 : Turns on the headlamps,parking lamps, instrument panellights, and other exterior lighting.

For more information, see:. Exterior Lamp Controls on

page 6‑1 .. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)

on page 6‑2 .. Fog Lamps on page 6‑4.

1-10 In Brief

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The windshield wiper lever is on theside of the steering column.

2: Fast wipes.

1: Slow wipes.

& : Turn the band up for morefrequent wipes or down for lessfrequent wipes.

9 : Turns the windshieldwipers off.

3 : Briefly move the wiper leverdown for a single wipe or hold downfor several wipes.

Windshield Washer

Pull the windshield wiper lever tospray windshield washer fluid andactivate the wipers.

See Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑3 .

In Brief 1-11

Climate ControlsThe heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled withthese systems.

A. Air Conditioning

B. Driver and PassengerTemperature Controls

C. Heated Seats

D. Air Delivery Modes

E. Climate Display

F. Defrost

G. Recirculation

H. Fan Controls

I. AUTO (Automatic Mode)

J. Rear Defogger

See Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8‑1.

Transmission

Automatic Transmission

P: Park

R: Reverse

N: Neutral

D: Drive

1-12 In Brief

Manual Mode

Move the selector lever fromD (Drive) to the left. Press the shiftlever forward (+) to upshift orrearward (−) to downshift.

The selector lever can only bemoved out of P (Park) when theignition is on and the brake pedal isapplied. To engage P (Park) orR (Reverse), push the releasebutton.

See Automatic Transmission onpage 9‑24.

Vehicle Features

Radio(s)3 O : Press to turn the systemon and off. Turn to increase ordecrease the volume.

RADIO/BAND: Press to choosebetween FM, AM, or XM™,if equipped.

Z : Turn to select radiostations.

s © : Press to seek the previousstation or track.

¨ \ : Press to seek the nextstation or track.

Buttons 1 to 6: Press to save andselect favorite stations

INFO: Press to show availableinformation about the current stationor track, or to display the time whenthe ignition is off.

For more information about theseand other radio features, seeOperation on page 7‑4.

Storing a Favorite Station

Stations from all bands can bestored in the favorite lists in anyorder. Up to six stations can bestored in each favorite page and thenumber of available favorite pagescan be set.

To store the station to a position inthe list, press the correspondingnumeric button 1 to 6 until thestation can be heard again.

For more information, see “Storing aStation as a Favorite” in AM-FMRadio on page 7‑7.

Setting the Clock

Adjusting the Time

1. Press the CONFIG button andselect Time Settings.

2. Select Set Time.

3. Turn theZ knob to adjustthe highlighted number.

4. Press theZ knob to selectthe next number.

In Brief 1-13

5. To save the time and return tothe Time Settings menu, pressthe BACK button at any time orpress theZ button afteradjusting the minutes.

Setting the 12/24 Hour Format

1. Press the CONFIG button andselect Time Settings.

2. Highlight 12/24 Hour Format.

3. Press theZ button to selectthe 12 hour or 24 hour displayformat.

For detailed instructions on settingthe clock, see Clock on page 5‑4.

Satellite RadioVehicles with an XM™ SatelliteRadio tuner and a valid XM SatelliteRadio subscription can receive XMprogramming.

XM Satellite Radio Service

XM is a satellite radio service basedin the 48 contiguous United Statesand 10 Canadian provinces. XMSatellite Radio has a wide variety ofprogramming and commercial-freemusic, coast to coast, and indigital-quality sound. A fee isrequired to receive the XM service.

For more information refer to:. www.xmradio.com or call

1-800-929-2100 (U.S.).. www.xmradio.ca or call

1-877-438-9677 (Canada).

For more information, see SatelliteRadio on page 7‑10.

Portable Audio DevicesThis vehicle may have a 3.5 mm(1/8 in) auxiliary input and a USBport located in the center console.External devices such as iPods®,laptop computers, MP3 players, CDchangers, and USB storage

devices. may be connected,depending on the audio system.

For more information, see AuxiliaryDevices on page 7‑16.

Bluetooth®

The Bluetooth® system allows userswith a Bluetooth-enabled cell phoneto make and receive hands-freecalls using the vehicle’s audiosystem, microphone, and controls.

The Bluetooth-enabled cell phonemust be paired with the in-vehicleBluetooth system before it can beused in the vehicle. Not all phoneswill support all functions.

See Bluetooth (Overview) onpage 7‑19 or Bluetooth(Infotainment Controls) onpage 7‑20 or Bluetooth (VoiceRecognition) on page 7‑23 orBluetooth (Navigation) onpage 7‑33.

1-14 In Brief

Steering Wheel Controls

Some audio controls can beadjusted at the steering wheel.

b g : Press to interact with theavailable Bluetooth, OnStar,or Navigation system.

$ c : Press to silence thevehicle speakers only. Press againto turn the sound on. For vehicleswith OnStar or Bluetooth systems,press to reject an incoming call,or end a current call.

_ SRC ^ : Press to select an audiosource.

Toggle up or down to select the nextor previous favorite radio station,CD, or MP3 track.

+ x −: Press + to increase thevolume, press − to decrease thevolume.

For more information, see SteeringWheel Controls on page 5‑2.

Navigation SystemThe vehicle's navigation system (ifequipped) provides detailed maps ofmost major freeways and roadsthroughout the United States andCanada. After a destination hasbeen set, the system providesturn-by-turn instructions for reachingthe destination. In addition, thesystem can help locate a variety ofpoints of interest (POI), such asbanks, airports, restaurants,and more.

See the Navigation System manualfor more information.

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The DIC display is located in thecenter of the instrument panelcluster. It shows the status of manyvehicle systems. The controls forthe DIC are located on the turnsignal lever.

MENU: Press this button to get tothe Trip/Fuel Menu and the VehicleInformation Menu.

wx : Use the thumbwheel toscroll through the items ineach menu.

In Brief 1-15

SET/CLR: Use this button to set orclear the menu item when it isdisplayed.

For more information, see DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑21.

Vehicle PersonalizationSome vehicle features can beprogrammed by using the audiosystem controls. These featuresinclude:. Climate and Air Quality. Comfort and Convenience. Collision/Detection Systems. Language. Lighting. Power Door Locks. Remote Lock/Unlock/Start

See Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑29.

Cruise Control

The cruise control buttons arelocated on the steering wheel.

5 : Press to turn the cruise controlsystem on and off. An indicator lightwill turn on or off in the instrumentpanel cluster.

[ : Press to disengage cruisecontrol without erasing the setspeed from memory.

RES/+ : Move the thumbwheel upto make the vehicle resume to apreviously set speed or toaccelerate to a higher speed.

SET/−: Move the thumbwheel downto set a speed or to make thevehicle decelerate.

See Cruise Control on page 9‑36.

Ultrasonic Parking AssistUltrasonic Rear Parking Assist(URPA) uses sensors on the rearbumper to detect objects whileparking the vehicle. It operates atspeeds less than 8 km/h (5 mph).URPA uses audio beeps to providedistance and system information.

Keep the sensors on the vehicle'srear bumper clean to ensure properoperation.

The system can be disabled bypressing the park assist buttonlocated next to the radio.

See Ultrasonic Parking Assist onpage 9‑38 for more information.

1-16 In Brief

Power OutletsThe accessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone, an MP3player, etc.

There are two accessory poweroutlets. One is located inside thecenter console storage and theother is on the rear of the centerfloor console.

Open the protective cover to use theaccessory power outlet.

See Power Outlets on page 5‑5.

Sunroof

On vehicles with a sunroof, theswitch is located on the overheadconsole.

The sunroof only operates when theignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY.

To open or close the sunroof withthe safety function enabled, gentlypress the open or close sunroofswitch (A) to the first detent position.The safety function will stay enabledas long as the switch is operated.

To automatically open or close thesunroof with the safety functionenabled, firmly press the open orclose sunroof switch (A) to thesecond detent position and release.To stop the movement, press theswitch once more.

To automatically tilt or close thesunroof with the safety functionenabled, press the tilt open or closesunroof switch (B).

If the sunroof is raised, it can beopened in one step by pressing theclose switch.

If an object is in the path of thesunroof while it is closing, theanti-pinch feature will detect theobject and stop the sunroof fromclosing at the point of theobstruction. The sunroof will thenreturn to the full-open or ventposition.

The sunroof glass panel cannot beopened or closed if the vehicle hasan electrical failure.

In Brief 1-17

Performance andMaintenance

Traction ControlSystem (TCS)The vehicle may have a tractioncontrol system that limits wheelspin. The system turns onautomatically every time the vehicleis started.. To turn off traction control, press

and release d located on the

instrument panel. i illuminatesand the appropriate DICmessage is displayed. See RideControl System Messages onpage 5‑27.

. Press and release the buttonagain to turn on traction control.

For more information, see TractionControl System (TCS) onpage 9‑31.

Electronic StabilityControl (ESC)The vehicle may have a vehicleElectronic Stability Control (ESC)system called StabiliTrak®. It is anadvanced computer-controlledsystem that assists with directionalcontrol of the vehicle in difficultdriving conditions. The system turnson automatically every time thevehicle is started.. To turn off both traction control

and ESC, press and hold d,located on the instrument panel,until g illuminates and theappropriate DIC message isdisplayed. See Ride ControlSystem Messages onpage 5‑27.

. Press and release the button toturn on both systems.

For more information, see ElectronicStability Control (ESC) onpage 9‑33.

Tire Pressure MonitorThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).

The TPMS warning light alerts youto a significant loss in pressure ofone of the vehicle's tires. If thewarning light comes on, stop assoon as possible and inflate thetires to the recommended pressureshown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑12. The warninglight will remain on until the tirepressure is corrected.

1-18 In Brief

During cooler conditions, the low tirepressure warning light may appearwhen the vehicle is first started andthen turn off. This may be an earlyindicator that the tire pressures aregetting low and the tires need to beinflated to the proper pressure.

The TPMS does not replace normalmonthly tire maintenance. It is thedriver’s responsibility to maintaincorrect tire pressures.

See Tire Pressure Monitor Systemon page 10‑48 and Tire PressureMonitor Operation on page 10‑49.

Engine Oil Life SystemThe engine oil life system calculatesengine oil life based on vehicle useand displays the CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message when it is timeto change the engine oil and filter.The oil life system should be resetto 100% only following an oilchange.

Resetting the Oil Life System

1. Turn the key to ON/RUN with theengine off.

2. Press the DIC menu button onthe turn signal lever to scrollthrough the menu items on theDIC screen.

3. Press the set button to clear theCHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage and/or restore theREMAINING OIL LIFE 100%message.

4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.

See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑12.

Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badgeand a yellow fuel cap can use eitherunleaded gasoline or ethanol fuelcontaining up to 85% ethanol (E85).See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) onpage 9‑43. For all other vehicles,use only the unleaded gasolinedescribed under RecommendedFuel on page 9‑41.

Driving for Better FuelEconomyDriving habits can affect fuelmileage. Here are some driving tipsto get the best fuel economypossible.. Avoid fast starts and accelerate

smoothly.. Brake gradually and avoid

abrupt stops.. Avoid idling the engine for long

periods of time.. When road and weather

conditions are appropriate, usecruise control, if equipped.

. Always follow posted speedlimits or drive more slowly whenconditions require.

. Keep vehicle tires properlyinflated.

. Combine several trips into asingle trip.

In Brief 1-19

. Replace the vehicle's tires withthe same TPC Spec numbermolded into the tire's sidewallnear the size.

. Follow recommended scheduledmaintenance.

Roadside AssistanceProgramU.S.: 1-800-252-1112

TTY Users: 1-888-889-2438

Canada: 1-800-268-6800

As the owner of a new Buick, youare automatically enrolled in theRoadside Assistance program. Thisprogram provides technically trainedadvisors who are available 24 hoursa day, 365 days a year, to giveminor repair information or maketowing arrangements.

For more information see RoadsideAssistance Program on page 13‑5.

Roadside Assistance and OnStar

If you have a current OnStarsubscription, press the OnStarbutton and the current GPS locationwill be sent to an OnStar Advisorwho will assess your problem,contact Roadside Assistance, andrelay your exact location to get thehelp you need.

Online Owner Center

The Online Owner Center is acomplimentary service that includesonline service reminders, vehiclemaintenance tips, online ownermanual, special privileges,and more.

Sign up today at:www.gmownercenter.com/buick(U.S.) or www.gm.ca (Canada).

OnStar®

For vehicles with an active OnStar®

subscription, OnStar uses severalinnovative technologies and liveAdvisors to provide a wide range ofsafety, security, navigation,diagnostics, and calling services.

Automatic Crash Response

In a crash, built in sensors canautomatically alert an OnStarAdvisor who is immediatelyconnected to the vehicle to see ifyou need help.

1-20 In Brief

How OnStar Service Works

Q : This blue button connects youto a specially trained OnStarAdvisor to verify your accountinformation and to answerquestions.

] : Press this red emergencybutton to get priority help fromspecially trained OnStar EmergencyAdvisors.

X : Press this button forhands‐free, voice‐activated callingand to give voice commandsfor Hands‐Free Calling andTurn‐by‐Turn Navigation.

Automatic Crash Response,Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,Stolen Vehicle Assistance, VehicleDiagnostics, Remote Door Unlock,Roadside Assistance, Turn‐by‐TurnNavigation and Hands‐Free Callingare available on most vehicles. Notall OnStar services are available on

all vehicles. For more informationsee the OnStar Owner's Guide orvisit www.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada), contactOnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1‐888‐466‐7827) or TTY1‐877‐248‐2080, or pressQ tospeak with an OnStar Advisor24 hours a day, 7 days a week.

For a full description of OnStarservices and system limitations, seethe OnStar Owner's Guide in theglove box.

OnStar service is subject to theOnStar terms and conditionsincluded in the OnStar SubscriberInformation.

OnStar service requires wirelesscommunication networks and theGlobal Positioning System (GPS)satellite network. Not all OnStarservices are available everywhereor on all vehicles at all times.

OnStar service can’t work unlessyour vehicle is in a place whereOnStar has an agreement with awireless service provider for servicein that area, and the wirelessservice provider has coverage,network capacity, reception, andtechnology compatible with OnStar'sservice. Service involving locationinformation about your vehicle can’twork unless GPS signals areavailable, unobstructed, andcompatible with the OnStarhardware. The vehicle has to have aworking electrical system andadequate battery power for theOnStar equipment to operate.OnStar service may not work if theOnStar Equipment isn’t properlyinstalled or you haven’t maintainedit and your vehicle is in goodworking order and in compliancewith all government regulations.

In Brief 1-21

If you try to add, connect or modifyany equipment or software in yourvehicle, OnStar service may notwork. Other problems OnStar can’tcontrol may prevent service to you,such as hills, tall buildings, tunnels,weather, electrical system designand architecture of your vehicle,damage to important parts of yourvehicle in a crash, or wireless phonenetwork congestion or jamming.

OnStar Steering WheelControls

This vehicle may have a Talk/Mutebutton that can be used to interactwith OnStar Hands-Free calling.See Steering Wheel Controls onpage 5‑2 for more information.

On some vehicles, the mute buttoncan be used to dial numbers intovoice mail systems, or to dial phoneextensions. See the OnStar Owner'sGuide for more information.

Your Responsibility

Increase the volume of the radio ifthe OnStar advisor cannot be heard.

If the light next to the OnStarbuttons is red, the system may notbe functioning properly. PressQand request a vehicle diagnostic.If the light appears clear (no lightis appearing), your OnStarsubscription has expired and allservices have been deactivated.PressQ to confirm that the OnStarequipment is active.

1-22 In Brief

2 NOTES

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors andWindows

Keys and LocksKeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

DoorsTrunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Vehicle SecurityVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . . . 2-8Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Exterior MirrorsConvex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

Interior MirrorsAutomatic Dimming RearviewMirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

WindowsWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

2-2 Keys, Doors and Windows

Keys and Locks

Keys

{ WARNING

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe ignition key is dangerous formany reasons. Children or otherscould be badly injured or evenkilled. They could operate thepower windows or other controlsor even make the vehicle move.The windows will function with thekeys in the ignition and childrencould be seriously injured or killedif caught in the path of a closingwindow. Do not leave the keys ina vehicle with children.

The key that is part of the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmittercan be used for the ignition andall locks.

Press the button on the RKEtransmitter to extend the key. Pressthe button and the key blade toretract the key.

See your dealer if a new key isneeded.

Notice: If the keys get locked inthe vehicle, it may have to bedamaged to get them out. Alwayscarry a spare key.

If you are locked out of the vehicle,see Roadside Assistance Programon page 13‑5.


Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑15 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-210/220/310.

If there is a decrease in the RKEoperating range:. Check the distance. The

transmitter may be too far fromthe vehicle.

. Check the location. Othervehicles or objects may beblocking the signal.

. Check the transmitter's battery.See “Battery Replacement” laterin this section.

. If the transmitter is still notworking correctly, see yourdealer or a qualified technicianfor service.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System OperationThe RKE transmitter will work up to20 m (65 ft) away from the vehicle.

There are other conditions whichcan affect the performance of thetransmitter. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System on page 2‑3.

The following buttons are on thetransmitter:

Q (Lock): Press to lock all doors.The turn signal indicators may flashand/or the horn may sound to

indicate locking; see “Remote LockFeedback” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑29.

The fuel door will be locked whenthe doors are locked.

If any door is open when Q ispressed, all doors lock. Thesesettings can be modified. See“Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out”under Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑29.

Pressing Q may also arm thetheft-deterrent system. SeeAnti-Theft Alarm System onpage 2‑8 .

K (Unlock): Press to unlock thedriver door or all doors; see“Remote Door Unlock” underVehicle Personalization onpage 5‑29. The turn signalindicators flash to indicate unlockinghas occurred. For more informationsee “Remote Unlock LightFeedback” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑29.


Pressing K may also disarm thetheft-deterrent system. SeeAnti-Theft Alarm System onpage 2‑8 .

V (Remote Trunk Release):Press and holdV to open thetrunk.

7 (Vehicle Locator/PanicAlarm): Press and release onetime to locate the vehicle. Theexterior lamps flash and the hornchirps. Press and hold 7 for at leasttwo seconds to sound the panicalarm. The horn sounds and theturn signals flash until 7 is pressedagain, or the key is placed in theignition and turned to ON/RUN.

Programming Transmitters tothe Vehicle

Only RKE transmitters programmedto this vehicle will work. If atransmitter is lost or stolen, areplacement can be purchased andprogrammed through your dealer.When the replacement transmitter isprogrammed to this vehicle, allremaining transmitters must also bereprogrammed. Any lost or stolentransmitters will no longer workonce the new transmitter isprogrammed. See your dealer tohave new transmitters programmed.

Battery Replacement

Replace the battery if the “ReplaceBattery in Remote Key” messagedisplays in the DIC. See “ReplaceBattery in Remote Key” under Keyand Lock Messages on page 5‑27.

The battery is not rechargeable.See your dealer to replace thebattery.

Door Locks

{ WARNING

Unlocked doors can bedangerous.

. Passengers, especiallychildren, can easily open thedoors and fall out of a movingvehicle. The chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in acrash is increased if thedoors are not locked. So, allpassengers should wearsafety belts properly and thedoors should be lockedwhenever the vehicle isdriven.

. Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may beunable to get out. A child canbe overcome by extreme heatand can suffer permanentinjuries or even death fromheat stroke. Always lock thevehicle whenever leaving it.

(Continued)


WARNING (Continued)

. Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked doorwhen you slow down or stopyour vehicle. Locking yourdoors can help prevent thisfrom happening.

To lock and unlock the door, use theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter or the key from theoutside, and the door lock knob orswitch from the inside.

To unlock or lock the fuel door, usethe RKE transmitter or the door lockswitch from the inside.

From inside the vehicle with thedoors locked, pull once on the doorhandle to unlock it, and a secondtime to open it.

Manually locking the driver dooralso automatically locks all otherdoors.

For more information see:. Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

System Operation on page 2‑3.. Power Door Locks on

page 2‑5 .. Vehicle Personalization on

page 5‑29.

Power Door Locks

K (Unlock): Press to unlock alldoors.

Q (Lock): Press to lock all doors.

See “Power Door Locks” in VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑29.


Safety LocksThe vehicle may have power safetylocks or manual safety locks. Powersafety locks will lock the rearwindows and not allow the reardoors to be opened from the inside.Manual safety locks do not allow therear doors to be opened from theinside.

Power Safety Locks

Pressv to activate the safety lockson the rear doors. The LED willilluminate.

This switch also disables the powerwindow controls on the rear doors

Pressv again to deactivate thesafety locks on the rear doors. TheLED will turn off.

If the LED flashes, the feature maynot be working properly. See “RearWindow Lockout” under PowerWindows on page 2‑12.

Manual Safety Locks

Open the rear doors to access thesafety locks on the inside edge ofeach door. To manually set thelocks, insert a key into the slot andturn it to the horizontal position. thedoor can only be opened from theoutside with the door unlocked. Toreturn the door to normal operation,turn the slot to the vertical position.


Doors

Trunk

{ WARNING

Exhaust gases can enter thevehicle if it is driven with theliftgate, trunk/hatch open, or withany objects that pass through theseal between the body and thetrunk/hatch or liftgate. Engineexhaust contains CarbonMonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.

If the vehicle must be driven withthe liftgate, or trunk/hatch open:

. Close all of the windows.

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Adjust the Climate Controlsystem to a setting thatbrings in only outside air andset the fan speed to thehighest setting. See ClimateControl System in the Index.

. If the vehicle has a powerliftgate, disable the powerliftgate function.

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑23.

Remote Trunk Release

To open the trunk, pressV on theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter or press the touchpadunder the vehicle emblem.

Emergency Trunk ReleaseHandle

Notice: Do not use theemergency trunk release handleas a tie-down or anchor pointwhen securing items in the trunkas it could damage the handle.The emergency trunk releasehandle is only intended to aid aperson trapped in a latched trunk,enabling them to open the trunkfrom the inside.

There is an emergency trunkrelease handle located inside thetrunk on the trunk latch. On some


vehicles, the release handle can beaccessed by folding the rear seatcenter seatback. See Rear Seatson page 3‑7 . Pull the releasehandle to open the trunk from theinside.

Rear Seat Pass-Through

The vehicle may have a door in therear seat that provides access to thetrunk.

Lower the rear seat armrest toaccess the pass-through door. Pullthe release handle to open the door.To close, push and latch the door.

The vehicle may have a lock knobon the pass-through door. Turn thelock knob from the trunk side of thedoor to lock or unlock the door.

Vehicle SecurityThis vehicle has theft-deterrentfeatures; however, they do not makeit impossible to steal.

Anti-Theft Alarm SystemThis vehicle has an anti-theft alarmsystem.

Arming the System

To arm the system, close all of thewindows and doors and then either:

. Press Q on the RKE transmitter.

. Lock the vehicle using the key inthe driver door.

The alarm arms after about30 seconds.

The security light, located in thecenter of the instrument panel, willflash slowly.

Press Q again and the system armsimmediately.


Disarming the System

To disarm the system press K onthe RKE transmitter.

Turning off the System Alarm

If there is an attempt to open thedoors, trunk, or hood without firstpressing K on the transmitter orunlocking the driver's door withthe key, the system alarm will beactivated. The exterior lamps willflash and the horn will sound forabout 30 seconds.

To turn off the system alarm pressQ or K on the RKE transmitter.

ImmobilizerSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑15 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-210/220/310.

Immobilizer OperationThis vehicle has a passivetheft-deterrent system.

The system does not have to bemanually armed or disarmed.

The vehicle is automaticallyimmobilized when the key isremoved from the ignition.

The system is automaticallydisarmed when the vehicle isstarted with the correct key. The keyuses a transponder that matches animmobilizer control unit in thevehicle and automatically disarmsthe system. Only the correct keystarts the vehicle. The vehicle maynot start if the key is damaged.

The security light, located in theinstrument panel cluster, comes onif there is a problem with arming ordisarming the theft-deterrentsystem.

When trying to start the vehicle, thesecurity light comes on briefly whenthe ignition is turned on.

If the engine does not start and thesecurity light stays on, there is aproblem with the system. Turn theignition off and try again.


If the engine still does not start, andthe key appears to be undamagedor the light continues to stay on, tryanother ignition key. If the enginedoes not start with the other key, thevehicle needs service. If the vehicledoes start, the first key may bedamaged. See your dealer who canservice the theft-deterrent systemand have a new key made.

Do not leave the key or devicethat disarms or deactivates thetheft-deterrent system in the vehicle.

Exterior Mirrors

Convex Mirrors

{ WARNING

A convex mirror can make things,like other vehicles, look fartheraway than they really are. If youcut too sharply into the right lane,you could hit a vehicle on theright. Check the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger side mirror is convexshaped. A convex mirror's surface iscurved so more can be seen fromthe driver seat.

Power Mirrors

Controls for the outside powermirrors are located on thedriver door.

1. Turn the control knob to theL (left) or R (right) selecting thedriver or passenger mirror.

2. Push the control knob to the left,right, up, or down to adjust themirror.


Folding Mirrors

Manual Foldaway Mirrors

The vehicle has manual foldingmirrors. These mirrors can be foldedinward to prevent damage whengoing through an automatic carwash. To fold, pull the mirror towardthe vehicle. Push the mirroroutward, to return it to the originalposition.

Heated MirrorsFor vehicles with heated mirrors:

< (Rear Window Defogger):Press to heat the mirrors.

See “Rear Window Defogger” underDual Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8‑1 for moreinformation.

Interior Mirrors

Automatic DimmingRearview MirrorThe vehicle may have an automaticdimming inside rearview mirror.Automatic dimming reduces theglare from the headlamps of thevehicle behind you. The dimmingfeature and the indicator light comeon each time the ignition is turned tostart.

Vehicles with OnStar® have threeadditional control buttons located atthe bottom of the mirror. See yourdealer for more information aboutOnStar and how to subscribe to it.See the OnStar Owner's Guide formore information about the servicesOnStar provides.

Cleaning the Mirror

Do not spray glass cleaner directlyon the mirror. Use a soft toweldampened with water.


Windows

{ WARNING

Leaving children, helpless adults,or pets in a vehicle with thewindows closed is dangerous.They can be overcome bythe extreme heat and sufferpermanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke. Never leave achild, a helpless adult, or a petalone in a vehicle, especially withthe windows closed in warm orhot weather.

The vehicle aerodynamics aredesigned to improve fuel economyperformance. This may result in apulsing sound when either rearwindow is down and the frontwindows are up. To reduce thesound, open either a front windowor the sunroof (if equipped).

Power Windows

The power window switches locatedon the driver door control all fourwindows. The passenger doorshave a window switch that controlsthat window. Push the switch downto open the window. Pull the front ofthe switch up to close it.

The switches work when the ignitionis in ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY,or in Retained Accessory Power(RAP). See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) on page 9‑18.


Express Window Operation

Windows with an express-up ordown feature allow the frontwindows to be lowered or raisedwithout holding the switch. Rearwindows only have express down.Pull a window switch up or push itdown all the way, release it, andthe window goes down or upautomatically. Stop the window bypushing or pulling the switch.

Rear Window Lockout withPower Safety Locks

For vehicles with power safetylocks, the rear window lockoutbuttonv is on the driver door.Press the button to disable the rearwindow controls and turn on therear door power safety locks. Thelight on the button comes onindicating the feature is in use. Therear windows can still be raised orlowered using the driver windowswitches when the lockout feature isactive. To restore power to the rearwindows, press the button again.

The light on the button goes out.If the light flashes, the feature maynot be working properly.

Rear Window Lockout withoutPower Safety Locks

For vehicles without power safetylocks, the rear window lockoutbuttonv is on the driver door.Press the button to disable the rearwindow controls. The light on thebutton comes on indicating thefeature is in use. The rear windowscan still be raised or lowered usingthe driver window switches when


the lockout feature is active. Torestore power to the rear windows,press the button again. The light onthe button goes out. If the lightflashes, the feature may not beworking properly.

Programming the PowerWindows

If the battery on the vehicle hasbeen recharged, disconnected, oris not working, you will need toreprogram each front power windowfor the express-up feature to work.Before reprogramming, replace orrecharge the vehicle's battery.

To program each front window,follow these steps:

1. With the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN,or when Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) is active, close alldoors.

2. Press and hold the powerwindow switch until the windowis fully open.

3. Pull the power window switch upuntil the window is fully closed.

4. Continue holding the switch upfor approximately two secondsafter the window is completelyclosed.

The window is now reprogrammed.Repeat the process for the otherwindows.

Sun Visors

Pull the sun visor down to blockglare. Detach the sun visor from thecenter mount to extend along therod or to pivot to the side window.


Roof

Sunroof

On vehicles with a sunroof, theswitches are on the overheadconsole.

The sunroof only operates when theignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY.

To open or close the sunroof, pressthe open or close sunroof switch (A)to the first detent position.

To automatically open or close thesunroof with the safety functionenabled, press the open or closesunroof switch (A) to the seconddetent position and release. To stopthe movement, press the switchagain.

To automatically tilt or close thesunroof, press the tilt open or closesunroof switch (B).

If an object is in the path of thesunroof while it is closing, theanti-pinch feature will detect theobject and stop the sunroof.

The sunroof glass panel cannot beopened or closed if the vehicle hasan electrical failure.

Dirt and debris may collect on thesunroof seal or in the track. Thiscould cause an issue with sunroofoperation, noise, or plugging thewater drainage system. Periodicallyopen the sunroof and remove anyobstacles or loose debris. Wipe thesunroof seal and roof sealing areausing a clean cloth, mild soap, andwater. Do not remove grease fromthe sunroof.


Sunshade

The sunshade is manually operated.Close or open the sunshade bysliding. When the sunroof isopened, the sunshade isalways open.

Safety Function

If the sunroof has any resistanceduring automatic closing, it willimmediately stop and reverse.

To override the safety function,press and hold the close sunroofswitch. The sunroof closes withoutsafety function. To stop themovement, release the switch.

Initializing the Sunroof

If the sunroof cannot be closed,such as after disconnecting thevehicle battery, activate the sunroofelectronics:. If the sunroof is closed, keep the

close sunroof switch pressed for10 seconds.

. If the sunroof is open, keep theclose sunroof switch presseduntil the sunroof is fully closed.Release the switch, then press itagain for 10 seconds.

Relearning the Safety Function

If the sunroof does not closecorrectly after initializing:

1. Open the sunroof fully bypressing the open sunroofswitch.

2. Release the switch, then gentlypress it again to the first detentfor approximately 30 seconds.The switch can be releasedwhen the sunroof is in the closedposition.

Seats and Restraints 3-1

Seats andRestraints

Head RestraintsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Front SeatsSeat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-4Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Rear SeatsRear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Safety BeltsSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21

Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-21Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-22Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-22

Airbag SystemAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-25When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28

How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28

What Will You See After anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29

Servicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-34

Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-35Replacing Airbag SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-35

Child RestraintsOlder Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36Infants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38

Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-41Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-42Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-51

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52

Securing Child Restraints(Front Passenger Seat) . . . . 3-54

3-2 Seats and Restraints

Head RestraintsThe vehicle's front seats haveadjustable head restraints in theoutboard seating positions.

The vehicle's rear seats haveadjustable head restraints in theoutboard seating positions.

{ WARNING

With head restraints that are notinstalled and adjusted properly,there is a greater chance thatoccupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Do notdrive until the head restraints forall occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

Adjust the head restraint so that thetop of the restraint is at the sameheight as the top of the occupant'shead. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.

Front Seat

To raise or lower the head restraint,press the release button located onthe side of the head restraint andpull up or push the head restraintdown and release the button.

Pull and push on the head restraintafter the button is released to makesure that it is locked in place.

The front head restraints are notdesigned to be removed.


Rear Seat Pull the head restraint up to raise it.To lower the head restraint, pressthe release button, located on thehead restraint post on the top of theseatback, while you push the headrestraint down.

Push down on the head restraintafter the button is released to makesure that it is locked in place.

If you are installing a child restraintin the rear seat, see “Securing aChild Restraint Designed for theLATCH System” under LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3‑44.


Front Seats

Seat Adjustment

Manual Seat Adjustment

{ WARNING

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust amanual driver seat while thevehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle andconfuse you, or make you push a

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

pedal when you do not want to.Adjust the driver seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

To adjust the seat position:

1. Pull the handle located at thefront of the seat.

2. Move the seat forward orbackward to adjust the seatposition.

3. Release the handle to stop theseat from moving.

Power Seat Adjustment

To adjust a power seat, do any ofthe following:. Move the seat forward or

rearward by sliding the controlforward or rearward.

. Raise or lower the front part ofthe seat cushion by moving thefront of the control up or down.

. Raise or lower the entire seat bymoving the entire control upor down.


Lumbar Adjustment

To increase or decrease lumbarsupport, press and hold the front orrear of the round control knob.

To raise or lower lumbar support,press and hold the top or bottom ofthe round control knob.

Release the control knob when theseatback reaches the desired levelof lumbar support.

See Power Seat Adjustment onpage 3‑4 for more information.

Reclining Seatbacks

{ WARNING

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust theseat while the vehicle is moving.The sudden movement couldstartle and confuse you, or makeyou push a pedal when you donot want to. Adjust the driver'sseat only when the vehicle is notmoving.

{ WARNING

Sitting in a reclined position whenthe vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even when buckledup, the safety belts cannot dotheir job when reclined like this.

The shoulder belt cannot do itsjob because it will not be againstyour body. Instead, it will be infront of you. In a crash, you couldgo into it, receiving neck or otherinjuries.

The lap belt cannot do its jobeither. In a crash, the belt couldgo up over your abdomen. Thebelt forces would be there, not atyour pelvic bones. This couldcause serious internal injuries.

For proper protection when thevehicle is in motion, have theseatback upright. Then sit wellback in the seat and wear thesafety belt properly.


Manual Reclining Seatbacks

On vehicles with manual recliningseatbacks, the control lever islocated on the outboard side ofthe seat.

To recline the seatback:

1. Lift the recline lever.

2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, then releasethe lever to lock the seatback inplace.

3. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked.

To return the seatback to an uprightposition:

1. Lift the lever fully withoutapplying pressure to theseatback and the seatback willreturn to the upright position.

2. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked.

Power Reclining Seatbacks

On vehicles with power recliningseatbacks, the vertical control islocated on the outboard side ofthe seat.. To recline the seatback, press

the control toward the rear of thevehicle.

. To raise the seatback, press thecontrol toward the front of thevehicle.

Heated Front Seats

{ WARNING

If you cannot feel temperaturechange or pain to the skin, theseat heater may cause burnseven at low temperatures. Toreduce the risk of burns, peoplewith such a condition should usecare when using the seat heater,especially for long periods oftime. Do not place anything onthe seat that insulates against

(Continued)


WARNING (Continued)

heat, such as a blanket, cushion,cover or similar item. This maycause the seat heater tooverheat. An overheated seatheater may cause a burn or maydamage the seat.

The buttons are on the climatecontrol panel.

The ignition must be on for thisfeature to work.

Press the button to heat the seatcushion and seatback. Indicatorlights on the climate control displayshow the current setting.

There are three temperaturesettings:. High = three lights. Medium = two lights. Low = one light

The heated seats turn on at the highsetting. Each press of the buttondecreases the temperature settingby one.

To turn the feature off, repeatedlypress and release the button untilthe indicator lights turn off.

Rear SeatsThe vehicle's rear seat can befolded down to allow for more cargospace. Adjust the seatback onlywhen the vehicle is not moving.

To fold the seatback down:

1. Be sure the safety belt is in theretainer clip.


2. Pull on the lever located on thetop of the seatback to unlock it.

3. Fold the seatback down.

To raise the seatback:

1. Push the seatback up and pushit back to lock it into place. Makesure the safety belt is in theretainer clip and does not gettwisted or caught in theseatback.

2. The seat handle tab will lockdown when secured.

3. Push and pull the top of theseatback to be sure it is lockedinto position.

Safety BeltsThis section of the manualdescribes how to use safety beltsproperly. It also describes somethings not to do with safety belts.

{ WARNING

Do not let anyone ride where asafety belt cannot be wornproperly. In a crash, if you or yourpassenger(s) are not wearingsafety belts, the injuries can bemuch worse. You can hit thingsinside the vehicle harder or beejected from the vehicle. You andyour passenger(s) can beseriously injured or killed. In thesame crash, you might not be,if you are buckled up. Alwaysfasten your safety belt, and checkthat your passenger(s) arerestrained properly too.


{ WARNING

It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area, inside or outsideof a vehicle. In a collision, peopleriding in these areas are morelikely to be seriously injured orkilled. Do not allow people to ridein any area of your vehicle that isnot equipped with seats andsafety belts. Be sure everyone inyour vehicle is in a seat and usinga safety belt properly.

This vehicle has indicators as areminder to buckle the safety belts.See Safety Belt Reminders onpage 5‑10 for additionalinformation.

In most states and in all Canadianprovinces, the law requires wearingsafety belts. Here is why:

You never know if you will be in acrash. If you do have a crash, youdo not know if it will be aserious one.

A few crashes are mild, and somecrashes can be so serious that evenbuckled up, a person would notsurvive. But most crashes are inbetween. In many of them, peoplewho buckle up can survive andsometimes walk away. Withoutsafety belts they could have beenbadly hurt or killed.

After more than 40 years of safetybelts in vehicles, the facts are clear.In most crashes buckling up doesmatter ... a lot!

Why Safety Belts Work

When you ride in or on anything,you go as fast as it goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Supposeit is just a seat on wheels.


Put someone on it.

Get it up to speed. Then stop thevehicle. The rider does not stop.

The person keeps going untilstopped by something. In a realvehicle, it could be the windshield...

or the instrument panel...

or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow down asthe vehicle does. You get more timeto stop. You stop over moredistance, and your strongest bonestake the forces. That is why safetybelts make such good sense.


Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicleafter a crash if I am wearing asafety belt?

A: You could be — whether you arewearing a safety belt or not. Butyour chance of being consciousduring and after an accident, soyou can unbuckle and get out, ismuch greater if you are belted.And you can unbuckle a safetybelt, even if you areupside down.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, whyshould I have to wear safetybelts?

A: Airbags are supplementalsystems only; so they work withsafety belts — not instead ofthem. Whether or not an airbagis provided, all occupants stillhave to buckle up to get themost protection. That is true notonly in frontal collisions, butespecially in side and othercollisions.

Q: If I am a good driver, and Inever drive far from home,why should I wear safetybelts?

A: You may be an excellent driver,but if you are in a crash — evenone that is not your fault — youand your passenger(s) can behurt. Being a good driver doesnot protect you from thingsbeyond your control, such asbad drivers.

Most accidents occur within40 km (25miles) of home. Andthe greatest number of seriousinjuries and deaths occur atspeeds of less than 65 km/h(40 mph).

Safety belts are for everyone.

How to Wear Safety BeltsProperlyThis section is only for people ofadult size.

Be aware that there are specialthings to know about safety beltsand children. And there are differentrules for smaller children andinfants. If a child will be riding in thevehicle, see Older Children onpage 3‑36 or Infants and YoungChildren on page 3‑38. Followthose rules for everyone'sprotection.

It is very important for all occupantsto buckle up. Statistics show thatunbelted people are hurt more oftenin crashes than those who arewearing safety belts.

Occupants who are not buckled upcan be thrown out of the vehicle in acrash. And they can strike others inthe vehicle who are wearing safetybelts.


First, before you or yourpassenger(s) wear a safety belt,there is important information youshould know.

Sit up straight and always keep yourfeet on the floor in front of you. Thelap part of the belt should be wornlow and snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs. In a crash, thisapplies force to the strong pelvicbones and you would be less likelyto slide under the lap belt. If you slidunder it, the belt would apply forceon your abdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries. The

shoulder belt should go over theshoulder and across the chest.These parts of the body are bestable to take belt restraining forces.

The shoulder belt locks if there is asudden stop or crash.

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose.It will not give as muchprotection this way.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously hurt if yourshoulder belt is too loose. In acrash, you would move forwardtoo much, which could increaseinjury. The shoulder belt should fitsnugly against your body.


A: The lap belt is too loose. It willnot give nearly as muchprotection this way.


{ WARNING

You can be seriously hurt if yourlap belt is too loose. In a crash,you could slide under the lap beltand apply force on yourabdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries. Thelap belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touchingthe thighs.


A: The belt is buckled in the wrongbuckle.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured ifyour belt is buckled in the wrongplace like this. In a crash, the beltwould go up over your abdomen.The belt forces would be there,not on the pelvic bones. Thiscould cause serious internalinjuries. Always buckle your beltinto the buckle nearest you.


A: The belt is over an armrest.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured ifyour belt goes over an armrestlike this. The belt would be muchtoo high. In a crash, you can slideunder the belt. The belt forcewould then be applied on theabdomen, not on the pelvicbones, and that could causeserious or fatal injuries. Be surethe belt goes under the armrests.



A: The shoulder belt is worn underthe arm. It should be worn overthe shoulder at all times.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured ifyou wear the shoulder belt underyour arm. In a crash, your bodywould move too far forward,which would increase the chanceof head and neck injury. Also, the

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

belt would apply too much forceto the ribs, which are not asstrong as shoulder bones. Youcould also severely injure internalorgans like your liver or spleen.The shoulder belt should go overthe shoulder and across thechest.


A: The belt is behind the body.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured bynot wearing the lap-shoulder beltproperly. In a crash, you wouldnot be restrained by the shoulderbelt. Your body could move toofar forward increasing the chanceof head and neck injury. Youmight also slide under the lapbelt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen.That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.



A: The belt is twisted acrossthe body.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured by atwisted belt. In a crash, you wouldnot have the full width of the beltto spread impact forces. If a beltis twisted, make it straight so itcan work properly, or ask yourdealer to fix it.

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll seating positions in the vehiclehave a lap-shoulder belt.

The following instructions explainhow to wear a lap-shoulder beltproperly.

1. Adjust the seat, if the seat isadjustable, so you can sit upstraight. To see how, see “Seats”in the Index.

2. Pick up the latch plate and pullthe belt across you. Do not let itget twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lock ifyou pull the belt across you veryquickly. If this happens, let thebelt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across youmore slowly.

If the shoulder portion of apassenger belt is pulled out allthe way, the child restraintlocking feature may be engaged.If this happens, let the belt goback all the way and start again.

3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.


Pull up on the latch plate tomake sure it is secure. If the beltis not long enough, see SafetyBelt Extender on page 3‑21.

Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

If equipped with a shoulder beltheight adjuster, move it to theheight that is right for you. See“Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster”later in this section forinstructions on use andimportant safety information.

4. To make the lap part tight, pullup on the shoulder belt.

It may be necessary to pullstitching on the safety beltthrough the latch plate to fullytighten the lap belt on smalleroccupants.

To unlatch the belt, push the buttonon the buckle. The belt shouldreturn to its stowed position.

Before a door is closed, be sure thesafety belt is out of the way. If adoor is slammed against a safetybelt, damage can occur to both thesafety belt and the vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

The vehicle has a shoulder beltheight adjuster for the driver andright front passenger seatingpositions.


Adjust the height so the shoulderportion of the belt is on the shoulderand not falling off of it. The beltshould be close to, but notcontacting, the neck. Impropershoulder belt height adjustmentcould reduce the effectiveness ofthe safety belt in a crash. See Howto Wear Safety Belts Properly onpage 3‑11.

Press the release button (A) andmove the height adjuster to thedesired position. The adjuster canbe moved up by pushing the slide/trim up. After the adjuster is set to

the desired position, try to move itdown without pushing the releasebutton to make sure it has lockedinto position.

Safety Belt Pretensioners

This vehicle has safety beltpretensioners for front outboardoccupants. Although the safety beltpretensioners cannot be seen, theyare part of the safety belt assembly.They can help tighten the safetybelts during the early stages of amoderate to severe frontal, nearfrontal, or rear crash if the thresholdconditions for pretensioneractivation are met.

And, if the vehicle has side impactairbags, safety belt pretensionerscan help tighten the safety belts in aside crash or a rollover event.

Pretensioners work only once. If thepretensioners activate in a crash,they will need to be replaced, andprobably other new parts for thevehicle's safety belt system. SeeReplacing Safety Belt System PartsAfter a Crash on page 3‑22.

Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides

Rear shoulder belt comfort guidesmay provide added safety beltcomfort for older children who haveoutgrown booster seats and forsome adults. When installed on ashoulder belt, the comfort guidepositions the shoulder belt awayfrom the neck and head.

This vehicle may come with eitheran adjustable comfort guide orcomfort guides sewn into the side ofthe rear outboard seatback.


Adjustable Safety Belt ComfortGuide

On vehicles with the adjustablecomfort guide, one guide isprovided. Additional adjustablecomfort guides are available throughyour dealer.

To install the adjustable safety beltcomfort guide to the seatback andthe safety belt:

1. Locate the anchorage loopbetween the rear outboardseatback and seat bolster, nearthe top.

2. Attach the adjustable comfortguide to the anchor loop bythreading the hook throughthe loop.


3. Place the guide over the belt,and insert the two edges of thebelt into the slots of the guide.

4. Be sure that the belt is nottwisted and it lies flat. Theelastic cord must be under thebelt and the guide on top.

5. The elastic cord on the comfortguide is adjustable. You canmake it longer or shorter bysqueezing both ends of theplastic adjuster and pulling onthe elastic cord or the guide.

6. Adjust the guide so the shoulderportion of the belt is on theshoulder and not falling off of it.The belt should be close to, butnot contacting, the neck.Improper comfort guideadjustment could reduce theeffectiveness of the safety belt ina crash.

{ WARNING

A safety belt that is not properlyworn may not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could be

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

seriously injured. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulderand across the chest. These partsof the body are best able to takebelt restraining forces.

7. Buckle, position, and release thesafety belt as describedpreviously in this section. Makesure that the shoulder beltcrosses the shoulder.


To remove and store the comfortguide, squeeze the belt edgestogether so that the safety belt canbe removed from the guide.Un-hook the guide from the loop onthe seat. Store the guide in aconvenient place like the glove boxfor the next time it is needed.

Sewn‐in Safety Belt ComfortGuide

On vehicles with the sewn‐incomfort guide, there is one guide foreach outboard passenger position inthe rear seat.

To install a comfort guide to thesafety belt:

1. Remove the guide from itsstorage pocket on the side ofthe seat.

2. Place the guide over the belt,and insert the two edges of thebelt into the slots of the guide.

3. Be sure that the belt is nottwisted and it lies flat. Theelastic cord must be under thebelt and the guide on top.

{ WARNING

A safety belt that is not properlyworn may not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulder

(Continued)


WARNING (Continued)

and across the chest. These partsof the body are best able to takebelt restraining forces.

4. Buckle, position, and release thesafety belt as describedpreviously in this section. Makesure the shoulder portion of thebelt is on the shoulder and notfalling off of it. The belt shouldbe close to, but not contacting,the neck.

To remove and store the comfortguide, squeeze the belt edgestogether so that the safety belt canbe removed from the guide. Storethe guide in its storage pocket onthe side of the seatback.

Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancySafety belts work for everyone,including pregnant women. Like alloccupants, they are more likely tobe seriously injured if they do notwear safety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear alap-shoulder belt, and the lapportion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding,throughout the pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus isto protect the mother. When a safetybelt is worn properly, it is more likelythat the fetus will not be hurt in acrash. For pregnant women, as foranyone, the key to making safetybelts effective is wearing themproperly.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle's safety belt will fastenaround you, you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not longenough, your dealer will order youan extender. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat youwill wear, so the extender will belong enough for you. To help avoidpersonal injury, do not let someoneelse use it, and use it only for theseat it is made to fit. The extenderhas been designed for adults. Never


use it for securing child seats. Towear it, attach it to the regular safetybelt. For more information, see theinstruction sheet that comes withthe extender.

Safety System CheckNow and then, check that the safetybelt reminder light, safety belts,buckles, latch plates, retractors andanchorages are working properly.Look for any other loose ordamaged safety belt system partsthat might keep a safety belt systemfrom doing its job. See your dealerto have it repaired. Torn or frayedsafety belts may not protect you in acrash. They can rip apart underimpact forces. If a belt is torn orfrayed, get a new one right away.

Make sure the safety belt reminderlight is working. See Safety BeltReminders on page 5‑10 for moreinformation.

Keep safety belts clean and dry.See Safety Belt Care onpage 3‑22.

Safety Belt CareKeep belts clean and dry.

{ WARNING

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts After aCrash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the safetybelt system in the vehicle.A damaged safety belt systemmay not properly protect theperson using it, resulting inserious injury or even death in acrash. To help make sure the

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

safety belt systems are workingproperly after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

After a minor crash, replacement ofsafety belts may not be necessary.But the safety belt assemblies thatwere used during any crash mayhave been stressed or damaged.See your dealer to have the safetybelt assemblies inspected orreplaced.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the safety beltsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Have the safety belt pretensionerschecked if the vehicle has been in acrash, or if the airbag readiness lightstays on after you start the vehicleor while you are driving. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑10.


Airbag SystemThe vehicle has the followingairbags:. A frontal airbag for the driver.. A frontal airbag for the right front

passenger.. A seat-mounted side impact

airbag for the driver.. A seat-mounted side impact

airbag for the right frontpassenger.

. A roof-rail airbag for the driverand the passenger seateddirectly behind the driver.

. A roof-rail airbag for the rightfront passenger and thepassenger seated directlybehind the right front passenger.

The vehicle may have the followingairbags:. A seat-mounted side impact

airbag for the rear seatpassenger seated directlybehind the driver.

. A seat-mounted side impactairbag for the rear seatpassenger seated directlybehind the right front passenger.

All of the airbags in the vehicle willhave the word AIRBAG embossedin the trim or on an attached labelnear the deployment opening.

For frontal airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear on the middlepart of the steering wheel for thedriver and on the instrument panelfor the right front passenger.

With seat-mounted side impactairbags, the word AIRBAG willappear on the side of the seatbackclosest to the door.

With roof-rail airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear along theheadliner or trim.

Airbags are designed to supplementthe protection provided by safetybelts. Even though today's airbagsare also designed to help reducethe risk of injury from the force of aninflating bag, all airbags must inflatevery quickly to do their job.


Here are the most important thingsto know about the airbag system:

{ WARNING

You can be severely injured orkilled in a crash if you are notwearing your safety belt— even ifyou have airbags. Airbags aredesigned to work with safetybelts, but do not replace them.Also, airbags are not designed todeploy in every crash. In somecrashes safety belts are your onlyrestraint. See When Should anAirbag Inflate? on page 3‑26.

Wearing your safety belt during acrash helps reduce your chanceof hitting things inside the vehicleor being ejected from it. Airbagsare “supplemental restraints” tothe safety belts. Everyone in yourvehicle should wear a safety beltproperly—whether or not there isan airbag for that person.

{ WARNING

Airbags inflate with great force,faster than the blink of an eye.Anyone who is up against, or veryclose to, any airbag when itinflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Do not sit unnecessarilyclose to the airbag, as you wouldbe if you were sitting on the edgeof your seat or leaning forward.Safety belts help keep you inposition before and during acrash. Always wear your safetybelt, even with airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possiblewhile still maintaining control ofthe vehicle.

Occupants should not lean on orsleep against the door or sidewindows in seating positions withseat-mounted side impact airbagsand/or roof-rail airbags.

{ WARNING

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer protectionfor adults and older children, butnot for young children and infants.Neither the vehicle's safety beltsystem nor its airbag system isdesigned for them. Youngchildren and infants need theprotection that a child restraintsystem can provide. Alwayssecure children properly in yourvehicle. To read how, see OlderChildren on page 3‑36 or Infantsand Young Children onpage 3‑38.


There is an airbag readiness lighton the instrument panel cluster,which shows the airbag symbol. Thesystem checks the airbag electricalsystem for malfunctions. The lighttells you if there is an electricalproblem. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑10 for moreinformation.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver frontal airbag is in themiddle of the steering wheel.

The right front passenger frontalairbag is in the instrument panel onthe passenger side.

Driver Side Shown, PassengerSide Similar

The seat-mounted side impactairbags for the driver and right frontpassenger are in the side of theseatbacks closest to the door.

The roof-rail airbags for the driver,right front passenger, and secondrow outboard passengers are in theceiling above the side windows.


Rear Seat Driver Side Shown,Passenger Side Similar

If the vehicle has second rowseat‐mounted side impact airbags,they are in the sides of the rearseatback closest to the door.

{ WARNING

If something is between anoccupant and an airbag, theairbag might not inflate properlyor it might force the object intothat person causing severe injury

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

or even death. The path of aninflating airbag must be keptclear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and anairbag, and do not attach or putanything on the steering wheelhub or on or near any otherairbag covering.

Do not use seat accessories thatblock the inflation path of aseat-mounted side impact airbag.

Never secure anything to the roofof a vehicle with roof-rail airbagsby routing a rope or tie downthrough any door or windowopening. If you do, the path of aninflating roof-rail airbag will beblocked.

When Should an AirbagInflate?Frontal airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe frontalor near-frontal crashes to helpreduce the potential for severeinjuries mainly to the driver's or rightfront passenger's head and chest.However, they are only designed toinflate if the impact exceeds apredetermined deploymentthreshold. Deployment thresholdsare used to predict how severe acrash is likely to be in time for theairbags to inflate and help restrainthe occupants.

Whether the frontal airbags will orshould deploy is not based on howfast your vehicle is traveling.It depends largely on what you hit,the direction of the impact, and howquickly your vehicle slows down.


Frontal airbags may inflate atdifferent crash speeds. Forexample:. If the vehicle hits a stationary

object, the airbags could inflateat a different crash speed than ifthe vehicle hits a moving object.

. If the vehicle hits an object thatdeforms, the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits an objectthat does not deform.

. If the vehicle hits a narrow object(like a pole), the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a wideobject (like a wall).

. If the vehicle goes into an objectat an angle, the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle goes straightinto the object.

Thresholds can also vary withspecific vehicle design.

Frontal airbags are not intended toinflate during vehicle rollovers, rearimpacts, or in many side impacts.

In addition, the vehicle hasdual-stage frontal airbags.Dual-stage airbags adjust therestraint according to crash severity.The vehicle has electronic frontalsensors, which help the sensingsystem distinguish between amoderate frontal impact and a moresevere frontal impact. For moderatefrontal impacts, dual-stage airbagsinflate at a level less than fulldeployment. For more severe frontalimpacts, full deployment occurs.

The vehicle has seat-mounted sideimpact and roof-rail airbags. SeeAirbag System on page 3‑23.Seat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags are intended toinflate in moderate to severe sidecrashes. In addition, these roof‐railairbags are intended to inflateduring a rollover or in a severefrontal impact. Seat-mounted sideimpact and roof-rail airbags willinflate if the crash severity is above

the system's designed thresholdlevel. The threshold level can varywith specific vehicle design.

Roof‐rail airbags are not intended toinflate in rear impacts. Both roof‐railairbags will deploy when either sideof the vehicle is struck or if thesensing system predicts that thevehicle is about to roll over, or in asevere frontal impact.

In any particular crash, no one cansay whether an airbag should haveinflated simply because of thedamage to a vehicle or because ofwhat the repair costs were. Forfrontal airbags, inflation isdetermined by what the vehicle hits,the angle of the impact, and howquickly the vehicle slows down. Forseat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags, deployment isdetermined by the location andseverity of the side impact.

In a rollover event, roof‐rail airbagdeployment is determined by thedirection of the roll.


What Makes an AirbagInflate?In a deployment event, the sensingsystem sends an electrical signaltriggering a release of gas from theinflator. Gas from the inflator fills theairbag causing the bag to break outof the cover and deploy. The inflator,the airbag, and related hardware areall part of the airbag module.

Frontal airbag modules are locatedinside the steering wheel andinstrument panel. For vehicles withseat-mounted side impact airbags,there are airbag modules in the sideof the front seatbacks closest to thedoor. For vehicles with roof-railairbags, there are airbag modules inthe ceiling of the vehicle, near theside windows that have occupantseating positions.

How Does an AirbagRestrain?In moderate to severe frontal ornear frontal collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the steeringwheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions,even belted occupants can contactthe inside of the vehicle.

Airbags supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts. Frontalairbags distribute the force of theimpact more evenly over theoccupant's upper body, stoppingthe occupant more gradually.Seat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags distribute the forceof the impact more evenly over theoccupant's upper body.

But airbags would not help in manytypes of collisions, primarilybecause the occupant's motion isnot toward those airbags. See WhenShould an Airbag Inflate? onpage 3‑26 for more information.

Airbags should never be regardedas anything more than a supplementto safety belts.

What Will You See Afteran Airbag Inflates?After the frontal airbags andseat-mounted side impact airbagsinflate, they quickly deflate, soquickly that some people may noteven realize an airbag inflated.Roof-rail airbags may still be at leastpartially inflated for some time afterthey deploy. Some components ofthe airbag module may be hot forseveral minutes. For location of theairbag modules, see What Makesan Airbag Inflate? on page 3‑28.

The parts of the airbag that comeinto contact with you may be warm,but not too hot to touch. There maybe some smoke and dust comingfrom the vents in the deflatedairbags. Airbag inflation does notprevent the driver from seeing out of


the windshield or being able to steerthe vehicle, nor does it preventpeople from leaving the vehicle.

{ WARNING

When an airbag inflates, theremay be dust in the air. This dustcould cause breathing problemsfor people with a history ofasthma or other breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon asit is safe to do so. If you havebreathing problems but cannotget out of the vehicle after anairbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door.If you experience breathingproblems following an airbagdeployment, you should seekmedical attention.

The vehicle has a feature that mayautomatically unlock the doors, turnthe interior lamps on, and turn thehazard warning flashers on whenthe airbags inflate. You can lock the

doors, turn the interior lamps off,and turn the hazard warningflashers off by using the controlsfor those features.

In many crashes severe enough toinflate the airbag, windshields arebroken by vehicle deformation.Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the right frontpassenger airbag.. Airbags are designed to inflate

only once. After an airbaginflates, you will need some newparts for the airbag system.If you do not get them, theairbag system will not be thereto help protect you in anothercrash. A new system will includeairbag modules and possiblyother parts. The service manualfor your vehicle covers the needto replace other parts.

. The vehicle has a crash sensingand diagnostic module whichrecords information after acrash. See Vehicle Data

Recording and Privacy onpage 13‑14 and Event DataRecorders on page 13‑14.

. Let only qualified technicianswork on the airbag systems.Improper service can mean thatan airbag system will not workproperly. See your dealer forservice.

Passenger SensingSystemThe vehicle has a passengersensing system for the right frontpassenger position. The passengerairbag status indicator will be visibleon the instrument panel when thevehicle is started.


The words ON and OFF will bevisible during the system check.When the system check iscomplete, either the word ON or theword OFF will be visible. SeePassenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 5‑11.

The passenger sensing systemturns off the right front passengerfrontal airbag and seat‐mountedside impact airbag under certainconditions. The driver airbags andthe roof‐rail airbags are not affectedby the passenger sensing system.

The passenger sensing systemworks with sensors that are part ofthe right front passenger seat. Thesensors are designed to detect thepresence of a properly seatedoccupant and determine if the rightfront passenger frontal airbag andseat‐mounted side impact airbagshould be enabled (may inflate)or not.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlysecured in a rear seat in the correctchild restraint for their weightand size.

We recommend that children besecured in a rear seat, including: aninfant or a child riding in arear-facing child restraint; a childriding in a forward-facing child seat;an older child riding in a boosterseat; and children, who are largeenough, using safety belts.

A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front.” This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

rear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag(if equipped), no system isfail-safe. No one can guaranteethat an airbag will not deployunder some unusualcircumstance, even though theairbag(s) are off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if theairbag(s) are off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint in

(Continued)


WARNING (Continued)

the right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag and seat‐mounted side impact airbag if:. The right front passenger seat is

unoccupied.. The system determines that an

infant is present in a rear-facinginfant seat.

. The system determines that asmall child is present in a childrestraint.

. The system determines that asmall child is present in abooster seat.

. A right front passenger takeshis/her weight off of the seat fora period of time.

. The right front passenger seat isoccupied by a smaller person,such as a child who hasoutgrown child restraints.

. There is a critical problem withthe airbag system or thepassenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag and seat‐mounted side impact airbag, the offindicator will light and stay lit as areminder that the airbags are off.See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5‑11.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn on (may inflate) theright front passenger frontal airbagand seat‐mounted side impactairbag anytime the system sensesthat a person of adult size is sittingproperly in the right front passengerseat. When the passenger sensingsystem has allowed the airbags tobe enabled, the on indicator will lightand stay lit as a reminder that theairbags are active.

For some children who haveoutgrown child restraints and forvery small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turnoff the right front passenger frontalairbag and seat‐mounted sideimpact airbag, depending uponthe person's seating posture andbody build. Everyone in thevehicle who has outgrown childrestraints should wear a safety beltproperly — whether or not there isan airbag for that person.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑10 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.


If the On Indicator is Lit for aChild Restraint

If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove the child restraint fromthe vehicle.

3. Remove any additional itemsfrom the seat such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

4. Reinstall the child restraintfollowing the directions providedby the child restraintmanufacturer and refer toSecuring Child Restraints (RearSeat) on page 3‑52 or SecuringChild Restraints (FrontPassenger Seat) on page 3‑54.

5. If, after reinstalling the childrestraint and restarting thevehicle, the on indicator is still lit,turn the vehicle off. Then slightlyrecline the vehicle seatback andadjust the seat cushion,if adjustable, to make sure thatthe vehicle seatback is notpushing the child restraint intothe seat cushion.

Also make sure the childrestraint is not trapped under thevehicle head restraint. If thishappens, adjust the headrestraint. See Head Restraintson page 3‑2 .

6. Restart the vehicle.

If the on indicator is still lit,secure the child in the childrestraint in a rear seat position inthe vehicle, and check with yourdealer.

If the Off Indicator is Lit for anAdult-Size Occupant

If a person of adult-size is sitting inthe right front passenger seat, butthe off indicator is lit, it could bebecause that person is not sittingproperly in the seat. If this happens,use the following steps to allow thesystem to detect that person and


enable the right front passengerfrontal airbag and seat‐mountedside impact airbag:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove any additional materialfrom the seat, such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

3. Place the seatback in the fullyupright position.

4. Have the person sit upright inthe seat, centered on the seatcushion, with legs comfortablyextended.

5. Restart the vehicle and have theperson remain in this position fortwo to three minutes after the onindicator is lit.

Additional Factors AffectingSystem Operation

Safety belts help keep thepassenger in position on the seatduring vehicle maneuvers andbraking, which helps the passengersensing system maintain thepassenger airbag status. See“Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints”in the Index for additionalinformation about the importance ofproper restraint use.

A thick layer of additional material,such as a blanket or cushion,or aftermarket equipment such asseat covers, seat heaters, and seatmassagers can affect how well thepassenger sensing systemoperates. We recommend that you

not use seat covers or otheraftermarket equipment except whenapproved by GM for your specificvehicle. See Adding Equipment tothe Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑34 for more informationabout modifications that can affecthow the system operates.

{ WARNING

Stowing of articles under thepassenger seat or between thepassenger seat cushion andseatback may interfere with theproper operation of the passengersensing system.


Servicing theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAirbags affect how the vehicleshould be serviced. There are partsof the airbag system in severalplaces around the vehicle. Yourdealer and the service manual haveinformation about servicing thevehicle and the airbag system. Topurchase a service manual, seeService Publications OrderingInformation on page 13‑11.

{ WARNING

For up to 10 seconds after theignition is turned off and thebattery is disconnected, an airbagcan still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if youare close to an airbag when itinflates. Avoid yellow connectors.They are probably part of theairbag system. Be sure to follow

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

proper service procedures, andmake sure the person performingwork for you is qualified to do so.

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped VehicleQ: Is there anything I might add

to or change about the vehiclethat could keep the airbagsfrom working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things thatchange the vehicle's frame,bumper system, height, frontend, or side sheet metal, theymay keep the airbag systemfrom working properly. Changingor moving any parts of the seats,safety belts, the airbag sensingand diagnostic module, steeringwheel, instrument panel, roof-railairbag modules, ceiling headlineror pillar garnish trim, front

sensors, side impact sensors,or airbag wiring can affect theoperation of the airbag system.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system forthe right front passengerposition, which includes sensorsthat are part of the passengerseat. The passenger sensingsystem may not operate properlyif the original seat trim isreplaced with non-GM covers,upholstery, or trim, or with GMcovers, upholstery, or trimdesigned for a different vehicle.Any object, such as anaftermarket seat heater or acomfort‐enhancing pad ordevice, installed under or on topof the seat fabric, could alsointerfere with the operation ofthe passenger sensing system.This could either prevent properdeployment of the passengerairbag(s) or prevent thepassenger sensing system fromproperly turning off the


passenger airbag(s). SeePassenger Sensing System onpage 3‑29.

If you have questions, callCustomer Assistance. Thephone numbers and addressesfor Customer Assistance are inStep Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure in thismanual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure onpage 13‑1.

Q: Because I have a disability,I have to get my vehiclemodified. How can I find outwhether this will affect myairbag system?

A: If you have questions, callCustomer Assistance. Thephone numbers and addressesfor Customer Assistance are inStep Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure in thismanual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure onpage 13‑1.

In addition, your dealer and theservice manual have informationabout the location of the airbagsensors, sensing and diagnosticmodule, and airbag wiring.

Airbag System CheckThe airbag system does not needregularly scheduled maintenance orreplacement. Make sure the airbagreadiness light is working. SeeAirbag Readiness Light onpage 5‑10 for more information.

Notice: If an airbag covering isdamaged, opened, or broken, theairbag may not work properly. Donot open or break the airbagcoverings. If there are anyopened or broken airbag covers,have the airbag covering and/orairbag module replaced. For thelocation of the airbag modules,see What Makes an AirbagInflate? on page 3‑28. See yourdealer for service.

Replacing Airbag SystemParts After a Crash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the airbagsystems in your vehicle.A damaged airbag system maynot work properly and may notprotect you and yourpassenger(s) in a crash, resultingin serious injury or even death. Tohelp make sure your airbagsystems are working properlyafter a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

If an airbag inflates, you will need toreplace airbag system parts. Seeyour dealer for service.


If the airbag readiness light stays onafter the vehicle is started or comeson when you are driving, the airbagsystem may not work properly. Havethe vehicle serviced right away. SeeAirbag Readiness Light onpage 5‑10 for more information.

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrownbooster seats should wear thevehicle's safety belts.

The manufacturer's instructions thatcome with the booster seat state theweight and height limitations for thatbooster. Use a booster seat with alap-shoulder belt until the childpasses the below fit test:. Sit all the way back on the seat.

Do the knees bend at the seatedge? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.Does the shoulder belt rest onthe shoulder? If yes, continue.If no, try using the rear safetybelt comfort guide. See “RearSafety Belt Comfort Guides”under Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 3‑15 for more information.If the shoulder belt still does notrest on the shoulder, then returnto the booster seat.

. Does the lap belt fit low andsnug on the hips, touching thethighs? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.


. Can proper safety belt fit bemaintained for the length of thetrip? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

Q: What is the proper way towear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get theadditional restraint a shoulderbelt can provide. The shoulderbelt should not cross the face orneck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, justtouching the top of the thighs.This applies belt force to thechild's pelvic bones in a crash.It should never be worn over theabdomen, which could causesevere or even fatal internalinjuries in a crash.

Also see “Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 3‑15.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

In a crash, children who are notbuckled up can strike other peoplewho are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Olderchildren need to use safety beltsproperly.

{ WARNING

Never do this.

Never allow two children to wearthe same safety belt. The safetybelt can not properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, the twochildren can be crushed together

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

and seriously injured. A safetybelt must be used by only oneperson at a time.


{ WARNING

Never do this.

Never allow a child to wear thesafety belt with the shoulder beltbehind their back. A child can beseriously injured by not wearingthe lap-shoulder belt properly. In acrash, the child would not berestrained by the shoulder belt.The child could move too farforward increasing the chance ofhead and neck injury. The childmight also slide under the lapbelt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen.That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.

Infants and YoungChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needsprotection! This includes infants andall other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age andsize of the traveler changes theneed, for everyone, to use safetyrestraints. In fact, the law in everystate in the United States and inevery Canadian province sayschildren up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{ WARNING

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and neverallow children to play with thesafety belts.

Airbags plus lap‐shoulder belts offerprotection for adults and olderchildren, but not for young childrenand infants. Neither the vehicle'ssafety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Everytime infants and young children ridein vehicles, they should have theprotection provided by appropriatechild restraints.

Children who are not restrainedproperly can strike other people,or can be thrown out of the vehicle.


{ WARNING

Never do this.

Never hold an infant or a childwhile riding in a vehicle. Due tocrash forces, an infant or a childwill become so heavy it is notpossible to hold it during a crash.For example, in a crash at only40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)infant will suddenly become a110 kg (240 lb) force on a person'sarms. An infant should besecured in an appropriaterestraint.

{ WARNING

Never do this.

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Never put a rear-facingchild restraint in the right frontseat. Secure a rear-facing childrestraint in a rear seat. It is alsobetter to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in a rear seat. If youmust secure a forward-facing

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

child restraint in the right frontseat, always move the frontpassenger seat as far back as itwill go.


Q: What are the different types ofadd-on child restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, whichare purchased by the vehicle'sowner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particularrestraint should take intoconsideration not only the child'sweight, height, and age but alsowhether or not the restraint willbe compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of childrestraints, there are manydifferent models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, besure it is designed to be used ina motor vehicle. If it is, therestraint will have a label sayingthat it meets federal motorvehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturer'sinstructions that come with therestraint state the weight andheight limitations for a particularchild restraint. In addition, there

are many kinds of restraintsavailable for children withspecial needs.

{ WARNING

To reduce the risk of neck andhead injury during a crash, infantsneed complete support. This isbecause an infant's neck is notfully developed and its headweighs so much compared withthe rest of its body. In a crash, aninfant in a rear-facing childrestraint settles into the restraint,so the crash forces can bedistributed across the strongestpart of an infant's body, the backand shoulders. Infants shouldalways be secured in rear-facingchild restraints.

{ WARNING

A young child's hip bones are stillso small that the vehicle's regularsafety belt may not remain low onthe hip bones, as it should.Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child's abdomen. In a crash,the belt would apply force on abody area that is unprotected byany bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatalinjuries. To reduce the risk ofserious or fatal injuries during acrash, young children shouldalways be secured in appropriatechild restraints.


Child Restraint Systems

(A) Rear‐Facing Infant Seat

A rear-facing infant seat (A)provides restraint with the seatingsurface against the back of theinfant.

The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts tokeep the infant positioned in therestraint.

(B) Forward-Facing Child Seat

A forward-facing child seat (B)provides restraint for the child'sbody with the harness.

(C) Booster Seats

A booster seat (C) is a child restraintdesigned to improve the fit of thevehicle's safety belt system.A booster seat can also help a childto see out the window.


Securing an Add-On ChildRestraint in the Vehicle

{ WARNING

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle. Secure the childrestraint properly in the vehicleusing the vehicle's safety belt orLATCH system, following theinstructions that came with thatchild restraint and the instructionsin this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury,the child restraint must be securedin the vehicle. Child restraintsystems must be secured in vehicleseats by lap belts or the lap beltportion of a lap-shoulder belt, or bythe LATCH system. See LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3‑44 formore information. Children can be

endangered in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle.

When securing an add-on childrestraint, refer to the instructionsthat come with the restraint whichmay be on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both, and to this manual.The child restraint instructions areimportant, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacementcopy from the manufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle — even when no child isin it.

In some areas, Certified ChildPassenger Safety Technicians(CPSTs) are available to inspectand demonstrate how to correctlyuse and install child restraints. Inthe U.S., refer to the NationalHighway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) website to

locate the nearest child safety seatinspection station. For CPSTavailability in Canada, check withTransport Canada or the ProvincialMinistry of Transportation office.

Securing the Child Within theChild Restraint

{ WARNING

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the child is notproperly secured in the childrestraint. Secure the childproperly following the instructionsthat came with that child restraint.

Where to Put theRestraintAccording to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.


We recommend that children andchild restraints be secured in a rearseat, including: an infant or a childriding in a rear-facing child restraint;a child riding in a forward-facingchild seat; an older child riding in abooster seat; and children, who arelarge enough, using safety belts.

A label on your sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front.” This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great if theairbag deploys.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right front

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

passenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbagis off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3‑29 for additionalinformation.

When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with yourchild restraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

Child restraints and booster seatsvary considerably in size, and somemay fit in certain seating positionsbetter than others. Always makesure the child restraint is properlysecured.

Depending on where you place thechild restraint and the size of thechild restraint, you may not be ableto access adjacent safety beltassemblies or LATCH anchors foradditional passengers or childrestraints. Adjacent seatingpositions should not be used if thechild restraint prevents access to orinterferes with the routing of thesafety belt.

Wherever a child restraint isinstalled, be sure to secure the childrestraint properly.


Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inyour vehicle — even when no childis in it.

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH System)The LATCH system holds a childrestraint during driving or in a crash.This system is designed to makeinstallation of a child restraint easier.The LATCH system uses anchors inthe vehicle and attachments on thechild restraint that are made for usewith the LATCH system.

Make sure that a LATCH-compatiblechild restraint is properly installedusing the anchors, or use thevehicle's safety belts to secure therestraint, following the instructionsthat came with that restraint, andalso the instructions in this manual.

When installing a child restraint witha top tether, you must also useeither the lower anchors or thesafety belts to properly secure thechild restraint. A child restraint mustnever be installed using only the toptether and anchor.

In order to use the LATCH system inthe vehicle, you need a childrestraint that has LATCHattachments. The child restraintmanufacturer will provide you withinstructions on how to use the childrestraint and its attachments. Thefollowing explains how to attach achild restraint with theseattachments in the vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions orchild restraints have lower anchorsand attachments or top tetheranchors and attachments.

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (A) are metal barsbuilt into the vehicle. There are twolower anchors for each LATCHseating position that willaccommodate a child restraint withlower attachments (B).


Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (A, C) anchors the topof the child restraint to the vehicle.A top tether anchor is built into thevehicle. The top tetherattachment (B) on the child restraintconnects to the top tether anchor inthe vehicle in order to reduce theforward movement and rotation ofthe child restraint during driving or ina crash.

The child restraint may have asingle tether (A) or a dual tether (C).Either will have a singleattachment (B) to secure the toptether to the anchor.

Some child restraints that have atop tether are designed for use withor without the top tether beingattached. Others require the toptether always to be attached. InCanada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for the childrestraint.

Lower Anchor and Top TetherAnchor Locations

Rear Seat

i (Top Tether Anchor): Seatingpositions with top tether anchors.

j (Lower Anchor): Seatingpositions with two lower anchors.


To assist you in locating the loweranchors, each rear anchor positionhas a label, near the creasebetween the seatback and the seatcushion.

To assist you in locating the toptether anchors, the top tether anchorsymbol is located on the cover.

The top tether anchors are locatedunder the covers, behind the rearseat, on the filler panel. Be sure touse an anchor located on the sameside of the vehicle as the seatingposition where the child restraint willbe placed.

Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be attached, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top tethermust be attached.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition. See Where to Put theRestraint on page 3‑42 foradditional information.

Securing a Child RestraintDesigned for the LATCHSystem

{ WARNING

If a LATCH-type child restraint isnot attached to anchors, the childrestraint will not be able to protectthe child correctly. In a crash, thechild could be seriously injured orkilled. Install a LATCH-type childrestraint properly using theanchors, or use the vehicle'ssafety belts to secure therestraint, following the instructions

(Continued)


WARNING (Continued)

that came with the child restraintand the instructions in thismanual.

{ WARNING

Do not attach more than one childrestraint to a single anchor.Attaching more than one childrestraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachmentto come loose or even breakduring a crash. A child or otherscould be injured. To reduce therisk of serious or fatal injuriesduring a crash, attach only onechild restraint per anchor.

{ WARNING

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Buckle any unused safetybelts behind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pullthe shoulder belt all the way outof the retractor to set the lock,if your vehicle has one, after thechild restraint has been installed.

Notice: Do not let the LATCHattachments rub against thevehicle’s safety belts. This maydamage these parts. If necessary,move buckled safety belts toavoid rubbing the LATCHattachments.

Do not fold the empty rear seatwith a safety belt buckled. Thiscould damage the safety belt orthe seat. Unbuckle and return thesafety belt to its stowed position,before folding the seat.

If you need to secure more than onechild restraint in the rear seat, seeWhere to Put the Restraint onpage 3‑42.

You cannot secure three childrestraints using the LATCH anchorsin the rear seat at the same time,but you can install two of them.If you want to do this, install oneLATCH child restraint in thepassenger-side position, and installthe other one either in thedriver-side position or in the centerposition. If you need to install childrestraints in both the center anddriver‐side position, the one in thecenter seating position will need tobe secured using the vehicle safetybelts instead of the LATCH anchors.

Refer to the following illustration tolearn which anchors to use.


A. Passenger Side Rear SeatingPosition and Lower Anchors1 and 2

B. Center Rear Seating Positionand Lower Anchors 3 and 4

C. Driver Side Rear SeatingPosition and Lower Anchors4 and 5

There are five lower LATCH anchorsin the rear seat.. Use anchors 1 and 2 when

installing a child restraint usingLATCH in seating position A.

. Use anchors 3 and 4 wheninstalling a child restraint usingLATCH in seating position B.

. Use anchors 4 and 5 wheninstalling a child restraint usingLATCH in seating position C.

Installing child restraints usingLATCH in seating positions B and Cat the same time is prohibited.

Make sure to attach the childrestraint at the proper anchorlocation.

This system is designed to makeinstallation of child restraints easier.When using lower anchors, do notuse the vehicle's safety belts.Instead use the vehicle's anchorsand child restraint attachments tosecure the restraints. Somerestraints also use another vehicleanchor to secure a top tether.

1. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments to the loweranchors. If the child restraintdoes not have lowerattachments or the desiredseating position does not have

lower anchors, secure the childrestraint with the top tether andthe safety belts. Refer to thechild restraint manufacturerinstructions and the instructionsin this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors forthe desired seatingposition.

1.2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

If the head restraintinterferes with the properinstallation of the childrestraint, the head restraintmay be removed. See“Head Restraint Removaland Reinstallation” at theend of this section.

1.3. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments on the childrestraint to the loweranchors.


2. If the child restraint manufacturerrecommends that the top tetherbe attached, attach and tightenthe top tether to the top tetheranchor, if equipped. Refer to thechild restraint instructions andthe following steps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.

Open the cover to exposethe anchor.

2.2. Route, attach, and tightenthe top tether according tothe child restraintinstructions and thefollowing instructions:

. If the position you are usingdoes not have a headrestor head restraint and youare using a single tether,route the tether over theseatback.

. If the position you are usingdoes not have a headrestor head restraint and youare using a dual tether,route the tether over theseatback.


. If the position you are usinghas an adjustable headrestor head restraint and youare using a single tether,route the tether under theheadrest or head restraintand in between theheadrest or head restraintposts. See Head Restraintson page 3‑2 .

. If the position you are usinghas an adjustable headrestor head restraint and youare using a dual tetherroute the tether around theheadrest or head restraint.

3. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at theLATCH path and attempt tomove it side‐to‐side and back‐and‐forth. There should be nomore than 2.5 cm (1 in) ofmovement, for properinstallation.

Head Restraint Removal andReinstallation

The rear outboard head restraintscan be removed if they interfere withthe proper installation of the childrestraint.

To remove the head restraint:

1. Partially fold the seatbackforward. See Rear Seats onpage 3‑7 for additionalinformation.


2. Press both buttons on the headrestraint posts at the same time,and pull up on the headrestraint.

3. Store the head restraint in thetrunk of the vehicle.

4. When the child restraint isremoved, reinstall the headrestraint before the seatingposition is used.

{ WARNING

With head restraints that are notinstalled and adjusted properly,there is a greater chance thatoccupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Do notdrive until the head restraints forall occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

To reinstall the head restraint:

1. Insert the head restraint postsinto the holes in the top of theseatback. The notches (A) onthe posts must face the driverside of the vehicle.

2. Push the head restraint all theway down.

3. Pull up on the head restraint tobe sure that it locks.

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the LATCHsystem in the vehicle. A damagedLATCH system may not properlysecure the child restraint,resulting in serious injury or evendeath in a crash. To help makesure the LATCH system isworking properly after a crash,see your dealer to have thesystem inspected and anynecessary replacements made assoon as possible.

If the vehicle has the LATCH systemand it was being used during acrash, new LATCH system partsmay be needed.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the LATCHsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.


Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat)When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with the childrestraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑44 for how andwhere to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraint issecured in the vehicle using asafety belt and it uses a top tether,see Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) onpage 3‑44 for top tether anchorlocations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

If the child restraint does not havethe LATCH system, you will beusing the safety belt to secure thechild restraint in this position. Besure to follow the instructions thatcame with the child restraint. Securethe child in the child restraint whenand as the instructions say.

If more than one child restraintneeds to be installed in the rearseat, be sure to read Where to Putthe Restraint on page 3‑42.

1. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

If the head restraint interfereswith the proper installation of thechild restraint, the head restraintmay be removed. See “HeadRestraint Removal andReinstallation” under LowerAnchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) onpage 3‑44.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.




4. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightened butnot pulled out of the retractor.

5. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt,and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint, itmay be helpful to use your kneeto push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 4 and 5.

6. If the child restraint has a toptether, follow the child restraintmanufacturer's instructionsregarding the use of the toptether. See Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑44 for moreinformation.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attempt tomove it side‐to‐side and back‐and‐forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.If the top tether is attached to a toptether anchor, disconnect it. If thehead restraint was removed,reinstall it before the seatingposition is used. See “HeadRestraint Removal andReinstallation” under Lower Anchors


and Tethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑44 foradditional information on installingthe head restraint properly.

Securing Child Restraints(Front Passenger Seat)This vehicle has airbags. A rearseat is a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. SeeWhere to Put the Restraint onpage 3‑42.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system which isdesigned to turn off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag and seat‐mounted side impact airbag undercertain conditions. See PassengerSensing System on page 3‑29 andPassenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 5‑11 for more information,including important safetyinformation.

A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front.” This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great if theairbag deploys.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will not

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

deploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbagis off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3‑29 for additionalinformation.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑44 for how andwhere to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraint issecured using a safety belt and ituses a top tether, see Lower


Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3‑44 fortop tether anchor locations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

You will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint inthis position. Follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint.

1. Move the seat as far back as itwill go before securing theforward-facing child restraint.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbagand seat‐mounted side airbag,the off indicator on thepassenger airbag statusindicator should light and stay litwhen you start the vehicle. SeePassenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5‑11.

2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.




5. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightened butnot pulled out of the retractor.

6. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt,and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint, itmay be helpful to use your kneeto push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 5 and 6.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attempt tomove it side‐to‐side and back‐and‐forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

If the airbags are off, the offindicator in the passenger airbagstatus indicator will come on andstay on when the vehicle is started.

If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit, see “If theOn Indicator is Lit for a ChildRestraint ” under PassengerSensing System on page 3‑29 formore information.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.

Storage 4-1

Storage

Storage CompartmentsInstrument Panel Storage . . . . 4-1Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Rear Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Center Console Storage . . . . . . 4-2

Additional Storage FeaturesCargo Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

StorageCompartments

Instrument Panel Storage

There is a storage compartmentlocated on the driver side of theinstrument panel.

Glove BoxLift up the handle to open theglovebox. It contains a pen holderand a coin holder.

4-2 Storage

CupholdersTwo cupholders are in the centerconsole.

Cupholders may be located in thesecond row seat armrest. Toaccess, pull the armrest down.

Rear Storage

Pull down the armrest. Push thebutton to lift the cover. Close thecover before folding the armrest up.

Center Console Storage

Push the button (A) to access thestorage area under the armrest.

Storage 4-3

Additional StorageFeatures

Cargo Net

There is a cargo net for storingitems on the side of the vehicle'strunk.

Convenience Net

For vehicles with a convenience net,it is located in the trunk and used tostore small loads. The net shouldnot be used to store heavy loads.Attach the loops on each side of thenet to the hooks located on thesides of the trunk.

4-4 Storage

2 NOTES

Instruments and Controls 5-1

Instruments andControls

ControlsSteering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-2Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-3Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-10Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-10

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-12MalfunctionIndicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Brake System WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

Electric Parking BrakeLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Ultrasonic Parking SensorLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Traction Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16Electronic Stability Control(ESC) Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

Electronic Stability Control(ESC)/Traction ControlSystem (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-18Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-18Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . 5-19Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19High-Beam on Light . . . . . . . . . 5-20Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20Lamps on Reminder . . . . . . . . . 5-20Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-20Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

Information DisplaysDriver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

Vehicle MessagesVehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24Battery Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24

Brake System Messages . . . . 5-24Compass Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-25Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-25Engine Cooling SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25

Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-26Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-27Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-27Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-27Object Detection SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27

Ride Control SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27

Anti-Theft Alarm SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28

Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-28Window Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

Vehicle PersonalizationVehicle Personalization . . . . . . 5-29

5-2 Instruments and Controls

Controls

Steering WheelAdjustment

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel up,down, forwards, and backwards.

3. Pull the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.


For vehicles with audio steeringwheel controls, some audio controlscan be adjusted at the steeringwheel.

b g (Push to Talk): For vehicleswith a Bluetooth®, OnStar®,or navigation system, press tointeract with those systems. SeeBluetooth (Overview) on page 7‑19or Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls)on page 7‑20 or Bluetooth (VoiceRecognition) on page 7‑23 orBluetooth (Navigation) on

page 7‑33, the Onstar Owner'sGuide, or the separate NavigationSystem Manual for moreinformation.

$ c (Mute / End Call): Press tosilence the vehicle speakers only.Press again to turn the sound on.For vehicles with OnStar orBluetooth systems, press to rejectan incoming call, or end acurrent call.

_ SRC ^ (Rotary Control): Pressto select an audio source.

Toggle up or down to select the nextor previous favorite radio station,CD, or MP3 track.

+ x − (Volume): Press + toincrease the volume, press − todecrease the volume.

HornPress near the horn symbols orpress on the steering wheel pad tosound the horn.


Windshield Wiper/Washer

The windshield wiper lever is on theside of the steering column. Withthe ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY orON/RUN, move the windshieldwiper lever to select the wiperspeed.

2: Fast wipes.

1: Slow wipes.

& (Adjustable Interval Wipes):Turn the band up for more frequentwipes or down for less frequentwipes.

9 (Off): Turns the windshieldwipers off.

3 (Mist): Briefly move the wiperlever down for a single wipe or holddown for several wipes.

Clear ice and snow from the wiperblades before using them. If theyare frozen to the windshield,carefully loosen or thaw them.Damaged wiper blades should bereplaced. See Wiper BladeReplacement on page 10‑27.

Heavy snow or ice can overload thewipers. A circuit breaker stops themuntil the motor cools.

Wipe Parking

If the ignition is turned to LOCK/OFF while the wipers are on 1, 2,or&, they will immediately stop.

If the windshield wiper lever is thenmoved to OFF before the driverdoor is opened, or within10 minutes, the wipers will restartand move to the base of thewindshield.

If the ignition is turned to LOCK/OFF while the wipers are performingwipes due to windshield wash, thewipers continue to run until theyreach the base of the windshield.

Windshield Washer

Pull the windshield wiper lever tospray windshield washer fluid andactivate the wipers.

The wipers will continue until thelever is released or the maximumwash time is reached.

When the windshield wiper lever isreleased, additional wipes mayoccur depending on how long the


windshield washer had beenactivated. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑22 for information on fillingthe windshield washer fluidreservoir.

{ WARNING

In freezing weather, do not useyour washer until the windshieldis warmed. Otherwise the washerfluid can form ice on thewindshield, blocking your vision.

CompassThe vehicle may have a compassdisplay on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). The compass receivesits heading and other informationfrom the Global PositioningSystem (GPS) antenna, StabiliTrak,and vehicle speed information.

Avoid covering the GPS antenna forlong periods of time with objectsthat may interfere with the antenna'sability to receive a satellite signal.See Backglass Antenna on

page 7‑13 and Satellite RadioAntenna on page 7‑14 for thelocation of the vehicle's antennas.The compass system is designed tooperate for a certain number ofmiles or degrees of turn beforeneeding a signal from the GPSsatellites. When the compassdisplay shows CAL, drive thevehicle for a short distance in anopen area where it can receive aGPS signal. The compass systemwill automatically determine whenthe GPS signal is restored andprovide a heading again. SeeCompass Messages on page 5‑25for more information on themessages that may be displayed forthe compass.

ClockThe infotainment system controlsare used to access the time anddate settings through the menusystem. See Operation onpage 7‑4 for information abouthow to use the menu system.

Setting the Time and Date

1. Press the CONFIG button andselect Time and Date Settings.

2. Select Set Time or Set Date.

3. Turn theZ knob to adjustthe highlighted value.

4. Press theZ knob to selectthe next value.

5. To save the time and return tothe Time Settings menu, pressthe 0 BACK button at any time

or press theZ knob afteradjusting the minutes.

Setting the 12/24 Hour Format


2. Highlight 12/24 HR Format.

3. Press theZ knob to selectthe 12 hour or 24 hour displayformat.


Setting the Month and DayFormat


2. Highlight Month & Day format.

3. Press theZ knob to selectDD/MM/YYYY (day/month/year),MM/DD/YYYY (month/day/year),or YYYY/MM/DD (year/month/day) display format.

Power OutletsThe accessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone, an MP3player, etc.

There are two accessory poweroutlets. One is located inside thecenter console storage and theother is on the rear of the centerfloor console.

Open the protective cover to use theaccessory power outlet.

Certain electrical accessoriesmay not be compatible with theaccessory power outlets and couldoverload vehicle or adapter fuses.If a problem is experienced, seeyour dealer.

When adding electrical equipment,be sure to follow the installationinstructions included with theequipment. See Add-On ElectricalEquipment on page 9‑47.

Notice: Hanging heavyequipment from the power outletcan cause damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty. Thepower outlets are designed foraccessory power plugs only, suchas cell phone charge cords.

Power Outlet 120 Volt AlternatingCurrent

The vehicle may have a poweroutlet that can be used to plug inelectrical equipment that uses amaximum limit of 150 watts.

The power outlet is located on therear of the center console.

An indicator light on the outletcomes on when in use. The lightcomes on when the ignition is inON/RUN and equipment requiringless than 150 watts is plugged intothe outlet, and no system fault isdetected.

If you try to connect equipmentusing more than 150 watts or asystem fault is detected theequipment may operate for a shortperiod and turn itself off.A protection circuit shuts off thepower supply and the indicator light


turns off. To reset the circuit, unplugthe item and plug it back in or turnthe Remote Accessory Power (RAP)off and then back on. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) onpage 9‑18. Prolonged usage of thepower outlet at the maximum load of150 watts, may cause the outlet tooverheat and automaticallyshutdown. The power restarts whenequipment that operates within thelimit is plugged into the outlet and asystem fault is not detected.

The power outlet is not designed forand may not work properly, if thefollowing are plugged in:. Equipment with high initial peak

wattage such as:compressor-driven refrigeratorsand electric power tools.

. Other equipment requiringan extremely stable powersupply such as:microcomputer-controlledelectric blankets, touch sensorlamps, etc.

Warning Lights,Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning lights and gauges cansignal that something is wrongbefore it becomes serious enoughto cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention to thewarning lights and gauges couldprevent injury.

Warning lights come on when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Some warning lights comeon briefly when the engine is startedto indicate they are working.

Gauges can indicate when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Often gauges and warninglights work together to indicate aproblem with the vehicle.

When one of the warning lightscomes on and stays on whiledriving, or when one of the gaugesshows there may be a problem,check the section that explains whatto do. Follow this manual's advice.Waiting to do repairs can be costlyand even dangerous.


Instrument Cluster

English Automatic Transmission Shown, Metric Similar


SpeedometerThe speedometer shows thevehicle's speed in either kilometersper hour (km/h) or miles perhour (mph).

OdometerThe odometer shows how far thevehicle has been driven, in eitherkilometers or miles.

This vehicle has a tamper‐resistantodometer. The digital odometer willread 999,999 if it is turned back.

If the vehicle needs a new odometerinstalled, it must be set to themileage total of the old odometer.If that is not possible, then it mustbe set at zero and a label must beput on the driver door to show theold mileage reading when the newodometer was installed.

Trip OdometerThe trip odometer can show how farthe vehicle has been driven sincethe trip odometer was last reset.

The trip odometer is accessed andreset through the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑21 for more information.

TachometerThe tachometer displays the enginespeed in revolutions perminute (rpm).

Fuel Gauge

When the ignition is on, the fuelgauge tells you about how muchfuel is left in the tank.

An arrow on the fuel gaugeindicates the side of the vehicle thefuel door is on.

The Fuel Level Low messageappears in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) and a single chimesounds. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑21 formore information.


Here are four things that someowners ask about. None of theseshow a problem with the fuel gauge:. At the service station, the fuel

pump shuts off before the gaugereads full.

. It takes a little more or lessfuel to fill up than the gaugeindicated. For example, thegauge may have indicated thetank was half full, but it actuallytook a little more or less thanhalf the tank's capacity to fillthe tank.

. The gauge moves a little whileturning a corner or speeding up.

. The gauge takes a few secondsto stabilize after the ignition isturned on, and will go back toempty when the ignition isturned off.

Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge

English

Metric

This gauge shows the enginecoolant temperature.

If the indicator needle moves to thehot side of the gauge towards theshaded area, the engine is too hot.

If the vehicle has been operatedunder normal driving conditions, pulloff the road, stop the vehicle andturn off the engine as soon aspossible.


Safety Belt Reminders

Driver Safety Belt ReminderLight

There is a driver safety beltreminder light on the instrumentpanel cluster.

When the engine is started this lightbegins to flash and a chime comeson for several seconds to remindthe driver to fasten their safety belt.The light also stays on if the driverremains unbuckled.

This cycle repeats if the driver isunbuckled while the vehicle ismoving.

If the driver safety belt is alreadybuckled, neither the light nor chimecome on.

Passenger Safety BeltReminder Light

There is a passenger safety beltreminder light located on the centerconsole.

When the engine is started this lightbegins to flash and a chime comeson for several seconds to remindthe passenger to fasten their safetybelt. The light also stays on if thepassenger remains unbuckled.

This cycle repeats if the passengeris unbuckled while the vehicle ismoving.

If the passenger safety belt isbuckled, neither the chime nor thelight come on.

The front passenger safety beltwarning light and chime may turn onif an object is put on the seat such

as a briefcase, handbag, grocerybag, laptop, or other electronicdevice. To turn off the warning lightand/or chime, remove the objectfrom the seat or buckle thesafety belt.

Airbag Readiness LightThis light shows if there is anelectrical problem. The systemcheck includes the airbag sensor,the pretensioners, the airbagmodules, the wiring, and the crashsensing and diagnostic module. Formore information on the airbagsystem, see Airbag System onpage 3‑23.

The airbag readiness light comes onand stays on for several secondswhen the vehicle is started. Thenthe light turns off.


{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light stayson after the vehicle is started orcomes on while driving, it meansthe airbag system might not beworking properly. The airbags inthe vehicle might not inflate in acrash, or they could even inflatewithout a crash. To help avoidinjury, have the vehicle servicedright away.

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicatorThe vehicle has a passengersensing system. See PassengerSensing System on page 3‑29 forimportant safety information. Theinstrument panel has a passengerairbag status indicator.

When the vehicle is started, thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light the words ON and OFF forseveral seconds as a system check.

Then, after several more seconds,the status indicator will light eitherthe word ON or OFF to let youknow the status of the right frontpassenger frontal airbag andseat‐mounted side impact airbag.

If the word ON is lit on thepassenger airbag status indicator, itmeans that the right front passengerfrontal airbag and seat‐mountedside impact airbag are enabled (mayinflate).

If the word OFF is lit on the airbagstatus indicator, it means that thepassenger sensing system has

turned off the right front passengerfrontal airbag and seat-mountedside impact airbag.

If, after several seconds, both statusindicator lights remain on, or if thereare no lights at all, there may be aproblem with the lights or thepassenger sensing system. Seeyour dealer for service.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑10 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.


Charging System Light

The charging system light comes onbriefly when the ignition is turnedon, but the engine is not running, asa check to show the light is working.The light turns off when the engineis started. If it does not, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.

If the light stays on, or comes onwhile driving, there could be aproblem with the electrical chargingsystem. Have it checked by yourdealer. Driving while this light is oncould drain the battery.

If a short distance must be drivenwith the light on, be sure to turn offall accessories, such as the radioand air conditioner.

MalfunctionIndicator LampA computer system called OBD II(On-Board Diagnostics-SecondGeneration) monitors operation ofthe fuel, ignition, and emissioncontrol systems. It makes sure thatemissions are at acceptable levelsfor the life of the vehicle, helping toproduce a cleaner environment.

This light comes on when theignition is on, but the engine is notrunning, as a check to show it isworking. If it does not, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.

If the malfunction indicator lampcomes on and stays on, while theengine is running, this indicates thatthere is an OBD II problem andservice is required.

Malfunctions often are indicated bythe system before any problem isapparent. Heeding the light canprevent more serious damage to thevehicle. This system assists theservice technician in correctlydiagnosing any malfunction.

Notice: If the vehicle iscontinually driven with this lighton, after a while, the emissioncontrols might not work as well,the vehicle's fuel economy mightnot be as good, and the enginemight not run as smoothly. Thiscould lead to costly repairs thatmight not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Notice: Modifications made to theengine, transmission, exhaust,intake, or fuel system of thevehicle or the replacement of theoriginal tires with other thanthose of the same TirePerformance Criteria (TPC) canaffect the vehicle's emissioncontrols and can cause this lightto come on. Modifications tothese systems could lead to


costly repairs not covered by thevehicle warranty. This could alsoresult in a failure to pass arequired Emission Inspection/Maintenance test. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10‑3.

This light comes on during amalfunction in one of two ways:

Light Flashing: A misfire conditionhas been detected. A misfireincreases vehicle emissions andcould damage the emission controlsystem on the vehicle. Diagnosisand service might be required.

The following can prevent moreserious damage to the vehicle:. Reduce vehicle speed.. Avoid hard accelerations.. Avoid steep uphill grades.

If the light continues to flash, whenit is safe to do so, stop the vehicle.Find a safe place to park thevehicle. Turn the vehicle off, wait atleast 10 seconds, and restart theengine. If the light is still flashing,

follow the previous steps and seeyour dealer for service as soon aspossible.

Light On Steady: An emissioncontrol system malfunction hasbeen detected on the vehicle.Diagnosis and service might berequired.

An emission system malfunctionmight be corrected by doing thefollowing:. Make sure the fuel cap is fully

installed. See Filling the Tank onpage 9‑44. The diagnosticsystem can determine if the fuelcap has been left off orimproperly installed. A loose ormissing fuel cap allows fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere.A few driving trips with the capproperly installed should turn thelight off.

. If the vehicle has been driventhrough a deep puddle of water,the vehicle's electrical systemmight be wet. The condition isusually corrected when the

electrical system dries out. A fewdriving trips should turn thelight off.

. Make sure to fuel the vehiclewith quality fuel. Poor fuel qualitycauses the engine not to run asefficiently as designed and maycause: stalling after start-up,stalling when the vehicle ischanged into gear, misfiring,hesitation on acceleration,or stumbling on acceleration.These conditions might go awayonce the engine is warmed up.

If one or more of theseconditions occurs, change thefuel brand used. It will require atleast one full tank of the properfuel to turn the light off.

See Recommended Fuel onpage 9‑41.

If none of the above have made thelight turn off, have your dealer checkthe vehicle. The dealer has theproper test equipment and


diagnostic tools to fix anymechanical or electrical problemsthat might have developed.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance Programs

Some state/provincial and localgovernments may have programs toinspect the on-vehicle emissioncontrol equipment. For theinspection, the emission systemtest equipment is connected tothe vehicle’s Data LinkConnector (DLC).

The DLC is under the instrumentpanel to the left of the steeringwheel. See your dealer if assistanceis needed.

The vehicle may not passinspection if:. the Malfunction Indicator Lamp

is on with the engine running,or if the light does not come onwhen the ignition is turned toON/RUN while the engine is off.

. the critical emission controlsystems have not beencompletely diagnosed by thesystem. This can happen if thebattery has recently beenreplaced or if the battery has rundown. The diagnostic systemevaluates critical emissioncontrol systems during normaldriving. This can takeseveral days of routine driving.If this has been done and thevehicle still does not pass theinspection, your dealer canprepare the vehicle forinspection.

Brake System WarningLightThe vehicle brake system consistsof two hydraulic circuits. If onecircuit is not working, the remainingcircuit can still work to stop thevehicle. For normal brakingperformance, both circuits need tobe working.

If the warning light comes on, thereis a brake problem. Have the brakesystem inspected right away.

English Metric

The Brake System Warning Lightshould come on briefly as theengine is started. If it does not comeon have the vehicle serviced byyour dealer.


{ WARNING

The brake system might not beworking properly if the brakesystem warning light is on.Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to acrash. If the light is still on afterthe vehicle has been pulled offthe road and carefully stopped,have the vehicle towed forservice.

If the light comes on while driving, achime sounds. Pull off the road andstop. The pedal might be harder topush or go closer to the floor.It might also take longer to stop.If the light is still on, have thevehicle towed for service. SeeTowing the Vehicle on page 10‑71.

Electric Parking BrakeLight

English Metric

The park brake status light comeson when the brake is applied. If thelight continues flashing after thepark brake is released, or whiledriving, there is a problem with theElectric Parking Brake system.A Service Parking Brake messagemay also display on the DriverInformation Center (DIC). See BrakeSystem Messages on page 5‑24for more information.

If the light does not come on,or remains flashing, see your dealer.

The brake warning light shouldcome on briefly when the ignition isplaced in ON/RUN. If it does notcome on, have the vehicle servicedby your dealer.

If this light comes on there is aproblem with a system on thevehicle that is causing the parkingbrake system to work at a reducedlevel. The vehicle can still be driven,but should be taken to a dealer assoon as possible. See ParkingBrake on page 9‑29 for moreinformation.


Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light

For vehicles with the Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS), this light comes onbriefly when the engine is started.

If the light does not come on, have itfixed so it will be ready to warn ifthere is a problem.

If the ABS light stays on, turn theignition off. If the light comes onwhile driving, stop as soon as it issafely possible and turn the ignitionoff. A chime may also sound whenthe light comes on steady. Thenstart the engine again to reset thesystem. If the ABS light stays on,or comes on again while driving, thevehicle needs service. If the regularbrake system warning light is noton, the vehicle still has brakes, but

not antilock brakes. If the regularbrake system warning light is alsoon, the vehicle does not haveantilock brakes and there is aproblem with the regular brakes.See Brake System Warning Lighton page 5‑14.

See Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 5‑21 for all brake relatedDIC messages.

Ultrasonic ParkingSensor Light

This light comes on to indicate thatthere is a malfunction in the system.See your dealer for service.

See Ultrasonic Parking Assist onpage 9‑38 and Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑21 formore information.

Traction Off Light

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine.

If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. If thesystem is working normally, theindicator light then goes off.

The traction off light comes on whenthe Traction Control System (TCS)has been turned off or if there is aproblem with the TCS.

If the light comes on and stays onwhile the system is turned on, thevehicle needs service.

A message also appears in theDriver Information Center (DIC).See Ride Control System Messageson page 5‑27 for more information.


See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 9‑31 and ElectronicStability Control (ESC) onpage 9‑33 for more information.

Electronic StabilityControl (ESC) Off Light

This light comes on when theElectronic Stability Control (ESC)system is turned off. If the TractionControl System (TCS) is off, wheelspin is not limited. If the ESC is off,the system does not assist incontrolling the vehicle. Turn on theTCS and the ESC and the warninglight turns off.

See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 9‑31 and ElectronicStability Control (ESC) onpage 9‑33 for more information.

Electronic StabilityControl (ESC)/TractionControl System (TCS)Indicator/Warning Light

The Electronic Stability Control(ESC)/Traction Control System(TCS) Indicator/Warning Lightcomes on briefly when the engine isstarted.

If the light does not come on, havethe vehicle serviced by the dealer.If the system is working normally,the indicator light turns off.

If the light is on while certain DICmessages display, this indicatesthat the ESC and TCS are notworking or are disabled.

If the light is on and not flashing,the TCS and potentially the ESCsystem have been disabled. Checkthe DIC messages to determinewhich feature(s) is no longerfunctioning and whether it isbecause of the driver turning off thefeature(s), or because the system isnot working properly and the vehiclerequires service.

If the TCS is disabled, wheel spin isnot limited. If the ESC system isdisabled, the system does not aid inmaintaining directional control of thevehicle.

If the indicator/warning light is onand flashing, the TCS or the ESCsystem is actively working. Checkthe DIC messages for details todetermine which system is working.If the LOW TRACTION messageappears, the system is limitingwheel spin. If the ESC ACTIVEmessage appears, the system isaiding in maintaining directionalcontrol of the vehicle.


See Electronic Stability Control(ESC) on page 9‑33 and TractionControl System (TCS) onpage 9‑31 for more information.

See Ride Control System Messageson page 5‑27 for more informationon the messages associated withthis light.

Tire Pressure Light

For vehicles with a Tire PressureMonitor System, this light comes onbriefly when the engine is started.It provides information about tirepressures and the Tire PressureMonitor System.

When the Light is On Steady

This indicates that one or more ofthe tires are significantlyunderinflated.

A tire pressure message canaccompany the light. See TireMessages on page 5‑28 for moreinformation. Stop as soon aspossible, and inflate the tires to thepressure value shown on the Tireand Loading Information Label. SeeTire Pressure on page 10‑46 formore information.

When the Light Flashes First andThen is On Steady

This indicates that there may be aproblem with the Tire PressureMonitor System. The light flashesfor about a minute and stays onsteady for the remainder of theignition cycle. This sequencerepeats with every ignition cycle.See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10‑49 for moreinformation.

Engine Oil Pressure Light

{ WARNING

Do not keep driving if the oilpressure is low. The engine canbecome so hot that it catches fire.Someone could be burned. Checkthe oil as soon as possible andhave the vehicle serviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oilmaintenance can damage theengine. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always follow the maintenanceschedule in this manual forchanging engine oil.


The oil pressure light should comeon briefly as the engine is started.If it does not come on have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.

If the light comes on and stays on, itmeans that oil is not flowing throughthe engine properly. The vehiclecould be low on oil and might havesome other system problem. Seeyour dealer.

Low Fuel Warning Light

This light comes on for a fewseconds when the ignition is turnedon as a check to indicate it isworking. If it does not come on,have it fixed.

The low fuel warning light (A) comeson and a chime sounds periodicallywhen the vehicle is low on fuel. Thelight turns off when fuel is added tothe fuel tank.

See Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 5‑21 for more information.

Security Light

The immobilizer light should comeon briefly as the engine is started.If it does not come on, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.If the system is working normally,the indicator light turns off.

This light comes on when theignition is turned from LOCK/OFF toON/RUN and stays on if the vehicleis immobilized. This happens whenan incorrect key or anunprogrammed key is used to startthe vehicle.

If the light stays on and the enginedoes not start, there could be aproblem with the theft-deterrentsystem. See Vehicle Security onpage 2‑8 for more information.


High-Beam on Light

The high-beam on light comes onwhen the high-beam headlamps arein use.

See Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger on page 6‑2 for moreinformation.

Fog Lamp Light

For vehicles with fog lamps, thislight comes on when the fog lampsare in use.

The light goes out when the foglamps are turned off. See FogLamps on page 6‑4 for moreinformation.

Lamps on Reminder

For vehicles with the lamps onreminder light, it comes on when thelights are in use.

Cruise Control Light

The cruise control light is whitewhenever the cruise control is set,and turns green when the cruisecontrol is active.

The light turns off when the cruisecontrol is turned off. See CruiseControl on page 9‑36 for moreinformation.

Door Ajar Light

This light comes when a door isopen or not securely latched.


Information Displays

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The Driver Information Center (DIC)displays information about thevehicle. It also displays warningmessages if a system problem isdetected. See Vehicle Messages onpage 5‑24 for more information. Allmessages appear in the DIC displaylocated in the center of theinstrument panel cluster.

On some models, the DIC may havesome warning lights or indicatorsshown in the top portion of thedisplay. See Warning Lights,Gauges, and Indicators onpage 5‑6 for more information.

The vehicle may also have featuresthat can be customized through thecontrols on the radio. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑29 formore information.

DIC Operation and Displays

The DIC has different displayswhich can be accessed by using theDIC buttons located on the turnsignal lever located on the left sideof the steering wheel. The DICdisplays trip, fuel, and vehiclesystem information, and warningmessages if a system problem isdetected.

The bottom of the DIC displayshows the position of the shift leverand the odometer. It may also showthe direction the vehicle is driving.

In cold weather the DIC display maychange slowly. This is normal andwill move more quickly as thevehicle's interior temperature rises.

DIC Buttons

MENU: Press to get to the Trip/Fuel Menu and the VehicleInformation Menu.

wx (Thumbwheel): Use to scrollthrough the items in each menu.A small marker will move across thebottom of the page as you scrollthrough the items. This showswhere each page is in the menu.

SET/CLR (Set/Clear): Press to setor clear the menu item when it isdisplayed.


Trip/Fuel Menu Items

Press MENU on the turn signallever until Trip/Fuel InformationMenu is displayed. Usewx toscroll through the following menuitems:. Trip 1. Trip 2. Fuel Range. Fuel Economy. Average Vehicle Speed. Timer. Digital Speedometer. Turn-by-Turn

Trip 1 and Trip 2

This display shows the currentdistance traveled, in eitherkilometers (km) or miles (mi), sincethe last reset for the trip odometer.The trip odometer can be reset tozero by pressing SET/CLR while thetrip odometer display is showing.

Fuel Range

This display shows the approximatedistance the vehicle can be drivenwithout refueling. The fuel rangeestimate is based on an average ofthe vehicle's fuel economy overrecent driving history and theamount of fuel remaining in the fueltank. Fuel range cannot be reset.

Fuel Economy

This display shows both theaverage fuel economy and theinstantaneous fuel economy.They are shown in liters per100 kilometers (L/100 km) or milesper gallon (mpg).

Average fuel economy is calculatedbased on the number of L/100 km(mpg) recorded since the last timethis menu item was reset. Theaverage fuel economy can be resetby pressing SET/CLR while the FuelEconomy display is showing.

The instantaneous fuel economyreflects only the current fueleconomy and changes frequently as

driving conditions change. Unlikeaverage economy, this displaycannot be reset.

Average Vehicle Speed

This display shows the averagespeed of the vehicle in kilometersper hour (km/h) or miles perhour (mph). This average iscalculated based on the variousvehicle speeds recorded since thelast reset of this value. The averagespeed can be reset by pressingSET/CLR while the Average VehicleSpeed display is showing.

Timer

This display can be used as a timer.To start the timer, press SET/CLRwhile Timer is displayed. Thedisplay will show the amount of timethat has passed since the timer waslast reset, not including time theignition is off. Time will continue tobe counted as long as the ignition ison, even if another display is beingshown on the DIC. The timer willrecord up to 99 hours, 59 minutesand 59 seconds (99:59:59) after


which the display will return to zero.To stop the timer, press SET/CLRbriefly while Timer is displayed. Toreset the timer to zero, press andhold SET/CLR.

Digital Speedometer

The speedometer shows how fastthe vehicle is moving in eitherkilometers per hour (km/h) or milesper hour (mph). The speedometercannot be reset.

Turn-by-Turn

This display is used for theNavigation System Turn-by-Turnguidance. See the Navigationmanual, if the vehicle hasnavigation, for more information.

Vehicle Information MenuItems

Press MENU on the turn signallever until Vehicle Information Menuis displayed. Usewx to scrollthrough the following menu items:. Unit. Tire Pressure. Remaining Oil Life

Unit

Movewx to switch betweenMetric or US when the Unit displayis active. Press SET/CLR to confirmthe setting. This will change thedisplays on the cluster and DIC toeither metric or English (US)measurements.

Tire Pressure

The display will show a vehicle withthe approximate pressures of allfour tires. Tire pressure is displayedin either kilopascal (kPa) or poundsper square inch (psi). See TirePressure Monitor System on

page 10‑48 and Tire PressureMonitor Operation on page 10‑49 formore information.

Remaining Oil Life

This display shows an estimate ofthe oil's remaining useful life.If Remaining Oil Life 99% isdisplayed, that means 99% of thecurrent oil life remains.

When the remaining oil life is low,the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage will appear on the display.See Engine Oil Messages onpage 5‑26. The oil should bechanged as soon as possible. SeeEngine Oil on page 10‑9. Inaddition to the Engine Oil LifeSystem monitoring the oil life,additional maintenance isrecommended in the MaintenanceSchedule in this manual. SeeScheduled Maintenance onpage 11‑2 for more information.


Remember, the Remaining OilLife display must be reset after eachoil change. It will not reset itself.Also, be careful not to reset theRemaining Oil Life displayaccidentally at any time other thanwhen the oil has just been changed.It cannot be reset accurately untilthe next oil change. To reset theEngine Oil Life System press SET/CLR while the Remaining Oil Lifedisplay is active. See Engine OilLife System on page 10‑12.

Compass

The vehicle may have a compassdisplay in the DIC. See Compasson page 5‑4 for more information.

Vehicle MessagesMessages displayed on the DICindicate the status of the vehicle orsome action may be needed tocorrect a condition. Multiplemessages may display one after theother.

The messages that do not requireimmediate action can beacknowledged and cleared bypressing SET/CLR. The messagesthat require immediate action cannotbe cleared until that action isperformed. All messages should betaken seriously and clearing themessages does not correct theproblem.

Battery Voltage andCharging Messages

Battery Saver Active

This message displays when thevehicle has detected that the batteryvoltage is dropping beyond areasonable point. The battery saversystem starts reducing certain

features of the vehicle that you maybe able to notice. At the point thatfeatures are disabled, this messageis displayed. It means that thevehicle is trying to save the chargein the battery. Turn off unnecessaryaccessories to allow the battery torecharge.

Low Battery

This message is displayed when thebattery voltage is low. See Batteryon page 10‑25 for more information.

Service Battery ChargingSystem

This message is displayed whenthere is a fault in the batterycharging system. Take the vehicle toyour dealer for service.

Brake System Messages

Brake Fluid Low

This message is displayed when thebrake fluid level is low. See BrakeFluid on page 10‑24.


Press Brake Pedal To ReleasePark Brake

This message is displayed if youattempt to release the electricparking brake without the brakepedal applied. See Parking Brakeon page 9‑29 for more information.

Release Park Brake Switch

This message is displayed if theelectric parking brake is on while thevehicle is in motion. Release itbefore you attempt to drive. SeeParking Brake on page 9‑29 formore information.

Service Parking Brake

This message is displayed whenthere is a problem with the electricparking brake. See Parking Brakeon page 9‑29 for more information.Take the vehicle to your dealer.

Compass Messages

CAL

This message is displayed when thecompass needs to be calibrated.See Compass on page 5‑4.

– – –

Three dashes will be displayed if thecompass needs service. See yourdealer for service.

Door Ajar Messages

Driver Door Open

This message will display when thedriver door is open. Close the doorcompletely.

Hood Open

This message will display when thehood is open. Close the hoodcompletely.

Left Rear Door Open

This message will display when thedriver side rear passenger door isopen. Close the door completely.

Passenger Door Open

This message will display when thefront passenger door is open. Closethe door completely.

Right Rear Door Open

This message will display when thepassenger side rear passenger dooris open. Close the door completely.

Trunk Open

This message will display when thetrunk is open. Close the trunkcompletely.

Engine Cooling SystemMessages

A/C Off Due to HighEngine Temp

This message displays when theengine coolant becomes hotter thanthe normal operating temperature.To avoid added strain on a hotengine, the air conditioningcompressor automatically turns off.


When the coolant temperaturereturns to normal, the airconditioning compressor turns backon. You can continue to drive thevehicle.

If this message continues to appear,have the system repaired by yourdealer as soon as possible to avoiddamage to the engine.

Coolant Level Low AddCoolant

This message will display if thecoolant is low; see Engine Coolanton page 10‑16.

Engine Overheated — IdleEngine

This message displays when theengine coolant temperature is toohot. Stop and allow the vehicle toidle until it cools down.

Engine Overheated — StopEngine

This message displays and acontinuous chime sounds if theengine cooling system reaches

unsafe temperatures for operation.Stop and turn off the vehicle assoon as it is safe to do so to avoidsevere damage. This messageclears when the engine has cooledto a safe operating temperature.

High Coolant Temperature

This message displays if the coolanttemperature is hot; see EngineOverheating on page 10‑20.

Engine Oil Messages

Change Engine Oil Soon

This message displays when theengine oil needs to be changed.When you change the engine oil, besure to reset the Oil Life System.See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑12 and Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑21 forinformation on how to reset thesystem. See Engine Oil onpage 10‑9 and ScheduledMaintenance on page 11‑2 formore information.

Engine Oil Hot, Idle Engine

This message displays when theengine oil temperature is too hot.Stop and allow the vehicle to idleuntil it cools down.

Engine Oil Low — Add Oil

This message displays when theengine oil level is too low. Check theoil level. See Engine Oil onpage 10‑9.

Oil Pressure Low — StopEngine

This message displays if low oilpressure levels occur. Stop thevehicle as soon as safely possibleand do not operate it until the causeof the low oil pressure has beencorrected. Check the oil as soon aspossible and have the vehicleserviced by your dealer.


Engine Power Messages

Engine Power Is Reduced

This message displays when thevehicle's engine power is reduced.Reduced engine power can affectthe vehicle's ability to accelerate.If this message is on, but there is noreduction in performance, proceedto your destination. Theperformance may be reduced thenext time the vehicle is driven. Thevehicle may be driven at a reducedspeed while this message is on, butmaximum acceleration and speedmay be reduced. Anytime thismessage stays on, the vehicleshould be taken to your dealer forservice as soon as possible.

Fuel System Messages

Fuel Level Low

This message displays when thevehicle is low on fuel. Refuel assoon as possible.

Key and Lock Messages

Replace Battery In Remote Key

This message displays when thebattery in the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter needs to bereplaced.

Object Detection SystemMessages

Park Assist Off

This message is displayed when thepark assist system has been turnedoff. See Ultrasonic Parking Assiston page 9‑38.

Service Park Assist

This message is displayed if there isa problem with the park assistsystem. Take the vehicle to yourdealer for service.

Ride Control SystemMessages

Service Traction Control

This message displays when thereis a problem with the TractionControl System (TCS). When thismessage is displayed, the systemwill not limit wheel spin. Adjust yourdriving accordingly. See your dealerfor service.

Service Stabilitrak

This message displays if there is aproblem with the StabiliTrak®

system. If this message appears, tryto reset the system. Stop; turn offthe engine for at least 15 seconds;then start the engine again. If thismessage still comes on, it meansthere is a problem. See your dealerfor service. The vehicle is safe todrive, however, you do not have thebenefit of StabiliTrak, so reduceyour speed and drive accordingly.


Sport Mode On

This message displays when usingthe interactive drive control. SeeInteractive Drive Control System onpage 9‑34 for more information.

Traction Control Off

This message displays when theTraction Control System (TCS) isturned off. Adjust your drivingaccordingly.

Traction Control On

This message displays when theTraction Control System (TCS) isturned on.

Anti-Theft Alarm SystemMessages

Theft Attempted

This message displays if the vehicledetects a tamper condition.

Tire Messages

Check XXX Tire Pressure orAdd Air To Tire

This message displays if the vehicledetects low pressure in one or moretires. The tire with the low pressurewill be shown in the message.Check the tire pressures.

Service Tire Monitor System

This message displays if there is aproblem with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS). See TirePressure Monitor Operation onpage 10‑49 for more information.

Tire Learning Active

This message displays when thesystem is learning new tires. SeeTire Pressure Monitor Operation onpage 10‑49 for more information.

Transmission Messages

Service Transmission

This message displays if there is aproblem with the transmission. Seeyour dealer.

Shift To Park

This message displays when thetransmission needs to be shifted toP (Park). This may appear whenattempting to remove the key fromthe ignition if the vehicle is not inP (Park).

Transmission Hot – IdleEngine

This message displays and a chimesounds if the transmission fluid inthe vehicle gets hot. Driving with thetransmission fluid temperature highcan cause damage to the vehicle.Stop the vehicle and let it idle toallow the transmission to cool. Thismessage clears when the fluidtemperature reaches a safe level.


Window Messages

Open, Then Close DriverWindow

This message is displayed when thewindow needs to be reprogrammed.If the vehicle's battery has beenrecharged or disconnected, you willneed to reprogram each frontwindow for the express up feature towork. See Power Windows onpage 2‑12 for more information.

Open, Then Close PassengerWindow

This message is displayed when thewindow needs to be reprogrammed.If the vehicle's battery has beenrecharged or disconnected, you willneed to reprogram each frontwindow for the express up feature towork. See Power Windows onpage 2‑12 for more information.

VehiclePersonalizationThe audio system controls are usedto access the personalizationmenus for customizing vehiclefeatures.

CONFIG (Configuration): Press toaccess the ConfigurationSettings Menu.

MENU/SELECT Knob: Press thecenter of this knob to enter themenus and select menu items. Turnthe knob to scroll through themenus.

BACK: Press to exit or movebackwards in a menu.

Entering the PersonalizationMenus

1. Press CONFIG to access theConfiguration Settings menu.

2. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob tohighlight Vehicle Settings.

3. Press the center of the MENU/SELECT knob to select theVehicle Settings menu.

The following list of menu items willbe available:. Climate and Air Quality. Comfort and Convenience. Collision/Detection Systems. Languages. Lighting. Power Door Locks. Remote Lock, Unlock, Start. Return to Factory Settings

Turn the MENU/SELECT knob tohighlight the menu. Press the knobto select it. Each of the menus isdetailed in the following information.


Climate and Air Quality

Select the Climate and Air Qualitymenu and the following will bedisplayed:. Auto Fan Speed. Air Conditioning Mode. Auto Area Zone Temp. Auto Defog. Auto Rear Defog

Auto Fan Speed

This allows selection of theautomatic fan speed to run lower orhigher than normal.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen Auto Fan Speed is highlightedto open the menu. Turn the knob tohighlight High, Medium, or Low.Press the knob to confirm theselection and move back to thelast menu.

Air Conditioning Mode

This allows selection of automaticstart of the air conditioning uponvehicle start. Selecting On indicatesthe air conditioning will be on whenthe vehicle is started. Selecting Offturns the air conditioning off eachtime the vehicle is started. LastSetting will resume the last settingwhen the vehicle was shut off.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen Air Conditioning Mode ishighlighted. Turn the knob tohighlight On, Off, or Last Setting.Press the knob to confirm theselection and go back to thelast menu.

Auto Area Zone Temp

This allows selection of the numberof zones of temperature controlupon vehicle start. Selecting SingleZone automatically resets thepassenger temperature setting thesame as the driver's for everyvehicle start. The AC system willoperate using only the driver'ssetting until the passenger

temperature setting is changed.Selecting Dual Zone or Last Settingwill keep the passenger temperatureadjustment separate from thedriver's setting all the time.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen Auto Area Zone Temp ishighlighted. Turn the knob tohighlight Single Zone, Dual Zone,or Last Setting. Press the knob toconfirm the selection and go back tothe last menu.

Auto Defog

This allows the auto defog to beturned on or off on dual zoneclimate control systems.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen Auto Defog is highlighted toselect On or Off. Turn the knob toconfirm the selection and moveback to the last menu.


Auto Rear Defog

This allows the auto rear defog tobe turned on or off. This feature willautomatically turn on the reardefogger when it is cold outside.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen Auto Rear Defog ishighlighted to select On or Off. Turnthe knob to confirm the selectionand move back to the last menu.

Comfort and Convenience

Select the Comfort andConvenience menu and ChimeVolume will be displayed.

Chime Volume

This allows the selection of thechime volume level.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen Chime Volume is highlighted.Turn the knob to select Normal orHigh. Press the knob to confirm andgo back to the last menu.

Collision/Detection Systems

Select the Collision/DetectionSystems menu and Park Assist willbe displayed.

Park Assist

This allows the Ultrasonic ParkingAssist feature to be turned on or off.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen Park Assist is highlighted toselect On or Off. Press BACK toreturn to the last menu.

Language

Select the Language menu and thefollowing will be displayed:. English. Francais. Espanol

Turn the MENU/SELECT knob toselect the language. Press BACK toreturn to the last menu.

Lighting

Select the Lighting menu and thefollowing will be displayed:. Vehicle Locator Lights. Exit Lighting

Vehicle Locator Lights

This allows the vehicle locator lightsto be turned on or off.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen Vehicle Locator Lights ishighlighted to select On or Off. Turnthe knob to confirm and go back tothe last menu.

Exit Lighting

This allows the selection of howlong the exterior lamps stay onwhen leaving the vehicle when it isdark outside.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen Exit Lighting is highlighted.Turn the knob to select Off,30 Seconds, 1 Minute, or 2 Minutes.Press the knob to confirm and goback to the last menu.


Power Door Locks

Select Power Door Locks and thefollowing will be displayed:. Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out. Auto Door Unlock. Delayed Door Lock

Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out

When on, this feature will keep thedriver door from locking when thedoor is open. If off is selected, theDelayed Door Lock menu will beavailable and the door will lock asprogrammed through this menu.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen Auto Door Unlock ishighlighted select On or Off. Turnthe knob to confirm and go back tothe last menu.

Auto Door Unlock

This allows selection of which of thedoors will automatically unlock whenthe vehicle is shifted into P (Park).

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen Auto Door Unlock ishighlighted. Turn the knob to selectAll Doors, Driver Door, or Off. Pressthe knob to confirm and go back tothe last menu.

Delayed Door Lock

When on, this feature will delay thelocking of the doors untilfive seconds after the last door isclosed. You will hear three chimesto signal delayed locking is in use.Press either the power lock buttonor the lock button on the RKEtransmitter twice to override thedelayed locking feature andimmediately lock all of the doors.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen Delayed Door Lock ishighlighted to select On or Off.Press BACK to return to thelast menu.

Remote Lock/Unlock/Start

Select Remote Lock/Unlock/Startand the following will be displayed:. Remote Unlock Light Feedback. Remote Lock Feedback. Remote Door Unlock

Remote Unlock Light Feedback

When on, the exterior lamps willflash when unlocking the vehiclewith the RKE transmitter.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen Remote Unlock LightFeedback is highlighted to select Onor Off. Turn the knob to confirm andgo back to the last menu.


Remote Lock Feedback

This allows selection of what type offeedback is given when locking thevehicle with the RKE transmitter.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen Remote Lock Feedback ishighlighted. Turn the knob to selectLights and Horn, Lights Only, HornOnly, or Off. Press the knob toconfirm and go back to thelast menu.

Remote Door Unlock

This allows selection of which doorswill unlock when pressing the unlockbutton on the RKE transmitter.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen Remote Door Unlock ishighlighted. Turn the knob to selectDriver Door or All Doors. When setto Driver Door, the driver door willunlock the first time the unlockbutton is pressed and all doors willunlock when the button is pressed asecond time. When set to All Doors,all of the doors will unlock at the firstpress of the unlock button. Pressthe knob to confirm and go back tothe last menu.

Return to Factory Settings

Select Return to Factory Settings toreturn all of the vehiclepersonalization to the defaultsettings. Turn the knob to select Yesor No. Press the knob to confirmand go back to the last menu.


2 NOTES

Lighting 6-1

Lighting

Exterior LightingExterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lamps OffReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Automatic HeadlampSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-3Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Interior LightingInstrument Panel IlluminationControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Lighting FeaturesEntry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-6

Exterior Lighting

Exterior Lamp Controls

The exterior lamp control is locatedon the instrument panel on theoutboard side of the steering wheel.

Turn the control to the followingpositions:

O (Off): Turns off the exteriorlamps. The knob returns to theAUTO position after it is released.Turn to off again to reactivate theAUTO mode.

In Canada, the headlamps willautomatically reactivate once thevehicle is shifted out of P (Park).

AUTO (Automatic): Automaticallyturns the exterior lamps on and off,depending on outside lighting.

The current status of the AUTOsystem is displayed in the DriverInformation Center (DIC) display.See Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 5‑21.

; (Parking Lamps): Turns onthe parking lamps together withthe following:. Sidemarker Lamps. Taillamps. License Plate Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights

6-2 Lighting

2 (Headlamps): Turns on theheadlamps together with thefollowing:. Sidemarker Lamps. Taillamps. License Plate Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights. Parking Lamps

Exterior Lamps OffReminderA warning chime sounds, if thedriver door is opened while theignition is off and the exterior lampsare on.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer23 Headlamp High/Low BeamChanger: Push the turn signal/lanechange lever away from you andrelease, to turn the high beams on.To return to low beams, push thelever again or pull it toward you andrelease.

This indicator light turns on in theinstrument panel cluster when thehigh‐beam headlamps are on.

Flash-to-PassTo flash the high beams, pull theturn signal/lane change lever towardyou, and release.

Daytime RunningLamps (DRL)Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) canmake it easier for others to see thefront of your vehicle during the day.Fully functional daytime runninglamps are required on all vehiclesfirst sold in Canada.

The DRL system turns on thelow-beam headlamps at a reducedbrightness. For vehicles with HighIntensity Discharge (HID)headlamps, the dedicated DRLlights will come on when all of thefollowing conditions are met:. The engine is running. The exterior lamp band is

in AUTO. The light sensor determines it is

daytime.

Lighting 6-3

When the DRL are on, thelow-beam headlamps will be on.The taillamps, sidemarker,instrument panel lights and otherlamps will not be on.

The DRL turn off when theheadlamps are turned to O or theignition is off.

Automatic HeadlampSystemWhen the exterior lamp control isset to AUTO and it is dark enoughoutside, the headlamps come onautomatically.

There is a light sensor located ontop of the instrument panel. Do notcover the sensor. Otherwise theheadlamps will come on when theyare not needed.

The system may also turn on theheadlamps when driving through aparking garage or tunnel.

When it is bright enough outsidethe headlamps will turn off or maychange to daytime runninglamps (DRL).

The automatic headlamp systemturns off when the exterior lampcontrol is turned to O or the ignitionis off.

Hazard Warning Flashers| Hazard Warning Flasher:Press this button located on theinstrument panel above the audiosystem, to make the front and rearturn signal lamps flash on and off.Press again to turn the flashers off.

The hazard warning flashers turn onautomatically if the airbags deploy.

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals

Move the lever all the way up ordown to signal a turn.

An arrow on the instrument panelcluster flashes in the direction ofthe turn or lane change.

6-4 Lighting

Raise or lower the lever until thearrow starts to flash to signal a lanechange. Hold it there until the lanechange is completed. If the lever isbriefly pressed and released, theturn signal flashes three times.

The turn and lane‐change signalcan be turned off manually bymoving the lever back to its originalposition.

If after signaling a turn or lanechange, the arrow flashes rapidly ordoes not come on, a signal bulbmight be burned out.

Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulbis not burned out, check the fuse.See Fuses and Circuit Breakers onpage 10‑33.

Fog Lamps

To turn on the fog lamps, the ignitionand the headlamps or parking lampsmust be on.

If the fog lamps are turned on whilethe exterior lamp switch is in theAUTO position, the headlampscome on automatically.

# : Press to turn on or off. Anindicator light on the instrumentpanel cluster comes on when thefog lamps are on.

Some localities have laws thatrequire the headlamps to be onalong with the fog lamps.

Lighting 6-5

Interior Lighting

Instrument PanelIllumination Control

The brightness of the instrumentpanel lighting and steering wheelcontrols can be adjusted.

D : Move the thumbwheel up ordown to brighten or dim the lights.

Dome LampsThe interior lamps control located inthe overhead console controls boththe front and rear interior lamps.

To operate:

* (Off): Turns the lamps off.

1 (Door): Turns the lamps onwhen any door is opened.

+ (On): Keeps the lamps on allthe time.

The interior lamps turn onautomatically if the airbags aredeployed.

Reading LampsThere are front and rear readinglamps.

The front reading lamps are locatedin the overhead console.

#$ : Press to turn each lamp onor off.

The rear reading lamps are locatedin the headliner.

6-6 Lighting

Lighting Features

Entry LightingThe headlamps, taillamps, licenseplate lamps, reverse lamps, domelamps, and most of the interior lightsturn on briefly, when the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) K is pressed.See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2‑3 .When the drivers door is opened, allcontrol lights, Driver InformationCenter (DIC) and door pocket lightsturn on. After about 30 seconds theexterior lamps turn off, and then thedome and remaining interior lightswill dim to off. Entry lighting can bedisabled manually by changing theignition out of the OFF position,or by pressing the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) Q button.

This feature can be activated ordeactivated in the ConfigurationSettings menu in the Info Display.

Press CONFIG on the audio systemto call up the menu. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑29.

Exit LightingThe headlamps, taillamps, parkinglamps, reverse lamps, and licenseplate lamps come on at night, or inareas with limited lighting, when thekey is removed from the ignition.The dome lamps also come onwhen the key is removed from theignition. The exterior lights anddome lamps remain on after thedoor is closed for a set amount oftime, then automatically turn off.

The exterior lights turn offimmediately by turning the exteriorlamps control to OFF.

The exit lighting feature can beactivated, deactivated, or thetimeframe for the lighting can bechanged in the ConfigurationSettings menu in the Info. Display.Press CONFIG on the audio systemto access the menu. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑29.

Battery Power ProtectionThe battery saver feature isdesigned to protect the vehicle'sbattery.

To prevent battery discharge whiledriving, the following systems arereduced automatically in two stagesand then turned off:. Heated rear window and mirrors. Heated seats. Fan

In the second stage, a DriverInformation Center (DIC) messageis displayed confirming theactivation of the battery dischargeprotection. See Battery Voltage andCharging Messages on page 5‑24.

If the exterior lamps or any interiorlight are left on and the ignition isturned off, the battery powerprotection system automaticallyturns the lamp off after about10 minutes.

Infotainment System 7-1

InfotainmentSystem

IntroductionIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

RadioAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12Backglass Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 7-13Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . 7-14

Audio PlayersCD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16

PhoneBluetooth (Overview) . . . . . . . . 7-19Bluetooth (InfotainmentControls) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20

Bluetooth (VoiceRecognition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23

Bluetooth (Navigation) . . . . . . . 7-33

IntroductionRead the following pages tobecome familiar with the audiosystem's features.

{ WARNING

Taking your eyes off the road forextended periods could cause acrash resulting in injury or deathto you or others. Do not giveextended attention toentertainment tasks while driving.

This system provides access tomany audio and non‐audio listings.

To minimize taking your eyes off theroad while driving, do the followingwhile the vehicle is parked:. Become familiar with the

operation and controls of theaudio system.

. Set up the tone, speakeradjustments, and preset radiostations.

For more information, see DefensiveDriving on page 9‑2.

Notice: Contact your dealerbefore adding any equipment.

Adding audio or communicationequipment could interfere withthe operation of the vehicle'sengine, radio, or other systems,and could damage them. Followfederal rules covering mobileradio and telephone equipment.

The vehicle has RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). With RAP,the audio system can be playedeven after the ignition is turned off.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9‑18 for moreinformation.

Navigation System

For vehicles with a navigationsystem, see the separate NavigationSystem Manual.

7-2 Infotainment System

Theft-Deterrent FeatureThe theft-deterrent feature works bylearning a portion of the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) to theinfotainment system. Theinfotainment system does notoperate if it is stolen or moved to adifferent vehicle.

Overview

A. RADIO / BAND. Changes the band while

listening to the radio.. Selects the radio when

listening to a differentaudio source.

B. CD/AUX. Selects the CD player or

an external audio source.


C. s ©. Radio: Seeks the previous

station.. CD: Select the previous

track or rewinds within atrack.

D. CONFIG. Opens the Settings menu.

E. ¨ \. Radio: Seeks the next

station.. CD: Selects the next track

or fast forwards within atrack.

F. 3 O. Turns the system on or off

and adjusts the volume.

G. Buttons 1 to 6. Radio: Saves and selects

favorite stations.

H. FAV 1/2/3. Radio: Opens the

favorites list.

I. INFO. Radio: Shows available

information about thecurrent station.

. CD: Shows availableinformation about thecurrent track.

J. AS 1/2. Radio: Opens the

autostore list.

K. Z. Removes a disc from the

CD slot.

L. Z. Opens menus, highlights

menu items, or setsnumeric values while ina menu.

. Radio: Manually selectsradio stations.

. CD: Selects tracks.

M. CD Slot

N. BACK. Menu: Moves one

level back.. Character Input: Deletes

the last character.

O. TONE. Opens the Tone

Settings menu.

P. V / $. Opens the Phone

main menu.. Mutes the audio system.


Operation

Controls

The infotainment system is operatedby using the pushbuttons,multifunction knobs, menus shownon the display, and steering wheelcontrols, if equipped.

Turning the System On or Off

3 O (Volume/Power): Press toturn the system on and off.

Automatic Switch‐Off

If the infotainment system has beenturned on after the ignition is turnedoff, the system will turn offautomatically after 10 minutes.

Volume Control

3 O (Volume/Power): Turn toadjust the volume.

V / $ (Phone/Mute): For vehicleswith OnStar®, press and holdV / $to mute the infotainment system. Tocancel mute, press and hold V / $again, or turn the3 O knob.

For vehicles without OnStar®, pressV / $ to mute the infotainmentsystem. To cancel mute, press V /$ again, or turn the3 O knob.

Menu System

Controls

TheZ knob and the BACKbutton are used to navigate themenu system.

Z (Menu/Select): Press to:. Enter the menu system.. Select or activate the highlighted

menu option.. Confirm a set value.. Turn a system setting on or off.

Turn to:. Highlight a menu option.. Select a value.

BACK: Press to:. Exit a menu.. Return from a submenu screen

to the previous menu screen.. Delete the last character in a

sequence.

Selecting a Menu Option

1. Turn theZ knob to movethe highlighted bar.

2. Press theZ knob to selectthe highlighted option.


Submenus

An arrow on the right‐hand edge ofthe menu indicates that it has asubmenu with other options.

Activating a Setting

1. Turn theZ knob to highlightthe setting.

2. Press theZ knob toactivate the setting.

Setting a Value

1. Turn theZ knob to changethe current value of the setting.

2. Press theZ knob to confirmthe setting.

Turning a Function On or Off

1. Turn theZ knob to highlightthe function.

2. Press theZ knob to turn thefunction on or off.

Entering a Character Sequence

1. Turn theZ knob to highlightthe character.

2. Press theZ knob to selectthe character.

Press the BACK button to delete thelast character in the sequence orpress and hold to delete the entirecharacter sequence.

Audio Settings

The audio settings can be set foreach radio band and each audioplayer source.

To quickly reset an audio settingvalue to 0:

1. Press the TONE button.

2. Select the audio setting.


3. Press and hold theZ knobuntil the value changes to 0.

Press the BACK button to go backto the Tone Settings menu.

Adjusting the Treble, Midrange,and Bass


2. Select Treble, Midrange,or Bass.

3. Select the value.


Adjusting the Fader and Balance


2. Select Fader or Balance.

3. Select the value.


Adjusting the EQ (Equalizer)

For vehicles that have an equalizer:


2. Select EQ.

3. Select the setting.


System Settings

Auto Volume

The auto volume featureautomatically adjusts the radiovolume to compensate for road andwind noise as the vehicle speeds upor slows down, so that the volumelevel is consistent.

The level of volume compensationcan be selected, or the auto volumefeature can be turned off.

1. Press the CONFIG button.

2. Select Radio Settings.

3. Select Auto Volume.



5. Press the BACK button to goback to the SystemConfiguration menu.

Maximum Startup Volume

The maximum volume played whenthe radio is first turned on canbe set.



3. Select Maximum StartupVolume.



Configuring the Number ofFavorites Pages

To configure the number of availablefavorites pages:



3. Select Radio Favorites.

4. Select the number of availablefavorites pages.


Radio

AM-FM Radio

Control Buttons

The buttons used to control theradio are:

RADIO/BAND: Press to turn theradio on and choose between AM,FM, and XM™, if equipped.

Z (Menu Knob): Turn tosearch for stations and navigate theavailable menus.

INFO: Press to display additionalinformation that may be available forthe current song.

s © / ¨ \ : Press to search forstations.

Buttons 1 to 6: Press to selectpreset stations.

FAV 1/2/3: Press to open thefavorites list and select favoritespages.


AS 1/2: Press to open theautostore list and select auto storepages.

RDS (Radio Data System)

The radio may have RDS. The RDSfeature is available for use only onFM stations that broadcast RDSinformation. This feature only workswhen the information from the radiostation is available. In rare cases, aradio station could broadcastincorrect information that causes theradio features to work improperly.If this happens, contact the radiostation.

While the radio is tuned to anFM-RDS station, the station nameor call letters display.

Radio Menus

Radio menus are available for AMand FM.

Push theZ knob to open themain radio menu for that band.

Selecting a Band

Press the RADIO/BAND button tochoose AM, FM, or XM™,if equipped. The last station thatwas playing starts playing again.

Selecting a Station

Seek Tuning

If the radio station is not known:

Briefly presss © or ¨ \ toautomatically search for the nextavailable station. If a station is notfound, the radio switches to a moresensitive search level. If a stationstill is not found, the frequency thatwas last active begins to play.

If the radio station is known:

Press and holds © or ¨ \ untilthe station on the display isreached, then release the button.

Manual Tuning

Turn theZ knob to select thefrequency on the display.

Favorites List

1. Press theZ knob.

2. Select Favorites List.

3. Select the station.

Station Lists

1. Press theZ knob.

2. Select AM or FM Station List. Allreceivable stations in the currentreception area are displayed. If astation list has not been created,an automatic station searchis done.


Category Lists

Most stations that broadcast anRDS program‐type code specify thetype of programming transmitted.Some stations change the programtype code depending on thecontent. The system stores the RDSstations sorted by program type inthe FM category list.


To search for a programming typedetermined by station:

1. Press theZ knob.

2. Select FM Category List. A list ofall programming types availabledisplays.

3. Select the programming type.A list of stations that transmitprogramming of the selectedtype displays.


The category lists are updatedwhen the station lists areupdated.

Updating Station & Category Lists

If stations stored in the station listcan no longer be received:

1. Press theZ knob.

2. Select Update AM or FM StationList, if the stations stored in thestation list are no longerreceived. A station search will becompleted and the first station inthe updated list will play.

To cancel the station search, presstheZ knob.

Storing a Station as a Favorite

Stations from all bands can bestored in any order in the favoritepages.

Up to six stations can be stored ineach favorite page and the numberof available favorite pages canbe set.

Storing Stations

To store the station to a position inthe list, press the correspondingbutton 1 to 6 until a beep is heard.

Retrieving Stations

Press the FAV 1/2/3 button to opena favorite page or to switch toanother favorite page. Briefly pressone of the 1 to 6 buttons to retrievethe station.

Autostore Stations

AS 1/2 (Autostore): Autostoresearches and stores six FM andsix AM stations with the strongestsignal. To use autostore:

1. Press RADIO/BAND to selectFM or AM.

2. Press AS 1/2 for at leasttwo seconds, the radio thensearches for available stations.

3. The radio automatically storesthe six strongest stations foundas autostore presets.

Press the AS 1/2 button to alternatebetween the autostore stations andfavorites.

AS displays on the radio when usingautostore presets.

Autostore does not deletepreviously stored favorite stations.

Autostore does not function with XMradio stations.


Satellite RadioVehicles with an XM™ SatelliteRadio tuner and a valid XM SatelliteRadio subscription can receive XMprogramming.

XM Satellite Radio Service

XM is a satellite radio service that isbased in the 48 contiguous UnitedStates and 10 Canadian provinces.XM Satellite Radio has a widevariety of programming andcommercial-free music, coast tocoast, and in digital-quality sound.A service fee is required to receivethe XM service. For moreinformation, contact XM atwww.xmradio.com or call1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. andwww.xmradio.ca or call1-877-438-9677 in Canada.

Control Buttons

The buttons used to control the XMradio are:

RADIO/BAND: Press to turn theradio on and choose between AM,FM, and XM™, if equipped.

Z (Menu Knob): Turn tosearch for channels and navigatethe available menus.

INFO: Press to display additionalinformation that may be availableabout the current song.

s © / ¨ \ : Press to go to theprevious or next channel.

FAV 1/2/3: Press to open thefavorites list and select favoritespages.

Buttons 1 to 6: Press to selectpreset stations.

Selecting the XM Band

Press the RADIO/BAND button tochoose between the AM, FM, andXM bands. The last channel playedin that band begins to play whenthat band is selected.

XM Categories

XM channels are organized incategories.

Removing or Adding Categories

Channels in a category that havebeen removed can still be accessedby using thes © or ¨ \buttons, or theZ knob.

To add or remove categories:



3. Select XM Categories.

4. Turn theZ knob to highlightthe category.

5. Press theZ knob to removeor add the category.


Selecting an XM Channel

XM channels can be selected bystation lists or category lists.

Selecting a Channel byStation List

XM channels can be selected byusings ©, ¨ \, or theZ knob.

To select an XM channel usings© or ¨ \, do one of the following:

. Press and releases © or ¨\ to go to the previous or nextchannel.

. Press and holds © or ¨ \to scroll through the previous ornext channels until the channelis reached.

To select an XM channel using theZ knob:

1. Turn theZ knob to highlightan XM channel.

2. Press theZ knob to selectthe channel, or leave thechannel highlighted.

To select an XM channel usingthe menu:

1. Press theZ knob.

2. Select XM Stations List.

3. Select the channel.

Selecting a Channel by Category

1. Press theZ knob.

2. Select XM Category List. A list ofall programing types availabledisplays.

3. Select the programing type.

4. Select the channel.

Storing an XM Channel as aFavorite

Channels from all bands can bestored in any order in the favoritespages.

Up to six channels can be stored ineach favorites page and the numberof available favorites pages canbe set.

Storing a Channel as a Favorite

To store the channel to a position inthe list, press and hold thecorresponding 1 to 6 button until thechannel can be heard again.

Retrieving Channels

Press the FAV button to open afavorites page or to change toanother favorites page. Briefly pressone of the 1 to 6 buttons to retrievethe channel.

XM Messages

XL (Explicit LanguageChannels): These channels, or anyothers, can be blocked by request,by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

XM Updating: The encryption codein the receiver is being updated. Noaction is required. This processshould take no longer than30 seconds.


Loading XM: The audio system isacquiring and processing audio andtext data. No action is needed. Thismessage should disappear shortly.

Channel Off Air: This channel isnot currently in service. Tune in toanother channel.

Channel Unauth : This channel isblocked or cannot be received withyour XM Subscription package.

Channel Unavailable: Thispreviously assigned channel is nolonger assigned. Tune to anotherstation.

No Artist Info: The system isworking properly. No artistinformation is available at this timeon this channel.

No Title Info: The system isworking properly. No song titleinformation is available at this timeon this channel.

No CAT Info: The system isworking properly. No categoryinformation is available at this timeon this channel.

No Information: The system isworking properly. No text orinformational messages areavailable at this time on thischannel.

No XM Signal: The system isworking properly. The vehicle maybe in a location where the XM signalis being blocked. When the vehicleis moved into an open area, thesignal should return.

CAT Not Found: The system isworking properly. There are nochannels available for the selectedcategory.

XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0,this message alternates with the XMRadio 8‐digit radio ID label. Thislabel is needed to activate theservice.

Unknown: If this message isreceived when tuned to channel 0,there could be a receiver fault.Consult with your dealer.

Check Antenna: If this messagedoes not clear within a short periodof time, the receiver could have afault. Consult with your dealer.

XM Not Available: If this messagedoes not clear within a short periodof time, the receiver could have afault. Consult with your dealer.

Radio ReceptionFrequency interference and staticcan occur during normal radioreception if items such as cellularphone chargers, vehicleconvenience accessories, andexternal electronic devices areplugged into the accessory poweroutlet. If there is interference orstatic, unplug the item from theaccessory power outlet.

FM

FM signals only reach about16 to 65 km (10 to 40 miles).Although the radio has a built-inelectronic circuit that automaticallyworks to reduce interference, some


static can occur, especially aroundtall buildings or hills, causing thesound to fade in and out.

AM

The range for most AM stations isgreater than for FM, especially atnight. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interfere witheach other. For better radioreception, most AM radio stationsboost the power levels during theday, and then reduce these levelsduring the night. Static can alsooccur when things like storms andpower lines interfere with radioreception. When this happens, tryreducing the treble on the radio.

XM™ Satellite Radio Service

XM Satellite Radio Service givesdigital radio reception from coast tocoast in the 48 contiguous UnitedStates, and in Canada. Just as withFM, tall buildings or hills caninterfere with satellite radio signals,causing the sound to fade in andout. In addition, traveling or standing

under heavy foliage, bridges,garages, or tunnels may cause lossof the XM signal for a period of time.

Cellular Phone Usage

Cellular phone usage may causeinterference with the vehicle's radio.This interference may occur whenmaking or receiving phone calls,charging the phone's battery,or simply having the phone on. Thisinterference can cause an increasedlevel of static while listening to theradio. If static is received whilelistening to the radio, unplug thecellular phone and turn it off.

Backglass AntennaThe AM-FM antenna is integratedwith the rear window defogger,located in the rear window. Makesure that the inside surface of therear window is not scratched andthat the lines on the glass are notdamaged. If the inside surface isdamaged, it could interfere withradio reception. For proper radio

reception, the antenna connectorneeds to be properly attached to thepost on the glass.

If a cellular telephone antennaneeds to be attached to the glass,make sure that the grid lines for theAM-FM antenna are not damaged.There is enough space between thegrid lines to attach a cellulartelephone antenna withoutinterfering with radio reception.

Notice: Using a razor blade orsharp object to clear the insiderear window can damage the rearwindow antenna and/or the rearwindow defogger. Repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Do not clear the insiderear window with sharp objects.


Notice: Do not apply aftermarketglass tinting with metallic film.The metallic film in some tintingmaterials will interfere with ordistort the incoming radioreception. Any damage caused toyour backglass antenna due tometallic tinting materials will notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Satellite Radio AntennaFor vehicles with XM™ satelliteradio service, the antenna is locatedon the roof of the vehicle. Keep theantenna clear of obstructions forclear radio reception.

Audio Players

CD PlayerThe CD player can play audio CDsand MP3 CDs.

The CD player will not play8 cm (3 in) CDs.

Care of CDs

Sound quality can be reduced dueto disc quality, recording method,quality of the music recorded, anddisc handling. Handle discs carefullyand store them in their originalcases or other protective casesaway from direct sunlight and dust.If the bottom surface of a disc isdamaged, the disc may not playproperly or at all. Do not touch thebottom surface of a disc whilehandling it; this could damage thesurface. Pick up discs by graspingthe outer edges or the edge of thehole and the outer edge.

If the bottom surface of a disc isdirty, take a soft lint free cloth,or dampen a clean‐soft cloth in a

mild neutral detergent solutionmixed with water, and clean it. Wipethe disc from the center to theouter edge.

Care of the CD Player

Do not add a label to a disc; it couldget caught in the CD player. If alabel is needed, write on the top ofthe recorded disc with amarking pen.

Do not use disc lens cleanersbecause they could contaminate thelens of the disc optics and damagethe CD player.

Notice: If a label is added to aCD, or more than one CD isinserted into the slot at a time,or an attempt is made to playscratched or damaged CDs, theCD player could be damaged.While using the CD player, useonly CDs in good conditionwithout any label, load one CD ata time, and keep the CD playerand the loading slot free offoreign materials, liquids, anddebris.


Control Buttons

The buttons used to control the CDplayer are:

CD/AUX: Press to use the CDplayer.

s © / ¨ \ : Press to selecttracks or to fast rewind or forwardwithin a track.

INFO: Press to display additionalinformation about the current trackthat may be available.

Z (Menu Knob): Turn to selecttracks. Press to enter the CD menuand select items.

Z (Eject): Press to eject the disc.

Inserting a CD

With the printed side facing up,insert a disc into the CD slot until itis drawn in.

Removing a CD

Press theZ button.

The disc is pushed out of theCD slot.

If the disc is not removed after it isejected, it is pulled back in after afew seconds.

Playing a CD or MP3 CD

Press the CD/AUX button if there isa disc in the player; it beginsplaying.

Information about the disc andcurrent track is shown on thedisplay depending on the datastored.

Selecting a CD Track

Using the control buttons:

. Press thes © or ¨ \ buttonto select the previous or nexttrack.

. Turn theZ knob.

Using the CD Menu:

1. Press theZ knob.

2. Select Tracks list.

3. Select the track.

Playing Tracks in Random Order

Press theZ knob and then setShuffle Songs to On.

Fast Forward and Rewind

Press and hold ¨ \ ors © tofast forward or rewind within thecurrent track.

Selecting an MP3 Track

Using the control buttons:

. Press thes © or ¨ \ buttonto select the previous or nexttrack.

. Turn theZ knob.

Using the CD Menu:

1. Press theZ knob.

2. Select Playlists/Folders.

3. Select the playlist or folder.



Searching for MP3 Tracks

The search feature may take sometime to display the information afterreading the disc due to the amountof information stored on the disc.FM automatically plays while thedisc is being read.

Tracks can be searched by:. Playlists. Artists. Albums. Song Titles. Genres. Folder View

To search for tracks:

1. Press theZ knob.

2. Select Search.

3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,Song Titles, Genres,or Folder View.


Auxiliary DevicesThis vehicle may have an 3.5 mm(1/8 in) auxiliary input jack and aUSB port, located in the centerconsole. Some portable audiodevices such as iPods®, MP3players, and USB storage devicescan be connected to the vehicleusing a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable or aUSB cable.

A. USB port.

B. 3.5 mm (1/8 in) auxiliaryinput jack.

Portable devices are controlled byusing the menu system described inOperation on page 7‑4.

Using the 3.5mm (1/8 in)Auxiliary Input Jack

Connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable tothe 3.5 mm (1/8 in) auxiliary inputjack to use a portable audio player.

Playback of an audio device that isconnected to the 3.5 mm (1/8 in)auxiliary input jack can only becontrolled using the controls on thedevice.

Adjusting the Volume

Turn the3 O knob to adjust thevolume of the infotainment systemafter the volume level has been seton the portable audio device.


USB Port

For vehicles with a USB port, thefollowing devices may be connectedand controlled by the infotainmentsystem.. iPods. PlaysForSure Devices (PFD). USB Drives. Zunes

Not all iPods, PFDs, USB Drives,and Zunes are compatible with theinfotainment system.

Connecting and Controllingan iPod®

Not all iPods can be controlled bythe infotainment system.

Connecting an iPod

Connect the iPod to the USB port.

Searching for a Track

Tracks can be searched for by:. Playlists. Artists

. Albums

. Song Titles

. Podcasts

. Genres

. Audiobooks

. Composers


1. Press theZ knob.

2. Select Search.

3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,Song Titles, Podcasts, Genres,Audiobooks, or Composers.


Shuffle

Press theZ knob and setShuffle Songs (Random) to On orOff, then press the BACK button toreturn the main screen.

On: Plays tracks in the currentfolder in random order.

Off: Plays tracks in the currentfolder in sequential order.

Repeat

Press theZ knob and setRepeat to On or Off, then press theBACK button to return the mainscreen.

On: Repeats the current track.

Off: Starts playing from thebeginning of the current track afterthe last track finishes.

Connecting and Controlling aPlaysForSure Device (PFD)or Zune™

Connecting a PFD or Zune

Connect the PFD or Zune to theUSB port.


Tracks can be searched for by:. Playlists. Artists. Albums


. Song Titles

. Podcasts

. Genres


1. Press theZ knob.

2. Select Search.

3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,Song Titles, Podcasts,or Genres.


Shuffle

Press theZ knob and setShuffle Songs (Random) to Onor Off.

On: Plays current tracks in randomorder.

Off: Plays current tracks insequential order.

Repeat

Press theZ knob and setRepeat to On or Off.

Repeat On: Repeats the currenttrack.

Repeat Off: Starts playing from thebeginning of the current track afterthe last track finishes.

Connecting and Controlling aUSB Drive

The infotainment system can onlyplay back .mp3 and .wma files froma USB drive.

Only the first 2,500 songs arerecognized on the device.

When a device is not supported, themessage “No supported data found.You can safely disconnect thedevice” appears.

Connecting a USB Drive

Connect the USB drive to theUSB port.


It is normal for the search feature totake some time to display theinformation after reading the devicedue to the amount of informationstored.

Files that do not have any metadata stored in the ID3 tag display asUnknown.

Tracks can be searched for by:. Playlists*. Artists. Albums. Song Titles. Genres. Folder View

*This only displays if a playlist isfound on the device.


1. Press theZ knob.

2. Select Search.


3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,Song Titles, Genres,or Folder View.


Shuffle

Press theZ knob and setShuffle Songs (Random) to Onor Off.

On: Plays current tracks in randomorder.

Off: Plays current tracks insequential order.

Repeat

Press theZ knob and setRepeat to On or Off.

Repeat On: Repeats the currenttrack.

Repeat Off: Starts playing from thebeginning of the current track afterthe last track finishes.

Phone

Bluetooth (Overview)Vehicles with a Bluetooth systemcan use a Bluetooth‐capable cellphone with a Hands‐Free Profile tomake and receive phone calls. Theinfotainment system and voicerecognition are used to control thesystem. The system can be usedwhile the ignition is in ON/RUN orACC/ACCESSORY. The range ofthe Bluetooth system can be up to9.1 m (30 ft). Not all phones supportall functions and not all phones workwith the Bluetooth system. Seewww.gm.com/bluetooth for moreinformation about compatiblephones.

Bluetooth Controls

Use the buttons located on theinfotainment system and thesteering wheel to operate theBluetooth system.


b g (Push to Talk): Press toanswer incoming calls, to confirmsystem information, and to startvoice recognition.

$ c (Mute/End Call): Press toend a call, reject a call, or to cancelan operation.

Infotainment System Controls

For information about how tonavigate the menu system using theinfotainment controls, see Operationon page 7‑4 .

V / $ (Phone): Press to enter thePhone main menu.

Voice Recognition

The voice recognition system usescommands to control the systemand dial phone numbers.

Noise: The system may notrecognize voice commands if thereis too much background noise.


When to Speak: A tone sounds toindicate that the system is ready fora voice command. Wait for the toneand then speak.

How to Speak: Speak clearly in acalm and natural voice.

Audio System

When using the Bluetooth system,sound comes through the vehicle'sfront audio system speakers andoverrides the audio system. Usethe3 O knob during a call tochange the volume level. Theadjusted volume level remains inmemory for later calls. The systemmaintains a minimum volume level.

Other Information

The Bluetooth® word mark andlogos are owned by Bluetooth® SIG,Inc. and any use of such marks byGeneral Motors is under license.Other trademarks and trade namesare those of their respective owners.

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑15 for FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards.

Bluetooth (InfotainmentControls)For information about how tonavigate the menu system using theinfotainment controls, see Operationon page 7‑4 .

Pairing

A Bluetooth‐enabled cell phonemust be paired to the Bluetoothsystem first and then connected tothe vehicle before it can be used.See the cell phone manufacturer'suser guide for Bluetooth functionsbefore pairing the cell phone. If aBluetooth phone is not connected,calls will be made using OnStar®

Hands‐Free Calling, if available.Refer to the OnStar Owner's Guidefor more information.

The pairing process can be startedby using the voice recognitionsystem or the controls on theinfotainment system.

Pairing information:. Up to five cell phones can be

paired to the Bluetooth system.. The pairing process is disabled

when the vehicle is moving.. The Bluetooth system links with

the first available paired cellphone in the order the phonewas paired.

. Only one paired cell phone canbe connected to the Bluetoothsystem at a time.

. Pairing should only need to becompleted once, unless changesto the pairing information havebeen made or the phone isdeleted.

To link to a different paired phone,see “Linking to a Different Phone”later in this section.


Pairing a Phone


2. Select Phone Settings.

3. Select Bluetooth.

4. Select Pair Device (Phone).A four‐digit PersonalIdentification Number (PIN)number appears on the display.

If the “Add new GPS device”option is selected, the systemwill start a search for Bluetooth“Handsfree” profile devices justlike if “Add new Phone” wasselected. The additional GPSlocation feature which wouldprovide the vehicle's GPSlocation through the BluetoothSerial Port Profile is notavailable.

5. Start the pairing process on thecell phone that will be paired tothe vehicle. Reference the cellphone manufacturer's user guidefor information on this process.

Locate the device named“General Motors” or “YourVehicle” in the list on the cellphone and follow the instructionson the cell phone to enter thefour‐digit PIN provided by thesystem.

6. The system prompts for a namefor the phone and confirms thename provided. This name isused to indicate which phone isconnected.

7. The system responds with“<Phone name> has beensuccessfully paired” after thepairing process is complete.

8. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 to pairadditional phones.

Listing All Paired and ConnectedPhones




4. Select Device List.

Deleting a Paired Phone





5. Select the phone to delete andfollow the on‐screen prompts.

Linking to a Different Phone

To link to a different phone, the newphone must be in the vehicle andavailable to be connected to theBluetooth system before theprocess is started.





5. Select the new phone to link toand follow the on screenprompts.

If delete is selected, thehighlighted phone will bedeleted.


Making a Call

1. Press the V / $ button twice.

2. Enter the character sequence.See “Entering a CharacterSequence” in Operation onpage 7‑4 for more information.

3. Select Call to start dialing thenumber.

Accepting or Declining a Call

When a call is received, theinfotainment system mutes and aring tone is heard in the vehicle.

Accepting a Call

Turn theZ knob to Answer and

press theZ knob.

Declining a Call

Turn theZ knob to Decline and

press theZ knob.

Call Waiting

Call waiting must be supported onthe Bluetooth phone and enabled bythe wireless service carrier to work.

Accepting a Call

Turn theZ knob to Answer and

press theZ knob.

Declining a Call

Turn theZ knob to Decline and

press theZ knob.

Switching Between Calls (CallWaiting Calls Only)

To switch between calls:

1. Press theZ knob.

2. Select Switch Call fromthe menu.

Conference Calling

Conference calling and three‐waycalling must be supported on theBluetooth phone and enabled by thewireless service carrier to work.

To start a conference while in acurrent call:

1. Press theZ knob.

2. Select Enter Number.

3. Enter the character sequencethen select call. See “Entering aCharacter Sequence” inOperation on page 7‑4 formore information.

4. After the call has been placed,press theZ knob and selectMerge Calls.

5. To add more callers to theconference call, repeat steps 1through 4. The number of callerswho can be added is limited byyour wireless service carrier.

Ending a Call

Press theZ knob and selectHang Up.

Muting a Call

To Mute a Call

Press theZ knob and selectMute Call.

To Cancel Mute

Press theZ knob and selectMute Call.


Dual Tone Multi-Frequency(DTMF) Tones

The in‐vehicle Bluetooth system cansend numbers during a call. This isused when calling a menu‐drivenphone system.

1. Press theZ knob andselect Enter Number.

2. Enter the character sequence;see “Entering a CharacterSequence” in Operation onpage 7‑4 for more information.

Bluetooth (VoiceRecognition)

Pairing

A Bluetooth‐enabled cell phonemust be paired to the Bluetoothsystem and then connected to thevehicle before it can be used. Seethe cell phone manufacturer's userguide for Bluetooth functions beforepairing the cell phone. If a Bluetoothphone is not connected, calls will bemade using OnStar® Hands‐Free

Calling, if available. Refer to theOnStar Owner's Guide for moreinformation.





the first available paired cellphone in the order the phonewas paired.

. Only one paired cell phone canbe connected to the Bluetoothsystem at a time.

. Pairing only needs to becompleted once, unless thepairing information changes orthe phone is deleted.


Pairing a Phone

1. Press b g.. For vehicles without a

navigation system, thesystem responds “Ready,”followed by a tone.

. For vehicles with anavigation system, thesystem responds with atone. After the tone, say“Hands Free.” The systemresponds “Ready,” followedby a tone.

2. Say “Bluetooth.” The systemresponds “Bluetooth ready,”followed by a tone.

3. Say “Pair.” The system respondswith instructions and a four‐digitPersonal Identification Number(PIN). The PIN number will beused in Step 4.


4. Start the pairing process on thecell phone that will be paired tothe vehicle. Reference the cellphone manufacturer's user guidefor information on this process.

Locate the device named“General Motors” or “YourVehicle” in the list on the cellphone and follow the instructionson the cell phone to enter thefour‐digit PIN that was providedin Step 3.

5. The system prompts for a namefor the phone. This name will beused to indicate which phone isconnected. The system confirmsthe name.

6. The system responds with“<Phone name> has beensuccessfully paired” after thepairing process is complete.

7. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 foradditional phones to be paired.






3. Say “List.” The system lists allpaired Bluetooth devices. Thesystem will respond “isconnected” if a phone isconnected to the vehicle.






3. Say “Delete.” The system askswhich phone to delete followedby a tone.


4. Say the name of the phone to bedeleted. If the phone name isunknown, use the “List”command for a list of all pairedphones. The system responds“Would you like to delete <phonename>? Yes or No,” followed bya tone.

5. Say “Yes” to delete the phone.The system responds “OK,deleting <phone name>.”






3. Say “Change phone.” Thesystem responds “Please waitwhile I search for other phones.”. If another phone is found,

the response will be“<Phone name> is nowconnected.”

. If another phone is notfound, the original phoneremains connected.

Storing Name Tags

The system can store up to30 phone numbers as name tagsthat are shared between theBluetooth and OnStar systems.

The system uses the followingcommands to store and retrievephone numbers:. Store. Digit Store. Directory

Using the Store Command

The store command allows a phonenumber to be stored withoutentering the digits individually.




2. Say “Store.” The systemresponds “Store, numberplease,” followed by a tone.

3. Say the complete phone numberto be stored without pausing.. If the system recognizes

the number, the response is“OK, Storing.”


. If the system does notrecognize the phonenumber, the response is“Store <Phone number>.”“Please say yes or no.” Ifthe number is correct, say“Yes.” If the number is notcorrect, say “No.” Thesystem will ask for thenumber again.

4. After the system stores thephone number, it responds“Please say the name tag,”followed by a tone.

5. Say a name tag for the phonenumber. The name tag isrecorded and the systemresponds “About to store <nametag>. Does that sound OK?.”. If the name tag does not

sound correct, say “No” andrepeat Step 5.

. If the name tag soundscorrect, say “Yes” and thename tag is stored. After

the number is stored, thesystem returns to themain menu.

Using the Digit Store Command

The digit store command allows aphone number to be stored byentering the digits individually.




2. Say “Digit Store.” The systemresponds with “Please say thefirst digit to store,” followed bya tone.

3. Say the first digit to be stored.The system will repeat back thedigit it heard followed by a tone.Continue entering digits until thenumber to be stored is complete.. If an unwanted number is

recognized by the system,say “Clear” at any time toclear the last number.

. To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system,say “Verify” at any time.

4. After the complete number hasbeen entered, say “Store.” Thesystem responds “Please saythe name tag,” followed bya tone.

5. Say a name tag for the phonenumber. The name tag isrecorded and the systemresponds “About to store <nametag>. Does that sound OK?.”. If the name tag does not

sound correct, say “No” andrepeat Step 5.


. If the name tag soundscorrect, say “Yes” and thename tag is stored. Afterthe number is stored, thesystem returns to themain menu.

Using the Directory Command

The directory command lists all ofthe name tags stored by the system.To use the directory command:




2. Say “Directory.” The systemresponds “Directory” and lists allstored name tags. The systemreturns to the main menu whenthe list is complete.

Deleting Name Tags

The system uses the followingcommands to delete name tags:. Delete. Delete all name tags

Using the Delete Command

The delete command is used todelete specific name tags.

To delete name tags:



. For vehicles with anavigation system, thesystem responds with atone. After the tone, say

“Hands Free.” The systemresponds “Ready,” followedby a tone.

2. Say “Delete.” The systemresponds “Delete, please saythe name tag,” followed bya tone.

3. Say the name tag to be deleted.The system responds “Wouldyou like to delete, <name tag>?Please say yes or no.”. If the name tag is correct,

say “Yes” to delete thename tag. The systemresponds with “OK, deleting<name tag>, returning tothe main menu.”

. If the name tag is incorrect,say “No.” The systemresponds with “No. OK, let'stry again, please say thename tag.”


Using the Delete All Name TagsCommand

The delete all name tags commanddeletes all stored phone book nametags and route name tags forOnStar, if stored.

To delete all name tags:




2. Say “Delete all name tags.” Thesystem responds “You are aboutto delete all name tags stored inyour phone directory and your

route destination directory. Areyou sure you want to do this?Please say yes or no.”. Say “Yes” to delete all

name tags.. Say “No” to cancel the

function and return to themain menu.

Making a Call

Calls can be made using thefollowing commands:. Dial. Digit Dial. Call. Re‐dial

Using the Dial Command




2. Say “Dial.” The system responds“Dial using <phone name>.“Number please,” followed bya tone.

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing.. If the system recognizes

the number, it respondswith “OK, Dialing” and dialsthe number.

. If the system does notrecognize the number, itconfirms the numbersfollowed by a tone. If thenumber is correct, say“Yes.” The system responds“OK, Dialing” and dials thenumber. If the number is


not correct, say “No.” Thesystem will ask for thenumber again.

Using the Digit Dial Command




2. Say “Digit Dial.” The systemresponds “Digit dial using<phone name>, please say thefirst digit to dial,” followed bya tone.

3. Say the digits to be dialed one ata time. The system repeats backthe digit it heard followed bya tone.

4. Continue entering digits until thenumber to be dialed is complete.After the entire number has beenentered, say “Dial.” The systemresponds “OK, Dialing” and dialsthe number.. If an unwanted number is

recognized by the system,say “Clear” at any time toclear the last number.

. To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system,say “Verify” at any time.

Using the Call Command




2. Say “Call.” The system responds“Call using <phone name>.Please say the name tag,”followed by a tone.

3. Say the name tag of the personto call.. If the system recognizes

the name tag, it responds“OK, calling <name tag>”and dials the number.

. If the system does notrecognize the name tag, itconfirms the name tagfollowed by a tone. If thename tag is correct, say“Yes.” The system respondswith “OK, calling <nametag>” and dials the number.If the name tag is notcorrect, say “No.” Thesystem will ask for thename tag again.

Once connected, the person calledwill be heard through the audiospeakers.


Using the Re‐dial Command




2. After the tone, say “Re‐dial.” Thesystem responds “Re‐dial using<phone name>” and dials thelast number called from theconnected Bluetooth phone.

Once connected, the person calledwill be heard through the audiospeakers.

Receiving a Call

When an incoming call is received,the audio system mutes and a ringtone is heard in the vehicle.

. Press b g.

. Press $ c to ignore a call.

Call Waiting

Call waiting must be supported onthe Bluetooth phone and enabled bythe wireless service carrier.

. Press b g to answer anincoming call when another callis active. The original call isplaced on hold.

. Press b g again to return tothe original call.

. To ignore the incoming call, noaction is required.

. Press $ c to disconnect thecurrent call and switch to the callon hold.

Three‐Way Calling

Three‐way calling must besupported on the Bluetooth phoneand enabled by the wireless servicecarrier.

1. While on a call, press b g. Thesystem responds with “Ready,”followed by a tone.

2. Say “Three‐way call.” Thesystem responds with“Three‐way call, please say dialor call.”

3. Use the dial or call command todial the number of the third partyto be called.

4. Once the call is connected,press b g to link all callerstogether.

Ending a Call

Press $ c to end a call.


Muting a Call

During a call, all sounds from insidethe vehicle can be muted so that theperson on the other end of the callcannot hear them.

To Mute a call

1. Press b g. The systemresponds “Ready,” followed bya tone.

2. Say “Mute Call.” The systemresponds “Call muted.”

To Cancel Mute


2. After the tone, say “Mute Call.”The system responds“Resuming call.”

Transferring a Call

Audio can be transferred betweenthe in‐vehicle Bluetooth system andthe cell phone.

To Transfer Audio to the CellPhone

During a call with the audio in thevehicle:


2. Say “Transfer Call.” The systemresponds “Transferring call” andthe audio transfers to the cellphone.

To Transfer Audio to the In-VehicleBluetooth System

The cell phone must be paired andconnected with the Bluetoothsystem before a call can betransferred. The connection processcan take up to two minutes after theignition is turned to ON/RUN orACC/ACCESSORY.

For vehicles without a navigationsystem, press b g during a callwith the audio on the cell phone.The audio transfers to the vehicle.

For vehicles with a navigationsystem, press b g during a callwith the audio on the cell phone.If the audio does not transfer to thevehicle, use the audio transferfeature on the cell phone. See thecell phone manufacturer's userguide for more information.

Voice Pass-Thru

Voice pass‐thru allows access to thevoice recognition commands on thecell phone. See the cell phonemanufacturer's user guide to see ifthe cell phone supports this feature.

To access contacts stored in the cellphone:



. For vehicles with anavigation system, thesystem responds with atone. After the tone, say


“Hands Free.” The systemresponds “Ready,” followedby a tone.


3. Say “Voice.” The systemresponds “OK, accessing<phone name>.”

The cell phone's normal promptmessages will go through theircycle according to the phone'soperating instructions.


The in‐vehicle Bluetooth system cansend numbers and the numbersstored as name tags during a call.Use this feature when calling amenu‐driven phone system.Account numbers can also bestored for use.

Sending a Number During a Call


2. Say “Dial.” The system responds“Say a number to send tones,”followed by a tone.

3. Say the number to send.. If the system recognizes

the number, it responds“OK, Sending Number” andthe dial tones are sent andthe call continues.

. If the system does notrecognize the number, itresponds “Dial Number,please say yes or no?,”followed by a tone. If thenumber is correct, say“Yes.” The system responds“OK, Sending Number” andthe dial tones are sent andthe call continues.

Sending a Stored Name TagDuring a Call


2. Say “Send name tag.” Thesystem responds “Say a nametag to send tones,” followed bya tone.

3. Say the name tag to send.. If the system recognizes

the number, it responds“OK, Sending <name tag>”and the dial tones are sentand the call continues.

. If the system does notrecognize the name tag, itresponds “Dial <name tag>,please say yes or no?,”followed by a tone. If thename tag is correct, say“Yes.” The system respondswith “OK, Sending <nametag>” and the dial tones aresent and the call continues.


Clearing the System

Unless information is deleted out ofthe in‐vehicle Bluetooth system, itwill be retained indefinitely. Thisincludes all saved name tags in thephone book and phone pairinginformation. For information on howto delete this information, see theprevious sections on “Deleting aPaired Phone“ and “DeletingName Tags.”

Bluetooth (Navigation)For information about how tonavigate the menu system using theinfotainment controls, see“Overview” under Introduction, in theNavigation supplement.

Bluetooth Pairing

To make calls with a Bluetoothenabled cell phone through yourvehicle, it must be paired to thevehicle's Bluetooth system first andthen connected to the vehicle beforeit can be used. Refer to the cellphone manufacturer's user guide forBluetooth pairing instructions. If aBluetooth phone is off or notconnected, calls will automatically be made using the OnStar®

Hands‐Free Calling feature,if available. Refer to the OnStarOwner's Guide for more informationabout OnStar Hands-Free Calling.

A Bluetooth phone with MP3capability cannot be connected tothe vehicle as a phone and an MP3player at the same time.





the first available paired cellphone based on the ordershown in the device list.

. Only one paired cell phone canbe connected to the vehicle'sBluetooth system at a time.

. Pairing should only need to becompleted once, unless changesto the pairing information havebeen made or the phone isdeleted.



Pairing a Phone

1. Press the CONFIG controlbutton repeatedly until thePhone menu is shown.

2. Select the Bluetooth submenu.

3. Select “Add New Phone.” Thepairing process will beginsearching for Bluetooth deviceson your cellular pone. See thecell phone manufacturer's userguide for information on thisprocess.

If the “Add new GPS device”option is selected, the systemwill start a search for Bluetooth“Handsfree” profile devices justlike if you had selected “Addnew phone.” The additional GPSlocation feature which wouldprovide the vehicle's GPS

location through the BluetoothSerial Port Profile is notavailable.

On the cell phone, locate thedevice named “Your Vehicle.”Follow the instructions given onthe cell phone or follow the voiceprompts, to enter the four-digitPersonal Identification Number(PIN) that has been provided.

4. The system voice promptrequests that you say the nameyou want used for the phone thatis being paired. Use a name thatbest describes the phone. The


system voice prompt thenrepeats the name you providedfor confirmation: say “Yes.”

5. The system responds with“phone name has beensuccessfully paired” after thepairing process is complete.




3. Select the Device List submenu. A list of all previously paired phoneswill be displayed. If there is acurrently connected phone, a checkmark will appear on the right side ofthe phone name.





3. Select the Device List submenu. 4. Select the phone to be deletedand then follow the on-screenprompts to delete the devicefrom the system.


5. Once a phone has been deleted,the only way to connect back tothat phone is to pair the phoneagain. See “Pairing a Phone”earlier before the process isstarted.


To link to a different phone, the newphone must be in the vehicle andavailable to be connected to theBluetooth system before theprocess is started.



3. Select the Device List submenu.

4. Select the phone to be linkedand then follow the on-screenprompts.


5. The Phone menu will bedisplayed with the name of thephone linked.

Making a Call

PressV located on the faceplate ofthe infotainment system, to accessthe phone menu.

Enter Number

Use to enter a phone number andmake a call.

1. Press the Enter Numberselection. A dial pad displays.

2. Enter the phone number bypivoting the Multifunction knob.

3. Press the Call button on thescreen to make the call.


Accepting or Declining anIncoming Call

When an incoming call is received,the audio is muted and ring tonesounds.

Accepting a Call

Press b / g on the steering wheelcontrol to answer an incoming call,or press the appropriate presetbutton for the Answer option on thescreen to answer the call.

Declining a Call

Press the $ /c on the steeringwheel controls or select the Declineoption on the screen.

Call Waiting

Call waiting must be supported onthe Bluetooth phone and enabled bythe wireless service carrier to work.

Switching Calls (Only Availablewith Call Waiting)

This feature allows you to switchbetween calls, making one callactive and placing the other on hold.

Switch Call: Press the outer ring ofthe multifunction knob to SwitchCall, then press the appropriatepreset button for the Switch Calloption on the screen.


Conference Calling

Conference and three-way callingmust be supported on the Bluetoothphone and enabled by the wirelessservice carrier to work.

To start a conference while in acurrent call:

1. Press the V control button onthe faceplate until the Phonemain screen is shown with thecurrent active call.

2. Select the Enter Number optionon the screen.

3. Make another call. The first callwill be placed on hold while thesecond call is dialing andconnected.

4. To make a conference call,select the Merge Calls optionwhich will merge both calls intoone conference call.

5. To add more callers to theconference call, repeat Steps 2through 4. The number of callerswho can be added is limited byyour wireless service carrier.

Ending a Call

To end a call:

1. Press the V control button.

2. Select Hang Up.


Mute or UnMute a Call


2. Select the Mute call.

3. Select the Mute call again tounmute the call.


The in-vehicle Bluetooth system cansend numbers during a call. This isused when calling a menu-drivenphone system.


2. Select Enter Number option andenter the number sequence.

The DTMF Tones will be generatedon the network as you enter eachnumber.


2 NOTES

Climate Controls 8-1

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemsDual Automatic Climate ControlSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Air VentsAir Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

Climate Control Systems

Dual Automatic Climate Control SystemThe heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled withthis system.

A. Air Conditioning

B. Driver and PassengerTemperature Controls

C. Heated Seats

D. Air Delivery Modes

E. Climate Display

F. Defrost

G. Recirculation

H. Fan Controls

I. AUTO (Automatic Mode)

J. Rear Defogger

8-2 Climate Controls

Automatic Operation

The system automatically controlsthe fan speed, air delivery, airconditioning and recirculation inorder to heat or cool the vehicle tothe desired temperature.

When the indicator light is on, thesystem is in full automatic operation.If the air delivery mode or fansetting is manually adjusted, theauto indicator turns off and displayswill show the selected settings.

To place the system inautomatic mode:

1. Press AUTO.

2. Set the temperature. Allow thesystem time to stabilize. Thenadjust the temperature asneeded for best comfort.

English units can be changed tometric units through the DriverInformation Center (DIC). SeeVehicle Personalization onpage 5‑29.

Manual Operation

Driver and PassengerTemperature Control: Thetemperature can be adjustedseparately for the driver andpassenger.

Turn the knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase ordecrease the driver or passengertemperature setting.

Fan Control: Press the left fanbutton to decrease the fan speed.Press the right fan button toincrease the fan speed. Theselected fan speed is indicated bythe number of segments shown inthe display.

Pressing the left fan button longerturns the fan off.

Press AUTO to return to automaticoperation.

Air Delivery Modes: Press 8,Y,[ to change the direction of theairflow. An indicator light comes onin the selected mode button.

Changing the mode cancels theautomatic operation and the systemgoes into manual mode. PressAUTO to return to automaticoperation.

8 (Upper): Air is directed to thewindshield outlets.

Y (Vent): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.

[ (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets.

0 (Defrost): Clears thewindshield of fog or frost morequickly. Air is directed to thewindshield.

# (Air Conditioning): Press toturn the automatic air conditioningon or off. If the fan is turned off orthe outside temperature falls belowfreezing, the air conditioner willnot run.

Press AUTO to return to automaticoperation and the air conditionerruns as needed. When the indicatorlight is on, the air conditioner runs

Climate Controls 8-3

automatically to cool the air insidethe vehicle or to dry the air neededto defog the windshield faster.

h (Recirculation): Press to turnon recirculation. An indicator lightcomes on. Air is recirculated toquickly cool the inside of the vehicleor prevent outside air and odorsfrom entering.

Rear Window Defogger

= (Rear Window Defogger):Press to turn the rear windowdefogger on or off.

The rear window defogger turnsoff automatically after about10 minutes. If turned on again, itruns for about five minutes beforeturning off. At higher speeds, therear window defogger may stay oncontinuously.

For vehicles with heated outsiderearview mirrors, they turn on withthe rear window defogger and helpto clear fog or frost from the surfaceof the mirror. See Heated Mirrors onpage 2‑11.

Notice: Do not try to clear frostor other material from the insideof the front windshield and rearwindow with a razor blade oranything else that is sharp. Thismay damage the rear windowdefogger grid and affect yourradio's ability to pick up stationsclearly. The repairs wouldn't becovered by your warranty.

Sensors

The solar sensor located on top ofthe instrument panel near thewindshield monitors the solar heat.

The climate control system uses thesensor information to adjust thetemperature, fan speed,recirculation, and air delivery modefor best comfort.

If the sensor is covered theautomatic climate control systemmay not work properly.

Air VentsUse the louvers located on the airvents to change the direction of theairflow.

To open a vent, move thethumbwheel to | . To close the vent,move the thumbwheel to9.

Operation Tips. Keep all outlets open whenever

possible for best systemperformance.

. Keep the paths under all seatsclear of objects to help circulatethe air inside the vehicle moreeffectively.

. Use of non-GM approved hooddeflectors can adversely affectthe performance of the system.

8-4 Climate Controls

2 NOTES

Driving and Operating 9-1

Driving andOperating

Driving InformationDefensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 9-7Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 9-8Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . 9-11Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-12

Starting and OperatingNew Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-16Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18

Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-18Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20

Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21Shifting Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-22Parking Over ThingsThat Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22

Engine ExhaustEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24

Automatic TransmissionAutomatic Transmission . . . . . 9-24Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27

BrakesAntilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28

Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . 9-31

Ride Control SystemsTraction ControlSystem (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31

Electronic StabilityControl (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33

Interactive Drive ControlSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34

Cruise ControlCruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36

Object Detection SystemsUltrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 9-38

FuelFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-41Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . 9-42California FuelRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42

Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-42Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . 9-43Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46

TowingGeneral TowingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46

Conversions and Add-OnsAdd-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47

9-2 Driving and Operating

Driving Information

Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “alwaysexpect the unexpected.” The firststep in driving defensively is to wearyour safety belt, see Safety Belts onpage 3‑8 .

{ WARNING

Assume that other road users(pedestrians, bicyclists, and otherdrivers) are going to be carelessand make mistakes. Anticipatewhat they might do and be ready.In addition:

. Allow enough followingdistance between you andthe driver in front of you.

. Focus on the task of driving.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Driver distraction can causecollisions resulting in injury orpossible death. These simpledefensive driving techniquescould save your life.

Drunk Driving

{ WARNING

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes,perceptions, attentiveness, andjudgment can be affected by evena small amount of alcohol. Youcan have a serious — or evenfatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking. Do not drink and drive orride with a driver who has beendrinking. Ride home in a cab; or ifyou are with a group, designate adriver who will not drink.

Death and injury associated withdrinking and driving is a globaltragedy.

Alcohol affects four things thatanyone needs to drive a vehicle:judgment, muscular coordination,vision, and attentiveness.

Police records show thatalmost 40 percent of all motorvehicle-related deaths involvealcohol. In most cases, thesedeaths are the result of someonewho was drinking and driving.In recent years, more than17,000 annual motor vehicle-relateddeaths have been associated withthe use of alcohol, with about250,000 people injured.


For persons under 21, it is againstthe law in every U.S. state to drinkalcohol. There are good medical,psychological, and developmentalreasons for these laws.

The obvious way to eliminate theleading highway safety problem isfor people never to drink alcoholand then drive.

Medical research shows thatalcohol in a person's system canmake crash injuries worse,especially injuries to the brain,spinal cord, or heart. This meansthat when anyone who has beendrinking — driver or passenger — isin a crash, that person's chance ofbeing killed or permanently disabledis higher than if the person had notbeen drinking.

Control of a VehicleThe following three systemshelp to control the vehicle whiledriving — brakes, steering, andaccelerator. At times, as whendriving on snow or ice, it is easy toask more of those control systemsthan the tires and road can provide.Meaning, you can lose control of thevehicle. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 9‑31.

Adding non‐dealer accessoriescan affect vehicle performance.See Accessories and Modificationson page 10‑3.

BrakingSee Brake System Warning Lighton page 5‑14.

Braking action involves perceptiontime and reaction time. Deciding topush the brake pedal is perceptiontime. Actually doing it isreaction time.

Average reaction time is aboutthree‐fourths of a second. But that isonly an average. It might be lesswith one driver and as long astwo or three seconds or more withanother. Age, physical condition,alertness, coordination, andeyesight all play a part. So doalcohol, drugs, and frustration.But even in three‐fourths of asecond, a vehicle moving at100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m(66 ft). That could be a lot ofdistance in an emergency, sokeeping enough space between thevehicle and others is important.

And, of course, actual stoppingdistances vary greatly with thesurface of the road, whether it ispavement or gravel; the condition ofthe road, whether it is wet, dry,or icy; tire tread; the condition of thebrakes; the weight of the vehicle;and the amount of brake forceapplied.


Avoid needless heavy braking.Some people drive inspurts — heavy accelerationfollowed by heavy braking — ratherthan keeping pace with traffic.This is a mistake. The brakes mightnot have time to cool between hardstops. The brakes will wear outmuch faster with a lot of heavybraking. Keeping pace with thetraffic and allowing realisticfollowing distances eliminatesa lot of unnecessary braking.That means better braking andlonger brake life.

If the engine ever stops while thevehicle is being driven, brakenormally but do not pump thebrakes. If the brakes are pumped,the pedal could get harder to pushdown. If the engine stops, there will

still be some power brake assist butit will be used when the brake isapplied. Once the power assist isused up, it can take longer to stopand the brake pedal will be harderto push.

Adding non‐dealer accessories canaffect vehicle performance. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10‑3.

Steering

Power Steering

If power steering assist is lostbecause the engine stops or thepower steering system is notfunctioning, the vehicle can besteered but it will take more effort.

Speed Variable Assist Steering

Some vehicles have a steeringsystem that varies the amount ofeffort required to steer the vehicle inrelation to the speed of the vehicle.

The amount of steering effortrequired is less at slower speedsto make the vehicle moremaneuverable and easier to park.At faster speeds, the steering effortincreases to provide a sport-like feelto the steering. This providesmaximum control and stability.

If the vehicle seems harder to steerthan normal when parking or drivingslowly, there may be a problem with the system. You will still havepower steering, but steering will bestiffer than normal at slow speeds.See your dealer for service.


Steering Tips

It is important to take curves at areasonable speed.

Traction in a curve depends on thecondition of the tires and the roadsurface, the angle at which thecurve is banked, and vehicle speed.While in a curve, speed is the onefactor that can be controlled.

If there is a need to reduce speed,do it before entering the curve,while the front wheels are straight.

Try to adjust the speed so you candrive through the curve. Maintain areasonable, steady speed. Wait toaccelerate until out of the curve, andthen accelerate gently into thestraightaway.

Steering in Emergencies

There are times when steering canbe more effective than braking.For example, you come over a hilland find a truck stopped in yourlane, or a car suddenly pulls outfrom nowhere, or a child darts outfrom between parked cars and stopsright in front of you. These problemscan be avoided by braking— if youcan stop in time. But sometimes youcannot stop in time because thereis no room. That is the time forevasive action— steering aroundthe problem.

The vehicle can perform very well inemergencies like these. First applythe brakes. See Braking onpage 9‑3 . It is better to remove asmuch speed as possible from acollision. Then steer around theproblem, to the left or rightdepending on the space available.

An emergency like this requiresclose attention and a quick decision.If holding the steering wheel at therecommended 9 and 3 o'clockpositions, it can be turned a full180 degrees very quickly withoutremoving either hand. But you haveto act fast, steer quickly, and just asquickly straighten the wheel onceyou have avoided the object.

The fact that such emergencysituations are always possible is agood reason to practice defensivedriving at all times and wear safetybelts properly.


Off-Road RecoveryThe vehicle's right wheels can dropoff the edge of a road onto theshoulder while driving.

If the level of the shoulder is onlyslightly below the pavement,recovery should be fairly easy. Easeoff the accelerator and then, if thereis nothing in the way, steer so thatthe vehicle straddles the edge of thepavement. Turn the steering wheel8 to 13 cm (3 to 5 inches), aboutone-eighth turn, until the right front

tire contacts the pavement edge.Then turn the steering wheel to gostraight down the roadway.

Loss of ControlLet us review what driving expertssay about what happens when thethree control systems— brakes,steering, and acceleration— do nothave enough friction where the tiresmeet the road to do what the driverhas asked.

In any emergency, do not give up.Keep trying to steer and constantlyseek an escape route or area ofless danger.

Skidding

In a skid, a driver can lose control ofthe vehicle. Defensive drivers avoidmost skids by taking reasonablecare suited to existing conditions,and by not overdriving thoseconditions. But skids are alwayspossible.

The three types of skids correspondto the vehicle's three controlsystems. In the braking skid, thewheels are not rolling. In thesteering or cornering skid, too muchspeed or steering in a curve causestires to slip and lose cornering force.And in the acceleration skid, toomuch throttle causes the drivingwheels to spin.

If the vehicle starts to slide, easeyour foot off the accelerator pedaland quickly steer the way you wantthe vehicle to go. If you startsteering quickly enough, the vehiclemay straighten out. Always be readyfor a second skid if it occurs.

Of course, traction is reduced whenwater, snow, ice, gravel, or othermaterial is on the road. For safety,slow down and adjust your driving tothese conditions. It is important toslow down on slippery surfacesbecause stopping distance is longerand vehicle control more limited.


While driving on a surface withreduced traction, try to avoidsudden steering, acceleration,or braking, including reducingvehicle speed by shifting to a lowergear. Any sudden changes couldcause the tires to slide. You mightnot realize the surface is slipperyuntil the vehicle is skidding. Learn torecognize warning clues— such asenough water, ice, or packed snowon the road to make a mirroredsurface— and slow down when youhave any doubt.

Remember: Antilock brakes helpavoid only the braking skid.

Driving on Wet RoadsRain and wet roads can reducevehicle traction and affect yourability to stop and accelerate.Always drive slower in these typesof driving conditions and avoiddriving through large puddles anddeep‐standing or flowing water.

{ WARNING

Wet brakes can cause crashes.They might not work as well in aquick stop and could causepulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a largepuddle of water or a car/vehiclewash, lightly apply the brakepedal until the brakes worknormally.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Flowing or rushing water createsstrong forces. Driving throughflowing water could cause yourvehicle to be carried away. If thishappens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do notignore police warnings and bevery cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.

Hydroplaning

Hydroplaning is dangerous. Watercan build up under your vehicle'stires so they actually ride on thewater. This can happen if the road iswet enough and you are going fastenough. When your vehicle ishydroplaning, it has little or nocontact with the road.

There is no hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is toslow down when the road is wet.


Other Rainy Weather Tips

Besides slowing down, other wetweather driving tips include:. Allow extra following distance.. Pass with caution.. Keep windshield wiping

equipment in good shape.. Keep the windshield washer fluid

reservoir filled.. Have good tires with proper

tread depth. See Tires onpage 10‑38.

. Turn off cruise control.

Highway HypnosisAlways be alert and pay attention toyour surroundings while driving.If you become tired or sleepy, find asafe place to park your vehicleand rest.

Other driving tips include:. Keep the vehicle well ventilated.. Keep interior temperature cool.. Keep your eyes moving — scan

the road ahead and to the sides.. Check the rearview mirror and

vehicle instruments often.

Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or throughmountains is different than drivingon flat or rolling terrain. Tips fordriving in these conditions include:. Keep the vehicle serviced and in

good shape.. Check all fluid levels and brakes,

tires, cooling system, andtransmission.

. Shift to a lower gear when goingdown steep or long hills.

{ WARNING

If you do not shift down, thebrakes could get so hot that theywould not work well. You wouldthen have poor braking or evennone going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let the engineassist the brakes on a steepdownhill slope.


{ WARNING

Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)or with the ignition off isdangerous. The brakes will haveto do all the work of slowing downand they could get so hot thatthey would not work well. Youwould then have poor braking oreven none going down a hill. Youcould crash. Always have theengine running and the vehicle ingear when going downhill.

. Stay in your own lane. Do notswing wide or cut across thecenter of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in yourown lane.

. Top of hills: Be alert —something could be in yourlane (stalled car, accident).

. Pay attention to special roadsigns (falling rocks area, windingroads, long grades, passing orno-passing zones) and takeappropriate action.

Winter Driving

Driving on Snow or Ice

Drive carefully when there is snowor ice between the tires and theroad, creating less traction or grip.Wet ice can occur at about 0°C(32°F) when freezing rain begins tofall, resulting in even less traction.Avoid driving on wet ice or infreezing rain until roads can betreated with salt or sand.

Drive with caution, whatever thecondition. Accelerate gently sotraction is not lost. Accelerating tooquickly causes the wheels to spinand makes the surface under thetires slick, so there is even lesstraction.

Try not to break the fragile traction.If you accelerate too fast, the drivewheels will spin and polish thesurface under the tires even more.

The Antilock Brake System (ABS)on page 9‑28 improves vehiclestability during hard stops onslippery roads, but apply the brakessooner than when on dry pavement.

Allow greater following distance onany slippery road and watch forslippery spots. Icy patches canoccur on otherwise clear roads inshaded areas. The surface of acurve or an overpass can remain icywhen the surrounding roads areclear. Avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers and braking whileon ice.

Turn off cruise control, if equipped,on slippery surfaces.


Blizzard Conditions

Being stuck in snow can be in aserious situation. Stay with thevehicle unless there is help nearby.If possible, use the RoadsideAssistance Program on page 13‑5.To get help and keep everyone inthe vehicle safe:. Turn on the hazard warning

flashers.. Tie a red cloth to an outside

mirror.

{ WARNING

Snow can trap engine exhaustunder the vehicle. This maycause exhaust gases to getinside. Engine exhaust containsCarbon Monoxide (CO) whichcannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousnessand even death.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:. Clear away snow from aroundthe base of your vehicle,especially any that is blockingthe exhaust pipe.

. Check again from time totime to be sure snow doesnot collect there.

. Open a window about 5 cm(2 in) on the side of thevehicle that is away from thewind to bring in fresh air.

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

. Adjust the climate controlsystem to a setting thatcirculates the air inside thevehicle and set the fanspeed to the highest setting.See Climate Control Systemin the Index.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑23.

Snow can trap exhaust gasesunder your vehicle. This cancause deadly CO (CarbonMonoxide) gas to get inside.CO could overcome you and killyou. You cannot see it or smell it,so you might not know it is in yourvehicle. Clear away snow fromaround the base of your vehicle,especially any that is blocking theexhaust.

Run the engine for short periodsonly as needed to keep warm, butbe careful.


To save fuel, run the engine for onlyshort periods as needed to warmthe vehicle and then shut the engineoff and close the window most ofthe way to save heat. Repeat thisuntil help arrives but only when youfeel really uncomfortable from thecold. Moving about to keep warmalso helps.

If it takes some time for help toarrive, now and then when you runthe engine, push the acceleratorpedal slightly so the engine runsfaster than the idle speed. Thiskeeps the battery charged to restartthe vehicle and to signal for helpwith the headlamps. Do this as littleas possible to save fuel.

If the Vehicle is StuckSlowly and cautiously spin thewheels to free the vehicle whenstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.

If stuck too severely for the tractionsystem to free the vehicle, turn thetraction system off and use therocking method.

{ WARNING

If the vehicle's tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, andyou or others could be injured.The vehicle can overheat,causing an engine compartmentfire or other damage. Spin thewheels as little as possible andavoid going above 55 km/h(35 mph) as shown on thespeedometer.

For information about using tirechains on the vehicle, see TireChains on page 10‑59.

Rocking the Vehicle toGet it Out

Turn the steering wheel left andright to clear the area around thefront wheels. Turn off any tractionsystem. Shift back and forthbetween R (Reverse) and a forwardgear, or with a manual transmission,between 1 (First) or 2 (Second) andR (Reverse), spinning the wheelsas little as possible. To preventtransmission wear, wait until thewheels stop spinning before shiftinggears. Release the acceleratorpedal while shifting, and presslightly on the accelerator pedalwhen the transmission is in gear.Slowly spinning the wheels in theforward and reverse directionscauses a rocking motion that couldfree the vehicle. If that does not getthe vehicle out after a few tries, itmight need to be towed out. If thevehicle does need to be towedout, see Towing the Vehicle onpage 10‑71.


Vehicle Load LimitsIt is very important to know howmuch weight the vehicle cancarry. This weight is called thevehicle capacity weight andincludes the weight of alloccupants, cargo and allnonfactory‐installed options.Two labels on the vehicle showhow much weight it mayproperly carry, the Tire andLoading Information label andthe Certification label.

{ WARNING

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).If you do, parts on the vehiclecan break, and it can changethe way the vehicle handles.These could cause you tolose control and crash. Also,overloading can shorten thelife of the vehicle.

Tire and Loading InformationLabel

Label Example

A vehicle-specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to the vehicle's centerpillar (B-pillar). With the driverdoor open, you will find the labelattached below the door lockpost. The Tire and LoadingInformation label shows the


number of occupant seatingpositions (A), and the maximumvehicle capacity weight (B) inkilograms and pounds.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label also showsthe tire size of the originalequipment tires (C) and therecommended cold tire inflationpressures (D). For moreinformation on tires and inflationsee Tires on page 10‑38 and TirePressure on page 10‑46 .

There is also important loadinginformation on the Certificationlabel. It tells you the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)and the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) for the front andrear axle. See “CertificationLabel” later in this section.

Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit

1. Locate the statement“The combined weight ofoccupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX kg orXXX lbs” on your vehicle'splacard.

2. Determine the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers from XXX kg orXXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equalsthe available amount of cargoand luggage load capacity.For example, if the “XXX”amount equals 1400 lbs andthere will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle,

the amount of available cargoand luggage load capacity is650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150)= 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combinedweight of luggage and cargobeing loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safelyexceed the available cargoand luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towinga trailer, the load from yourtrailer will be transferred toyour vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine how thisreduces the available cargoand luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle.

This vehicle is neither designednor intended to tow a trailer.


Example 1

A. Vehicle Capacity Weight forExample 1 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs).

B. Subtract Occupant Weight@ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 =136 kg (300 lbs).

C. Available Occupant andCargo Weight = 317 kg(700 lbs).

Example 2


B. Subtract Occupant Weight@ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 =340 kg (750 lbs).

C. Available Cargo Weight =113 kg (250 lbs).

Example 3


B. Subtract Occupant Weight@ 91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 =453 kg (1,000 lbs).

C. Available Cargo Weight =0 kg (0 lbs).


Refer to the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information label forspecific information about thevehicle's capacity weight andseating positions. The combinedweight of the driver, passengers,and cargo should never exceedthe vehicle's capacity weight.

Certification Label

Label Example

A vehicle-specific Certificationlabel is attached to the driverside center pillar (B-pillar).The label tells the gross weightcapacity of the vehicle, calledthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR). The GVWR includesthe weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, fuel, and cargo.Never exceed the GVWR forthe vehicle, or the Gross AxleWeight Rating (GAWR) for eitherthe front or rear axle.

And, if there is a heavy load,it should be spread out.See “Steps for DeterminingCorrect Load Limit” earlier inthis section.

{ WARNING

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).If you do, parts on the vehiclecan break, and it can changethe way the vehicle handles.These could cause you tolose control and crash. Also,overloading can shorten thelife of the vehicle.


If you put things inside thevehicle— like suitcases, tools,packages, or anythingelse— they will go as fast as thevehicle goes. If you have to stopor turn quickly, or if there is acrash, they will keep going.

{ WARNING

Things you put inside thevehicle can strike and injurepeople in a sudden stop orturn, or in a crash.

. Put things in the cargoarea of the vehicle. In thecargo area, put them asfar forward as you can.Try to spread the weightevenly.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Never stack heavierthings, like suitcases,inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are abovethe tops of the seats.

. Do not leave anunsecured child restraintin the vehicle.

. When you carry somethinginside the vehicle, secureit whenever you can.

. Do not leave a seat foldeddown unless you need to.

Starting andOperating

New Vehicle Break-InNotice: The vehicle does notneed an elaborate break-in. But itwill perform better in the long runif you follow these guidelines:. Do not drive at any oneconstant speed, fast orslow, for the first 805 km(500miles). Do not makefull-throttle starts. Avoiddownshifting to brake orslow the vehicle.

. Avoid making hard stops forthe first 322 km (200miles) orso. During this time the newbrake linings are not yetbroken in. Hard stops withnew linings can meanpremature wear and earlierreplacement. Follow thisbreaking-in guideline everytime you get new brakelinings.


Following break‐in, engine speedand load can be graduallyincreased.

Ignition Positions

The ignition switch has four differentpositions.

Notice: Using a tool to force thekey to turn in the ignition couldcause damage to the switch orbreak the key. Use the correctkey, make sure it is all the way in,and turn it only with your hand.If the key cannot be turned byhand, see your dealer.

To shift out of P (Park), turn theignition to ON/RUN and apply thebrake pedal.

A (STOPPING THE ENGINE/LOCK/OFF): When the vehicle isstopped, turn the ignition switch toLOCK/OFF to turn the engine off.Retained Accessory Power (RAP)will remain active. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) onpage 9‑18 for more information.

This is the only position from whichthe key can be removed. This locksthe steering wheel, ignition, andautomatic transmission.

Do not turn the engine off when thevehicle is moving. This will cause aloss of power assist in the brakeand steering systems and disablethe airbags.

In an emergency:

1. Brake using a firm and steadypressure. Do not pump thebrakes repeatedly. This maydeplete power assist, requiringincreased brake pedal force.

2. Shift the vehicle to neutral.This can be done while thevehicle is moving. After shiftingto neutral, firmly apply thebrakes and steer the vehicle toa safe location.

3. Come to a complete stop, shiftto P (Park), and turn the ignitionto LOCK/OFF. On vehicles withan automatic transmission, theshift lever must be in P (Park) toturn the ignition switch to theLOCK/OFF position.

4. Set the parking brake. SeeParking Brake on page 9‑29.

The ignition switch can bind in theLOCK/OFF position with the wheelsturned off center. If this happens,move the steering wheel from rightto left while turning the key toACC/ACCESSORY. If this does notwork, then the vehicle needsservice.


B (ACC/ACCESSORY): Thisposition unlocks the steering wheel.Some accessories can used in thisposition.

C (ON/RUN): The ignition switchstays in this position when theengine is running. This position canbe used to operate the electricalaccessories, as well as to displaysome warning and indicator lights.

The battery could be drained if thekey is left in the ON/RUN positionwith the engine off. The vehiclemight not start if the battery isallowed to drain for an extendedperiod of time.

D (START): This position starts theengine. When the engine starts,release the key. The ignition switchwill return to ON/RUN for normaldriving.

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP)These vehicle accessories can beused for up to 10 minutes after theengine is turned off:. Audio System. Power Windows. Sunroof (if equipped). Auxiliary Power Outlet

Power to the audio system willcontinue to operate for up to10 minutes or until the driver door isopened.

Power to the power windows andsunroof will continue to operate forup to 10 minutes or until any door isopened.

All these features will work whenthe ignition is in ON/RUN orACC/ACCESSORY.

Starting the EngineMove the shift lever to P (Park) orN (Neutral). The engine will not startin any other position. To restart thevehicle when it is already moving,use N (Neutral) only.

Notice: Do not try to shift toP (Park) if the vehicle is moving.If you do, you could damage thetransmission. Shift to P (Park)only when the vehicle is stopped.

Starting Procedure

1. With your foot off the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition key toSTART. When the engine starts,let go of the key. The idle speedwill go down as the enginewarms. Do not race the engineimmediately after starting it.Allow the oil to warm up andlubricate all moving parts.


The vehicle has aComputer-Controlled CrankingSystem. This feature assists instarting the engine and protectscomponents. If the ignition key isturned to the START position,and then released when theengine begins cranking, theengine will continue cranking fora few seconds or until thevehicle starts. If the engine doesnot start and the key is held inSTART for many seconds,cranking stops after 15 secondsto prevent cranking motordamage. To prevent geardamage, this system alsoprevents cranking if the engineis already running. Enginecranking can be stopped byturning the ignition switch toACC/ACCESSORY orLOCK/OFF.

Notice: Cranking the engine forlong periods of time, by returningthe key to the START positionimmediately after cranking hasended, can overheat and damage

the cranking motor, and drain thebattery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to let thecranking motor cool down.

2. If the engine does not start after5 to 10 seconds, especially invery cold weather (below −18°Cor 0°F), it could be flooded withtoo much gasoline. Push theaccelerator pedal all the way tothe floor and hold it there as youhold the key in START for amaximum of 15 seconds. Wait atleast 15 seconds between eachtry, to allow the cranking motorto cool. When the engine starts,let go of the key and accelerator.If the vehicle starts briefly butthen stops again, repeat theprocedure. This clears theextra gasoline from the engine.Do not race the engineimmediately after starting it.Operate the engine andtransmission gently until the oilwarms up and lubricates allmoving parts.

Notice: The engine is designed towork with the electronics in thevehicle. If you add electrical partsor accessories, you could changethe way the engine operates.Before adding electricalequipment, check with yourdealer. If you do not, the enginemight not perform properly.Any resulting damage wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Overrun Cut‐Off

When the vehicle is driven with agear engaged but the acceleratorreleased, the fuel supply isautomatically cut off to improvefuel economy.


Engine HeaterThe engine coolant heater,if available, can help in cold weatherconditions at or below −18°C (0°F)for easier starting and better fueleconomy during engine warm-up.Plug in the coolant heater at leastfour hours before starting thevehicle. An internal thermostat inthe plug-end of the cord will preventengine coolant heater operation attemperatures above −18°C (0°F).

To Use The Engine CoolantHeater

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap theelectrical cord.

The electrical cord is located onthe passenger side of the enginecompartment, between thefender and the air cleaner.

3. Plug it into a normal, grounded110-volt AC outlet.

{ WARNING

Plugging the cord into anungrounded outlet could cause anelectrical shock. Also, the wrongkind of extension cord couldoverheat and cause a fire. Youcould be seriously injured. Plugthe cord into a properly groundedthree-prong 110-voltAC outlet. If the cord will notreach, use a heavy-dutythree-prong extension cordrated for at least 15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, besure to unplug and store thecord as it was before to keep itaway from moving engine parts.

The length of time the heater shouldremain plugged in depends onseveral factors. Ask a dealer in thearea where you will be parking thevehicle for the best advice on this.


Shifting Into Park

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to get out ofthe vehicle if the shift lever is notfully in P (Park) with the parkingbrake firmly set. The vehicle canroll. If you have left the enginerunning, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure the vehicle willnot move, even when you are onfairly level ground, use the stepsthat follow.

Use this procedure to shift intoP (Park):

1. Hold the brake pedal down andset the parking brake.

See Parking Brake onpage 9‑29 for more information.

2. Hold the button on the shift leverand push the lever toward thefront of the vehicle into P (Park).

3. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.

4. Remove the key.

Leaving the Vehicle With theEngine Running

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to leave thevehicle with the engine running.The vehicle could move suddenlyif the shift lever is not fully inP (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. And, if you leave thevehicle with the engine running,it could overheat and even catchfire. You or others could beinjured. Do not leave the vehiclewith the engine running.

If you have to leave the vehicle withthe engine running, the vehicle mustbe in P (Park) and the parkingbrake set.

Release the button and check thatthe shift lever cannot be moved outof P (Park).

Torque Lock

Torque lock is when the weightof the vehicle puts too much forceon the parking pawl in thetransmission. This happens whenparking on a hill and shifting thetransmission into P (Park) is notdone properly and then it is difficultto shift out of P (Park). To preventtorque lock, set the parking brakeand then shift into P (Park). To findout how, see “Shifting Into Park”listed previously.

If torque lock does occur, thevehicle may need to be pusheduphill by another vehicle to relievethe parking pawl pressure, so youcan shift out of P (Park).


Shifting Out of ParkThis vehicle is equipped with anelectronic shift lock release system.The shift lock release isdesigned to:. Prevent ignition key removal

unless the shift lever is inP (Park) with the shift leverbutton fully released.

. Prevent movement of the shiftlever out of P (Park), unless theignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY and the brakepedal is applied.

The shift lock release is alwaysfunctional except in the case of anuncharged or low voltage (less than9 volt) battery.

If the vehicle has an unchargedbattery or a battery with low voltage,try charging or jump starting thebattery. See Jump Starting onpage 10‑68.

To shift out of P (Park):

1. Apply the brake pedal.

2. Press the shift lever button.

3. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If still unable to shift out of P (Park):

1. Fully release the shift leverbutton.

2. Hold the brake pedal down andpress the shift lever buttonagain.

3. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you still cannot move the shiftlever from P (Park), consult yourdealer or a professional towingservice.

Parking Over ThingsThat Burn

{ WARNING

Things that can burn could touchhot exhaust parts under thevehicle and ignite. Do not parkover papers, leaves, dry grass,or other things that can burn.


Engine Exhaust

{ WARNING

Engine exhaust contains CarbonMonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. Exposure to COcan cause unconsciousness andeven death.

Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:. The vehicle idles in areaswith poor ventilation (parkinggarages, tunnels, deep snowthat may block underbodyairflow or tail pipes).

. The exhaust smells orsounds strange or different.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. The exhaust system leaksdue to corrosion or damage.

. The vehicle’s exhaust systemhas been modified, damagedor improperly repaired.

. There are holes or openingsin the vehicle body fromdamage or after-marketmodifications that are notcompletely sealed.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

If unusual fumes are detected orif it is suspected that exhaust iscoming into the vehicle:

. Drive it only with the windowscompletely down.

. Have the vehicle repairedimmediately.

Never park the vehicle with theengine running in an enclosedarea such as a garage or abuilding that has no fresh airventilation.


Running the VehicleWhile ParkedIt is better not to park with theengine running. But if you ever haveto, here are some things to know.

{ WARNING

Idling a vehicle in an enclosedarea with poor ventilation isdangerous. Engine exhaust mayenter the vehicle. Engine exhaustcontains Carbon Monoxide (CO)which cannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousnessand even death. Never run theengine in an enclosed area thathas no fresh air ventilation.For more information, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑23.

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to get outof the vehicle if the automatictransmission shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running unless youhave to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenit is on fairly level ground, alwaysset the parking brake and movethe automatic transmission shiftlever to P (Park), or the manualtransmission shift lever to Neutral.

Follow the proper steps to be surethe vehicle will not move. If thevehicle has an automatictransmission, see Shifting Into Parkon page 9‑21.

AutomaticTransmissionThe automatic transmission has ashift lever located on the consolebetween the seats.

The mode or selected gear is shownin the instrument cluster.


P (Park): This position locks thedrive wheels. It is the best positionto use when starting the enginebecause the vehicle cannot moveeasily.

{ WARNING

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running unless youhave to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park onpage 9‑21.

Make sure the shift lever is fully inP (Park) before starting the engine.The vehicle has an automatictransmission shift lock controlsystem. The regular brake must befully applied first and then the shiftlever button pressed before shiftingfrom P (Park) when the ignition keyis in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift outof P (Park), ease pressure on theshift lever, then push the shift lever

all the way into P (Park) as youmaintain brake application. Thenpress the shift lever button andmove the shift lever into anothergear. See Shifting Out of Park onpage 9‑22.

Without the brake pedal applied, thecontrol indicator will be on.

If the shift lever is not in P (Park)when the ignition is turned to OFF,the control indicator and P will flash.


R (Reverse): Use this gear toback up.

Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)while the vehicle is movingforward could damage thetransmission. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Shift to R (Reverse) onlyafter the vehicle is stopped.

To rock the vehicle back and forth toget out of snow, ice or sand withoutdamaging the transmission, seeIf the Vehicle is Stuck on page 9‑11.

N (Neutral): In this position, theengine does not connect with thewheels. To restart the engine whenthe vehicle is already moving, useN (Neutral) only with the brake pedalapplied.

The vehicle has an automaticneutral shift feature which allows thetransmission to automatically shiftto N (Neutral) when the vehicle isstopped with a forward gear

engaged and the brake pedalapplied. The reduced load on theengine improves vehicle fueleconomy.

{ WARNING

Shifting into a drive gear while theengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot isfirmly on the brake pedal, thevehicle could move very rapidly.You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shiftinto a drive gear while the engineis running at high speed.

Notice: Shifting out of P (Park)or N (Neutral) with the enginerunning at high speed maydamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Be sure theengine is not running at highspeed when shifting the vehicle.

D (Drive): This position is fornormal driving. It provides the bestfuel economy. If more power isneeded for passing, and thevehicle is:. Going less than 56 km/h

(35 mph), push the acceleratorpedal about halfway down.

. Going about 56 km/h (35 mph) ormore, push the accelerator allthe way down.

Notice: If the vehicle seems toaccelerate slowly or not shiftgears when you go faster, andyou continue to drive the vehiclethat way, you could damage thetransmission. Have the vehicleserviced right away.


Manual Mode

Driver Shift Control (DSC)

Notice: If you drive the vehicle athigh RPMs without upshiftingwhile using Driver Shift Control(DSC), you could damage thevehicle. Always upshift whennecessary while using DSC.

Driver Shift Control (DSC) allowsyou to shift an automatictransmission similar to a manualtransmission. To use the DSCfeature:

1. Move the shift lever to the leftfrom D (Drive) into the side gatemarked with a (+) and (−).

2. Press the shift lever forward toupshift or rearward to downshift.

While using the DSC feature, thevehicle will have firmer, quickershifting. You can use this for sportdriving or when climbing ordescending hills, to stay in gearlonger, or to downshift for morepower or engine braking.

The transmission will only allowyou to shift into gears appropriatefor the vehicle speed and engineRevolutions Per Minute (RPM).

The transmission will notautomatically shift to the next lowergear if the engine RPM is too high,nor to the next higher gear when themaximum engine RPM is reached.

While in the DSC mode, thetransmission will automaticallydownshift when the vehicle comesto a stop. This will allow for morepower during take-off.

When accelerating the vehicle froma stop in snowy and icy conditions,you may want to shift into secondgear. A higher gear allows thevehicle to gain more traction onslippery surfaces.


Brakes

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS)This vehicle has the Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS), an advancedelectronic braking system that helpsprevent a braking skid.

When the engine is started and thevehicle begins to drive away, ABSchecks itself. A momentary motor orclicking noise might be heard whilethis test is going on, and it mighteven be noticed that the brakepedal moves a little. This is normal.

If there is a problem with ABS, thiswarning light stays on. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) Warning Lighton page 5‑16.

If driving safely on a wet road and itbecomes necessary to slam on thebrakes and continue braking toavoid a sudden obstacle, acomputer senses that the wheelsare slowing down. If one of thewheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work thebrakes at each wheel.

ABS can change the brake pressureto each wheel, as required, fasterthan any driver could. This can helpthe driver steer around the obstaclewhile braking hard.

As the brakes are applied, thecomputer keeps receiving updateson wheel speed and controlsbraking pressure accordingly.

Remember: ABS does not changethe time needed to get a foot up tothe brake pedal or always decreasestopping distance. If you get tooclose to the vehicle in front of you,there will not be enough time toapply the brakes if that vehicle

suddenly slows or stops. Alwaysleave enough room up ahead tostop, even with ABS.

Using ABS

Do not pump the brakes. Just holdthe brake pedal down firmly and letABS work. You might hear the ABSpump or motor operating and feelthe brake pedal pulsate, but this isnormal.

Braking in Emergencies

ABS allows the driver to steer andbrake at the same time. In manyemergencies, steering can helpmore than even the very bestbraking.


Parking Brake

The vehicle has an Electric ParkingBrake (EPB). The switch for theEPB is on the center console. TheEPB can always be activated, evenif the ignition is OFF. To preventdraining the battery, avoid repeatedcycles of the EPB system when theengine is not running.

The system has a park brake statuslight and a park brake warning light.See Electric Parking Brake Light onpage 5‑15. There are also three

Driver Information Center (DIC)messages. See Brake SystemMessages on page 5‑24 for moreinformation. In case of insufficientelectrical power, the EPB cannot beapplied or released.

Before leaving the vehicle, checkthe park brake status lamp toensure that the park brake isapplied.

EPB Apply

The EPB can be applied any timethe vehicle is stopped. The EPB isapplied by momentarily lifting up onthe EPB switch. Once fully applied,the park brake status light will beon. While the brake is being applied,the status lamp will flash until it isfully applied. If the light does notcome on, or remains flashing, youneed to have the vehicle serviced.Do not drive the vehicle if the parkbrake status light is flashing. Seeyour dealer. See Electric ParkingBrake Light on page 5‑15 for moreinformation.

If the EPB is applied while thevehicle is in motion, a chime willsound, and the DIC messageRELEASE PARK BRAKE SWITCHwill be displayed. The vehicle willdecelerate as long as the switch isheld in the up position. Releasingthe EPB switch during decelerationwill release the parking brake. If theswitch is held in the up position untilthe vehicle comes to a stop, theEPB will remain applied.

If the park brake status light flashescontinuously, the EPB is onlypartially applied or released,or there is a problem with the EPB.The DIC message SERVICEPARKING BRAKE will be displayed.If this light flashes continuously,release the EPB, and attempt toapply it again. If this light continuesto flash, do not drive the vehicle.See your dealer.


If the park brake warning light is on,the EPB has detected an error inanother system and is operatingwith reduced functionality. To applythe EPB when this light is on, lift upon the EPB switch and hold it in theup position. Full application of theparking brake by the EPB systemmay take a longer period of timethan normal when this light is on.Continue to hold the switch until thepark brake status light remains on.If the park brake warning light is on,see your dealer.

If the EPB fails to apply, the rearwheels should be blocked toprevent vehicle movement.

EPB Release

To release the EPB, place theignition in the ON/RUN position,apply and hold the brake pedal,and push down momentarily on theEPB switch. If you attempt torelease the EPB without the brakepedal applied, a chime will sound,and the DIC message PRESSBRAKE PEDAL TO RELEASEPARK BRAKE will be displayed.The EPB is released when the parkbrake status light is off.

If the park brake warning light is on,the EPB has detected an error inanother system and is operatingwith reduced functionality. Torelease the EPB when this light ison, push down on the EPB switchand hold it in the down position.EPB release may take a longerperiod of time than normal when thislight is on. Continue to hold theswitch until the park brake statuslight is off. If the light is on, see yourdealer.

Notice: Driving with the parkingbrake on can overheat the brakesystem and cause prematurewear or damage to brake systemparts. Make sure that the parkingbrake is fully released and thebrake warning light is off beforedriving.

Automatic EPB Release

The EPB will automatically release ifthe vehicle is running, placed intogear and an attempt is made todrive away. Avoid rapid accelerationwhen the EPB is applied, topreserve park brake lining life.

For maximum EPB force whenparking on a hill, pull the EPBswitch twice.


Brake AssistThis vehicle has a brake assistfeature designed to assist the driverin stopping or decreasing vehiclespeed in emergency drivingconditions. This feature uses thestability system hydraulic brakecontrol module to supplement thepower brake system underconditions where the driver hasquickly and forcefully applied thebrake pedal in an attempt to quicklystop or slow down the vehicle.The stability system hydraulic brakecontrol module increases brakepressure at each corner of thevehicle until the ABS activates.Minor brake pedal pulsation orpedal movement during this time isnormal and the driver shouldcontinue to apply the brake pedalas the driving situation dictates.The brake assist feature willautomatically disengage when thebrake pedal is released or brakepedal pressure is quicklydecreased.

Hill Start Assist (HSA)Some vehicles have a Hill StartAssist (HSA) feature, which may beuseful when the vehicle is stoppedon a grade. This feature is designedto prevent the vehicle from rolling,either forward or rearward, duringvehicle drive off. After drivercompletely stops and holds thevehicle in a complete standstill on agrade, HSA will be automaticallyactivated. During the transitionperiod between when the driverreleases the brake pedal and startsto accelerate to drive off on a grade,HSA holds the braking pressure toensure that there is no rolling back.The brakes will automaticallyrelease when the accelerator pedalis applied within the two secondwindow. It will not activate if thevehicle is in a drive gear and facingdownhill or if the vehicle is facinguphill and in R (Reverse).

Ride Control Systems

Traction ControlSystem (TCS)The vehicle may have a TractionControl System (TCS) that limitswheel slip. The system operates if itsenses that one or both of the frontwheels are slipping or beginning tolose traction. When this happens,the system reduces engine powerand/or applies brake pressure to theslipping wheel(s).

The system may be heard or feltwhile it is working, but this isnormal.

TCS automatically comes onwhenever the vehicle is started.To limit wheel slip, especially inslippery road conditions, the systemshould always be left on. But, TCScan be turned off if needed.


d flashes to indicate that thetraction control system is active.See Electronic Stability Control(ESC)/Traction Control System(TCS) Indicator/Warning Light onpage 5‑17 for more information.

If there is a problem detected withTCS, Service Traction Control isdisplayed on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See Ride ControlSystem Messages on page 5‑27.When this message is displayedand d comes on and stays on,the vehicle is safe to drive but thesystem is not operational. Drivingshould be adjusted accordingly.

If d comes on and stays on, resetthe system by:

1. Stopping the vehicle.

2. Turning the engine off andwaiting 15 seconds.

3. Starting the engine.

If d still comes on and stays on,the vehicle needs service.

Notice: Do not repeatedly brakeor accelerate heavily when TCS isoff. The vehicle's driveline couldbe damaged.

TCS can be turned off by pressingand releasing d. When TCS is

turned off, i comes on and thesystem does not limit wheel slip.

Driving should be adjustedaccordingly. See Traction Off Lighton page 5‑16 for more information.

Press and release d again to turnthe system back on.

It may be necessary to turn thesystem off if the vehicle gets stuckin sand, mud, or snow and rockingthe vehicle is required. See If theVehicle is Stuck on page 9‑11 formore information. See also WinterDriving on page 9‑9 forinformation on using TCS whendriving in snowy or icy conditions.

Adding non‐GM accessories canaffect the vehicle's performance.See Accessories and Modificationson page 10‑3 for more information.


Electronic StabilityControl (ESC)The vehicle may have a vehiclestability enhancement system calledStabiliTrak®. It is an advancedcomputer-controlled system thatassists with directional control of thevehicle in difficult driving conditions.

StabiliTrak activates when there is adifference between the intendedpath and the direction the vehicle isactually traveling. StabiliTrakselectively applies braking pressureto the vehicle's brakes to help steerthe vehicle in the intended direction.

StabiliTrak comes on automaticallywhenever the vehicle is started.To assist with directional control ofthe vehicle, the system shouldalways be left on.

When StabiliTrak activates,d flashes on the instrument panel.A noise may be heard or vibrationmay be felt in the brake pedal.This is normal. Continue to steer thevehicle in the intended direction.See Electronic Stability Control(ESC)/Traction Control System(TCS) Indicator/Warning Light onpage 5‑17 for more information.

If a problem is detected withStabiliTrak, Service StabiliTrak isdisplayed on the Driver Information

Center (DIC). See Ride ControlSystem Messages on page 5‑27.When this message is displayedand d comes on and stays on,the vehicle is safe to drive but thesystem is not operational. Drivingshould be adjusted accordingly.

If d comes on and stays on, resetthe system by:

1. Stopping the vehicle.

2. Turning the engine off andwaiting 15 seconds.

3. Starting the engine.

If d still comes on and stays on, thevehicle needs service.


. To turn off both StabiliTrak andTCS, press and hold d, locatedon the instrument panel, untilg illuminates and the appropriateDIC message is displayed. SeeRide Control System Messageson page 5‑27.

When StabiliTrak is turned off,the system will not assist withdirectional control of the vehicleor limit wheel spin. Drivingshould be adjusted accordingly.See Electronic Stability Control(ESC) Off Light on page 5‑17for more information.

. Press and release d again toturn the system back on.

If cruise control is being used whenStabiliTrak activates, cruise controlwill automatically disengage. Pressthe cruise control button toreengage when road conditionsallow. See Cruise Control onpage 9‑36 for more information.

Interactive Drive ControlSystem

The vehicle may have theInteractive Drive Control System(IDCS). IDCS adapts to the drivingstyle and preference of the driverwithin one of three driving modes:

Standard: Use for normal city andhighway driving. This settingprovides precise, comfortablehandling. This is a fully automaticmode for city and highway driving.


TOUR: Use for long-distancehighway driving. This settingprovides a smooth, soft ride. Pressand release the TOUR button andthe light on the button comes on.This mode provides a comfortable,smooth ride. Press the button againand the system returns to theStandard mode.

SPORT: Use where road conditionsor personal preference demandmore control. This setting providesresponsive, controlled handling.Press and release the SPORTbutton. The light on the buttoncomes on, and the appropriatemessage displays on the DIC. Pressthe button again. The systemreturns to the Standard mode andthe appropriate message displayson the DIC.

IDCS automatically comes on in theStandard mode when the vehicle isstarted. When the Sport and Tourmodes are turned off, the systemreturns to the Standard mode.

Standard mode. The shock absorbers allow a

normal ride.. The engine reacts normally to

the accelerator pedal.. Power steering assistance is

normal.. The transmission shifts normally.

TOUR mode. The shock absorbers allow a

softer ride.. The engine reacts normally to

the accelerator pedal.. Power steering assistance is

normal.. The transmission shifts normally.

SPORT mode. The shock absorbers stiffen to

provide better contact with theroad surface.

. The engine reacts more quicklyto the accelerator pedal.

. Power steering assistance isreduced.

. The transmission shifts later.

Drive Mode Control

Drive Mode Control (DMC) analyzesthe driving style and the active stateof the vehicle and automaticallychanges the settings within theselected driving mode. When thereis a more noticeable change indriving style or conditions, thedriving mode is changed to SPORTuntil the previous driving stylereturns.


If Standard mode is selected andsport driving is detected, severalsettings of the Standard modechange to sport settings. If sportdriving increases, DMC changes toSPORT mode.

If TOUR mode is selected andsudden braking or cornering isnecessary, DMC changes thesuspension settings to SPORTmode to increase vehicle stability.

When the driving characteristic orthe active state of the vehiclereturns to the previous style,DMC changes the settings to thepreselected driving mode.

Personalized Settings InSPORT Mode

The driver can select the functionsof the SPORT mode when theSPORT button is selected. Thesesettings can be changed in themenu settings in VehiclePersonalization.

Cruise ControlWith cruise control, the vehicle canmaintain a speed of about 40 km/h(25 mph) or more without keepingyour foot on the accelerator. Cruisecontrol does not work at speedsbelow 40 km/h (25 mph).

On vehicles with the TractionControl System (TCS) or ElectronicStability Control (ESC), the systemmay begin to limit wheel spin whileyou are using cruise control. If thishappens, the cruise control willautomatically disengage. SeeTraction Control System (TCS) onpage 9‑31 or Electronic StabilityControl (ESC) on page 9‑33.

{ WARNING

Cruise control can be dangerouswhere you cannot drive safely ata steady speed. So, do not usethe cruise control on windingroads or in heavy traffic.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Cruise control can be dangerouson slippery roads. On such roads,fast changes in tire traction cancause excessive wheel slip, andyou could lose control. Do not usecruise control on slippery roads.

The cruise control buttons arelocated on the steering wheel.


5 (On/Off): Press to turn thecruise control system on and off.An indicator light will turn on or off inthe instrument panel cluster.

[ (Cancel): Press to disengagecruise control without erasing theset speed from memory.

RES/+ (Resume/Accelerate):Move the thumbwheel up to makethe vehicle resume to a previouslyset speed or to accelerate.

SET/− (Set/Coast): Move thethumbwheel down to set a speed orto make the vehicle decelerate.

Setting Cruise Control

If the cruise button is on when not inuse, it could get bumped and go intocruise when not desired. Keep thecruise control switch off when cruiseis not being used.

1. Press5 to turn cruisecontrol on.

2. Get to the speed desired.

3. Move the thumbwheel downtoward SET/− and release it.The desired set speed brieflyappears in the instrument panelcluster.

4. Take your foot off the acceleratorpedal.

Resuming a Set Speed

If the cruise control is set at adesired speed and then the brakesare applied, the cruise control isdisengaged without erasing the setspeed from memory.

Once the vehicle speed reachesabout 40 km/h (25 mph) or more,move the thumbwheel up towardRES/+ briefly. The vehicle returns tothe previous set speed and staysthere.

Increasing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated,

. Move the thumbwheel up towardRES/+ and hold it until thedesired speed is reached, thenrelease it.

. To increase vehicle speed insmall amounts, move thethumbwheel up toward RES/+briefly and then release it. Eachtime this is done, the vehiclegoes about 1.6 km/h (1 mph)faster.

Reducing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated,. Move the thumbwheel toward

SET/− and hold until the desiredlower speed is reached, thenrelease it.

. To slow down in small amounts,move the thumbwheel towardSET/− briefly. Each time this isdone, the vehicle goes about1.6 km/h (1 mph) slower.


Passing Another Vehicle WhileUsing Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal toincrease the vehicle speed. Whenyou take your foot off the pedal, thevehicle will slow down to theprevious set cruise control speed.

Using Cruise Control on Hills

How well the cruise control workson hills depends upon the vehiclespeed, load, and the steepness ofthe hills. When going up steep hills,you might have to step on theaccelerator pedal to maintain thevehicle speed. When goingdownhill, you might have to brake orshift to a lower gear to maintain thevehicle speed. When the brakes areapplied the cruise control isdisengaged.

Ending Cruise Control

There are three ways to disengagethe cruise control:. To disengage cruise control;

step lightly on the brake pedal orclutch.

. Press [ on the steering wheel.

. To turn off the cruise control,press5 on the steering wheel.

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speed iserased from memory by pressingthe 5 button or if the ignition isturned off.

Object DetectionSystems

Ultrasonic Parking AssistFor vehicles with the UltrasonicRear Parking Assist (URPA) system,it assists the driver with parking andavoiding objects while inR (Reverse). URPA operates atspeeds less than 8 km/h (5 mph),and the sensors on the rear bumperdetect objects up to 1.5 m (5 ft)behind the vehicle, and at least25 cm (10 in) off the ground.


{ WARNING

The Ultrasonic Rear ParkingAssist (URPA) system does notreplace driver vision. It cannotdetect:

. Objects that are below thebumper, underneath thevehicle, or too close or farfrom the vehicle

. Children, pedestrians,bicyclists, or pets.

If you do not use proper carebefore and while backing, vehicledamage, injury, or death couldoccur. Even with URPA, alwayscheck behind the vehicle beforebacking up. While backing, besure to look for objects and checkthe vehicle's mirrors.

How the System Works

URPA comes on automatically whenthe shift lever is moved intoR (Reverse). A single tone soundsto indicate the system is working.

URPA operates only at speeds lessthan 8 km/h (5 mph).

An obstacle is indicated by audiblebeeps. The interval between thebeeps becomes shorter as thevehicle gets closer to the obstacle.When the distance is less than30 cm (12 in) the beeps arecontinuous.

To be detected, objects must be atleast 25 cm (10 in) off the groundand below trunk level. Objects mustalso be within 1.5 m (5 ft) from therear bumper. The distance objectscan be detected may be less duringwarmer or humid weather.

PARK ASSIST OFF displays on theDriver Information Center (DIC) toindicate that URPA is off. Themessage disappears after a shortperiod of time.

Turning the System On and Off

The URPA system can be turned onand off using the park assist buttonlocated next to the radio.

The park assist button lights upwhen the system is on or in standbyand turns off when it has beendisabled.

URPA defaults to the on settingeach time the vehicle is started.


When the System Does NotSeem to Work Properly

SERVICE PARK ASSIST: If thismessage occurs, take the vehicle toyour dealer to repair the system.

PARK ASSIST OFF: If the URPAsystem does not activate due to atemporary condition, the messagedisplays on the DIC. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑21 for more information.This can occur under the followingconditions:. The driver has disabled the

system.. The ultrasonic sensors are not

clean. Keep the vehicle's rearbumper free of mud, dirt, snow,ice, and slush. For cleaninginstructions, see Exterior Careon page 10‑74.

. An object was hanging out of thetrunk during the last drive cycle.Once the object is removed andURPA detects no objects ofinterest, the URPA will return tonormal operation.

. The vehicle's bumper isdamaged. Take the vehicle toyour dealer to repair the system.

. Other conditions, such asvibrations from a jackhammer orthe compression of air brakes ona very large truck, are affectingsystem performance.

If the system is still disabled afterdriving forward at least 40 km/h(25 mph), take the vehicle to yourdealer.

FuelUse of the recommended fuel is animportant part of the propermaintenance of this vehicle. To helpkeep the engine clean and maintainoptimum vehicle performance, werecommend the use of gasolineadvertised as TOP TIER DetergentGasoline.

Look for the TOP TIER label on thefuel pump to ensure gasoline meetsenhanced detergency standardsdeveloped by auto companies. A listof marketers providing TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline can be found atwww.toptiergas.com.


The 8th digit of the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) showsthe code letter or number thatidentifies the vehicle's engine.

The VIN is at the top left of theinstrument panel. See VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) onpage 12‑1.

Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badgeand a yellow fuel cap can use eitherunleaded gasoline or ethanol fuelcontaining up to 85% ethanol (E85).See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) onpage 9‑43. For all other vehicles,use only the unleaded gasolinedescribed under RecommendedFuel on page 9‑41.

Recommended FuelIf the vehicle has a 2.4L L4 engine(VIN Code C), use regular unleadedgasoline with a posted octane ratingof 87 or higher. If the octane ratingis less than 87, an audible knockingnoise, commonly referred to asspark knock, might be heard whendriving. If this occurs, use agasoline rated at 87 octane orhigher as soon as possible.

If heavy knocking is heard whenusing gasoline rated at 87 octane orhigher, the engine needs service.

If the vehicle has the 2.0L L4 engine(VIN Code V), use premiumunleaded gasoline with a postedoctane rating of 91 or higher. Youcan also use regular unleadedgasoline rated at 87 octane orhigher, but the vehicle's accelerationcould be slightly reduced, and aslight audible knocking noise,commonly referred to as sparkknock, might be heard. If the octaneis less than 87, a heavy knockingnoise might be heard when driving.If this occurs, use a gasoline ratedat 87 octane or higher as soon aspossible. Otherwise, you coulddamage the engine. If heavyknocking is heard when usinggasoline rated at 87 octane orhigher, the engine needs service.


Gasoline SpecificationsAt a minimum, gasoline shouldmeet ASTM specification D 4814in the United States or CAN/CGSB‐3.5 or 3.511 in Canada.Some gasolines contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT). We recommendagainst the use of gasolinescontaining MMT. See Fuel Additiveson page 9‑42 for additionalinformation.

California FuelRequirementsIf the vehicle is certified to meetCalifornia Emissions Standards, it isdesigned to operate on fuels thatmeet California specifications. Seethe underhood emission controllabel. If this fuel is not available instates adopting California emissionsstandards, the vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meetingfederal specifications, but emission

control system performance mightbe affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp could turn on and thevehicle might fail a smog‐check test.See Malfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5‑12. If this occurs, return toyour authorized dealer for diagnosis.If it is determined that the conditionis caused by the type of fuel used,repairs might not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Fuels in ForeignCountriesIf you plan on driving in anothercountry outside the United States orCanada, the proper fuel might behard to find. Never use leadedgasoline or any other fuel notrecommended in the previous texton fuel. Costly repairs caused byuse of improper fuel would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask anauto club, or contact a major oilcompany that does business in thecountry where you will be driving.

Fuel AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolinesin the United States are nowrequired to contain additives thathelp prevent engine and fuel systemdeposits from forming, allowing theemission control system to workproperly. In most cases, nothingshould have to be added to the fuel.However, some gasolines containonly the minimum amount ofadditive required to meet U.S.Environmental Protection Agencyregulations. To help keep fuelinjectors and intake valves clean,or if the vehicle experiencesproblems due to dirty injectors orvalves, look for gasoline that isadvertised as TOP TIER DetergentGasoline. Look for the TOP TIERlabel on the fuel pump to ensuregasoline meets enhanceddetergency standards developed bythe auto companies. A list ofmarketers providing TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline can be found atwww.toptiergas.com.


For customers who do not use TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline regularly,one bottle of GM Fuel SystemTreatment PLUS, added to the fueltank at every engine oil change, canhelp clean deposits from fuelinjectors and intake valves. GM FuelSystem Treatment PLUS is the onlygasoline additive recommended byGeneral Motors. It is available atyour dealer.

Gasolines containing oxygenates,such as ethers and ethanol, andreformulated gasolines might beavailable in your area. Werecommend that you use thesegasolines, if they comply with thespecifications described earlier.However, E85 (85% ethanol) andother fuels containing more than10% ethanol must not be used invehicles that were not designed forthose fuels.

Notice: This vehicle was notdesigned for fuel that containsmethanol. Do not use fuelcontaining methanol. It cancorrode metal parts in the fuelsystem and also damage plasticand rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under thevehicle warranty.

Some gasolines that are notreformulated for low emissions cancontain an octane-enhancingadditive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendantwhere you buy gasoline whether thefuel contains MMT. We recommendagainst the use of such gasolines.Fuels containing MMT can reducethe life of spark plugs and theperformance of the emission controlsystem could be affected. Themalfunction indicator lamp mightturn on. If this occurs, return to yourdealer for service.

Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badgeand a yellow fuel cap can use eitherunleaded gasoline or ethanol fuelcontaining up to 85% ethanol (E85).For all other vehicles, use only theunleaded gasoline described underRecommended Fuel on page 9‑41.

We encourage the use of E85 invehicles that are designed to use it.The ethanol in E85 is a “renewable”fuel, meaning it is made fromrenewable sources such as cornand other crops.

Many service stations will not havean 85% ethanol fuel (E85) pumpavailable. The U.S. Department ofEnergy has an alternative fuelswebsite (www.eere.energy.gov/afdc/infrastructure/locator.html) that canhelp you find E85 fuel. Thosestations that do have E85 shouldhave a label indicating ethanolcontent. Do not use the fuel if theethanol content is greater than 85%.


At a minimum, E85 should meetASTM Specification D 5798 orCGSB Specification 3.512. Fillingthe tank with fuel mixtures thatdo not meet ASTM or CGSBspecifications can affect driveabilityand could cause the malfunctionindicator lamp to come on. As theoutside temperature approachesfreezing, ethanol fuel distributorsshould supply winter grade ethanol,the same as with unleadedgasoline.

The starting characteristics of E85fuel make it unsuitable for use whenthe ambient temperatures fall below−18°C (0°F).

In the range of −18°C (0°F) to0°C (32°F), you may experiencean increase in the time it takes forthe engine to start.

It is best not to alternate repeatedlybetween gasoline and E85. If youdo switch fuels, it is recommendedthat you add as much fuel aspossible — do not add less than11 L (three gallons) when refueling.

You should drive the vehicleimmediately after refueling for atleast 11 km (seven miles) to allowthe vehicle to adapt to the change inethanol concentration.

E85 has less energy per gallon thangasoline, so you will need to refillthe fuel tank more often when usingE85 than when you are usinggasoline. See Filling the Tank onpage 9‑44.

Notice: Some additives are notcompatible with E85 fuel and canharm the vehicle's fuel system.Do not add anything to E85.Damage caused by additiveswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Notice: This vehicle was notdesigned for fuel that containsmethanol. Do not use fuelcontaining methanol. It cancorrode metal parts in the fuelsystem and also damage plasticand rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under thevehicle warranty.

Filling the Tank

{ WARNING

Fuel vapor burns violently and afuel fire can cause bad injuries.To help avoid injuries to you andothers, read and follow all theinstructions on the fuel pumpisland. Turn off the engine whenrefueling. Do not smoke near fuelor when refueling the vehicle.Do not use cellular phones. Keepsparks, flames, and smokingmaterials away from fuel. Do notleave the fuel pump unattendedwhen refueling the vehicle. This isagainst the law in some places.Do not re-enter the vehicle whilepumping fuel. Keep children awayfrom the fuel pump; never letchildren pump fuel.


The tethered fuel cap is behind thefuel door on the vehicle's passengerside. The fuel door is unlockedwhen the vehicle is unlocked.Locking the vehicle locks thefuel door. Turn the fuel capcounterclockwise to remove. Whilerefueling, hang the tethered fuel capfrom the disk on the end of the fuelcap to the mating feature on the fueldoor hinge. Reinstall the cap byturning it clockwise until it clicks.

{ WARNING

Fuel can spray out on you if youopen the fuel cap too quickly.If you spill fuel and thensomething ignites it, you could bebadly burned. This spray canhappen if the tank is nearly full,and is more likely in hot weather.Open the fuel cap slowly and waitfor any hiss noise to stop. Thenunscrew the cap all the way.

Do not top off or overfill the tank.Wait a few seconds before removingthe nozzle. Clean fuel from paintedsurfaces as soon as possible.See Exterior Care on page 10‑74.

{ WARNING

If a fire starts while you arerefueling, do not remove thenozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel byshutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant.Leave the area immediately.

Notice: If a new fuel cap isneeded, be sure to get the righttype of cap from your dealer.The wrong type fuel cap mightnot fit properly, might cause themalfunction indicator lamp tolight, and could damage the fueltank and emissions system.See Malfunction Indicator Lampon page 5‑12.


Filling a Portable FuelContainer

{ WARNING

Never fill a portable fuel containerwhile it is in the vehicle. Staticelectricity discharge from thecontainer can ignite the fuelvapor. You can be badly burnedand the vehicle damaged if thisoccurs. To help avoid injury to youand others:

. Dispense fuel only intoapproved containers.

. Do not fill a container while itis inside a vehicle, in avehicle's trunk, pickup bed,or on any surface other thanthe ground.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Bring the fill nozzle in contactwith the inside of the fillopening before operating thenozzle. Contact should bemaintained until the filling iscomplete.

. Do not smoke whilepumping fuel.

. Do not use a cellular phonewhile pumping fuel.

Towing

General TowingInformationThe vehicle is neither designed norintended to tow a trailer.


Conversions andAdd-Ons

Add-On ElectricalEquipmentNotice: Do not add anythingelectrical to the vehicle unlessyou check with your dealer first.Some electrical equipment candamage the vehicle and thedamage would not be covered bythe vehicle's warranty. Someadd-on electrical equipment cankeep other components fromworking as they should.

Add-on equipment can drain thevehicle 12‐volt battery, even if thevehicle is not operating.

The vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to add anythingelectrical to the vehicle, seeServicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3‑34 and AddingEquipment to the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3‑34.


2 NOTES

Vehicle Care 10-1

Vehicle Care

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2California Proposition 65Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

California PerchlorateMaterials Requirements . . . . 10-3

Accessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Vehicle ChecksDoing Your OwnService Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5Engine CompartmentOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6

Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-12Automatic TransmissionFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-13Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-20Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . 10-21Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-25Automatic Transmission ShiftLock Control FunctionCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26

Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-27

Wiper BladeReplacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

Bulb ReplacementBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Headlamps, Front TurnSignal and ParkingLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29

Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30Taillamps, Turn Signal,Stoplamps, and Back-UpLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30

License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-31Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-32

Electrical SystemElectrical SystemOverload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32

Fuses and CircuitBreakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33

Engine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34

Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

10-2 Vehicle Care

Wheels and TiresTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-40Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42Tire Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46Tire Pressure for High-SpeedOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47

Tire Pressure MonitorSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48

Tire Pressure MonitorOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49

Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54Different Size Tires andWheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-58Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-60Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-67

Jump StartingJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68

TowingTowing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-71Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72

Appearance CareExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80

General InformationFor service and parts needs, visityour dealer. You will receivegenuine GM parts and GM-trainedand supported service people.

Genuine GM parts have one ofthese marks:

Vehicle Care 10-3

California Proposition65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including thisone, contain and/or emit chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and birth defects orother reproductive harm. Engineexhaust, many parts and systems,many fluids, and some componentwear by-products contain and/oremit these chemicals.

California PerchlorateMaterials RequirementsCertain types of automotiveapplications, such as airbaginitiators, seat belt pretensioners,and lithium batteries contained inremote keyless transmitters, maycontain perchlorate materials.Special handling may be necessary.For additional information, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Accessories andModificationsAdding non‐dealer accessories tothe vehicle can affect vehicleperformance and safety, includingsuch things as airbags, braking,stability, ride and handling,emissions systems, aerodynamics,durability, and electronic systemslike antilock brakes, traction control,and stability control. Some of theseaccessories could even causemalfunction or damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Damage to vehicle componentsresulting from the installation or useof non‐GM certified parts, includingcontrol module modifications, is notcovered under the terms of thevehicle warranty and may affectremaining warranty coverage foraffected parts.

10-4 Vehicle Care

GM Accessories are designed tocomplement and function with othersystems on the vehicle. Your GMdealer can accessorize the vehicleusing genuine GM Accessories.When you go to your GM dealerand ask for GM Accessories, youwill know that GM-trained andsupported service technicians willperform the work using genuine GMAccessories.

Also, see Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑34.

Vehicle Checks

Doing Your OwnService Work

{ WARNING

You can be injured and thevehicle could be damaged if youtry to do service work on a vehiclewithout knowing enough about it.

. Be sure you have sufficientknowledge, experience,the proper replacementparts, and tools beforeattempting any vehiclemaintenance task.

. Be sure to use the propernuts, bolts, and otherfasteners. English and metricfasteners can be easilyconfused. If the wrongfasteners are used, parts canlater break or fall off. Youcould be hurt.

If doing some of your own servicework, use the proper servicemanual. It tells you much moreabout how to service the vehiclethan this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see ServicePublications Ordering Information onpage 13‑11.

This vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to do your ownservice work, see Servicing theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑34.

Keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date ofany service work performed. SeeMaintenance Records onpage 11‑9.

Vehicle Care 10-5

HoodTo open the hood:

1. Pull up on the hood releasehandle with this symbol on it.It is located inside the vehicle tothe left of the steering column. 2. Go to the front of the vehicle and

push up on the secondary hoodrelease handle.

To close the hood:

1. Before closing the hood, be sureall the filler caps are on properly.

2. Lower the hood 30 cm (12 in)above the vehicle and release itso it fully latches. Check tomake sure the hood is closedand repeat the process ifnecessary.

10-6 Vehicle Care

Engine Compartment Overview

2.0 L L4 Engine

Vehicle Care 10-7

A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10‑13.

B. Engine Cover.

C. Engine Oil Dipstick. See EngineOil on page 10‑9.

D. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See EngineOil on page 10‑9.

E. Transmission Fluid Cap andDipstick. See AutomaticTransmission Fluid onpage 10‑13.

F. Power Steering Reservoir andCap. See Power Steering Fluidon page 10‑21.

G. Brake Master CylinderReservoir. See Brakes onpage 10‑23.

H. Battery Cover. See Battery onpage 10‑25.

I. Engine Coolant Reservoir andPressure Cap. See EngineCoolant on page 10‑16.

J. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑22.

K. Engine Compartment FuseBlock on page 10‑34.

10-8 Vehicle Care

2.4 L L4 Engine

Vehicle Care 10-9

A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10‑13.

B. Engine Cover.

C. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See EngineOil on page 10‑9.

D. Engine Oil Dipstick. See EngineOil on page 10‑9.

E. Transmission Fluid Cap andDipstick. See AutomaticTransmission Fluid onpage 10‑13.

F. Brake Master CylinderReservoir. See Brakes onpage 10‑23.

G. Power Steering Reservoir andCap. See Power Steering Fluidon page 10‑21.

H. Engine Coolant Reservoir andPressure Cap. See EngineCoolant on page 10‑16.

I. Battery Cover. See Battery onpage 10‑25.

J. Engine Compartment FuseBlock on page 10‑34.

K. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑22.

Engine Oil

Checking Engine Oil

It is a good idea to check the engineoil level at each fuel fill. In order toget an accurate reading, the oilmust be warm and the vehicle mustbe on level ground.

The engine oil dipstick handle is ayellow loop. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for the location of theengine oil dipstick.

1. Turn off the engine and give theoil several minutes to drain backinto the oil pan. If this is notdone, the oil dipstick might notshow the actual level.

2. Pull out the dipstick and clean itwith a paper towel or cloth, thenpush it back in all the way.Remove it again, keeping the tipdown, and check the level.

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the cross-hatchedarea at the tip of the dipstick, addat least one liter/quart of therecommended oil. This sectionexplains what kind of oil to use. Forengine oil crankcase capacity, seeCapacities and Specifications onpage 12‑2.

Notice: Do not add too much oil.If the engine has so much oil thatthe oil level gets above thecross-hatched area that showsthe proper operating range, theengine could be damaged.

10-10 Vehicle Care

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for the location of theengine oil fill cap.

Add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operatingrange. Push the dipstick all the wayback in when through.

What Kind of Engine Oil to Use(2.4L Engine)

Look for three things:. GM6094M

Use only an oil that meets GMStandard GM6094M.

. SAE 5W-30

SAE 5W-30 is best for thevehicle. These numbers on anoil container show its viscosity,

or thickness. Do not useother viscosity oils such asSAE 20W-50.

. American Petroleum Institute(API) starburst symbol

Oils meeting these requirementsshould have the starburstsymbol on the container. Thissymbol indicates that the oil hasbeen certified by the AmericanPetroleum Institute (API).

Notice: Use only engine oilidentified as meeting GMStandard GM6094M and showingthe American Petroleum InstituteCertified For Gasoline Enginesstarburst symbol. Failure to usethe recommended oil can resultin engine damage not covered bythe vehicle warranty.

Cold Temperature Operation

In an area of extreme cold, wherethe temperature falls below −29°C(−20°F), use either an SAE 5W-30synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30engine oil. Both provide easier coldstarting for the engine at extremelylow temperatures. Always use an oilthat meets the requiredspecification, GM6094M.

Vehicle Care 10-11

What Kind of Engine Oil to Use(2.0L Engine)

Look for two things:. Viscosity Grade

SAE 5W-30 is best for thevehicle. Do not use otherviscosity grade oils such asSAE 10W‐30, 10W‐40,or 20W-50.

Cold Temperature Operation: Inan area of extreme cold, wherethe temperature fallsbelow −29°C (−20°F), an

SAE 0W-30 oil should be used.An oil of this viscosity grade willprovide easier cold starting forthe engine at extremely lowtemperatures. When selectingan oil of the appropriate viscositygrade, be sure to always selectan oil that meets the requiredspecification.

. Specification

The vehicle's engine requires aspecial oil meeting the dexos™specification.

Notice: Use only dexos™approved engine oil or equivalentof the appropriate viscositygrade. Failure to use therecommended oil or equivalentcan result in engine damage notcovered by the vehicle warranty.

The vehicle's engine was filled atthe factory with a Mobil 1® engine oilthat met the requirements of thedexos™ specification. It isrecommended to use Mobil 1®

10-12 Vehicle Care

engine oils that meet therequirements of the dexos™specification.

Substitute Engine Oil: When addingoil to maintain engine oil level, oilmeeting the dexos™ specificationmight not be available. You can addsubstitute oil designated SAE 5W-30with the API starburst symbol at alltemperatures. Substitute oil notmeeting the dexos™ specification orequivalent, however, should not beused for an oil change.

Engine Oil Additives/EngineOil Flushes

Do not add anything to the oil. Therecommended oils that meet thedexos™ specification are all that isneeded for good performance andengine protection.

Engine oil system flushes are notrecommended and could causeengine damage not covered by thevehicle warranty.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine Oil

This vehicle has a computer systemthat indicates when to change theengine oil and filter. This is basedon engine revolutions and enginetemperature, and not on mileage.Based on driving conditions, themileage at which an oil change isindicated can vary considerably. Forthe oil life system to work properly,the system must be reset every timethe oil is changed.

When the system has calculatedthat oil life has been diminished, itindicates that an oil change isnecessary. A CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message comes on.See Engine Oil Messages onpage 5‑26. Change the oil as soonas possible within the next 1 000 km(600 miles). It is possible that,if driving under the best conditions,the oil life system might not indicatethat an oil change is necessary forover a year. However, the engine oiland filter must be changed at least

once a year and at this time thesystem must be reset. Your dealerhas trained service people who willperform this work using genuineparts and reset the system. It is alsoimportant to check the oil regularlyand keep it at the proper level.

If the system is ever resetaccidentally, the oil must bechanged at 5 000 km (3,000 miles)since the last oil change.Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.

How to Reset the Engine OilLife System

Reset the system whenever theengine oil is changed so that thesystem can calculate the nextengine oil change. To reset thesystem:

1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN withthe engine off.

2. Press the DIC menu button onthe turn signal lever to scrollthrough the menu items on theDIC screen.

Vehicle Care 10-13

3. Press the set button to clear theCHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage and/or restore theREMAINING OIL LIFE 100%message.


The system is reset when theCHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage is off and the REMAININGOIL LIFE 100% message isdisplayed.

What to Do with Used Oil

Used engine oil contains certainelements that can be unhealthy foryour skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean yourskin and nails with soap and water,or a good hand cleaner. Wash orproperly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See themanufacturer's warnings about theuse and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to theenvironment. If you change yourown oil, be sure to drain all the oil

from the filter before disposal. Neverdispose of oil by putting it in thetrash or pouring it on the ground,into sewers, or into streams orbodies of water. Recycle it by takingit to a place that collects used oil.

Automatic TransmissionFluid

How to Check AutomaticTransmission Fluid

It is not necessary to check thetransmission fluid level.A transmission fluid leak is the onlyreason for fluid loss. If a leakoccurs, take the vehicle to yourdealer service department and haveit repaired as soon as possible.

There is a special procedure forchecking and changing thetransmission fluid. Because thisprocedure is difficult, you shouldhave this done at your dealerservice department. Contact yourdealer for additional information.

The procedure can be found in theservice manual. To purchase aservice manual, see ServicePublications Ordering Information onpage 13‑11.

Change the fluid and filter at theintervals listed in ScheduledMaintenance on page 11‑2, and besure to use the fluid listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑6.

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterSee Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for the location of theengine air cleaner/filter.

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

Inspect the air cleaner/filter at theMaintenance II intervals and replaceit at the first oil change after each80 000 km (50,000 mile) interval.See Scheduled Maintenance onpage 11‑2 for more information.

10-14 Vehicle Care

If you are driving in dusty/dirtyconditions, inspect the filter ateach engine oil change.

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

To inspect the air cleaner/filter,remove the filter from the vehicleand lightly shake the filter to releaseloose dust and dirt. If the filterremains caked with dirt, a new filteris required.

To inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter:

2.0 L L4 Engine

1. Open the hood. See Hood onpage 10‑5.

A. Electrical Connector

B. Air Duct Clamp

C. Screws (5)

2. Disconnect the outlet duct byloosening the air duct clamp (B).

3. Disconnect the electricalconnector (A).

4. Remove the screws (C) on topof the engine air cleaner/filterhousing.

5. Lift the filter cover housing awayfrom the engine.

6. Pull out the filter.

7. Inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter.

8. Reverse Steps 2 through 4 toreinstall the filter cover housing.

2.4 L L4 Engine

1. Open the hood. See Hood onpage 10‑5.

A. Screws (6)

B. Air Duct Clamp

C. Electrical Connector

2. Disconnect the outlet duct byloosening the air duct clamp (B).

Vehicle Care 10-15

3. Disconnect the electricalconnector (C).

4. Remove the screws (A) on top ofthe engine air cleaner/filterhousing.

5. Lift the filter cover housing awayfrom the engine.

6. Pull out the filter.

7. Inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter.

8. Reverse Steps 2 through 4 toreinstall the filter cover housing.

{ WARNING

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you orothers to be burned. The aircleaner not only cleans the air; ithelps to stop flames if the enginebackfires. Use caution whenworking on the engine and do notdrive with the air cleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter isoff, dirt can easily get into theengine, which could damage it.Always have the air cleaner/filterin place when you are driving.

Cooling SystemThe cooling system allows theengine to maintain the correctworking temperature.

When it is safe to lift the hood:

2.0 L L4 Engine

A. Electric Engine Cooling Fans

B. Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap

10-16 Vehicle Care

2.4 L L4 Engine

A. Electric Engine Cooling Fans

B. Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap

{ WARNING

An electric engine cooling fanunder the hood can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can cause injury. Keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

{ WARNING

Heater and radiator hoses, andother engine parts, can be veryhot. Do not touch them. If you do,you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is aleak. If you run the engine, itcould lose all coolant. That couldcause an engine fire, and youcould be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

Notice: Using coolant other thanDEX-COOL® can cause prematureengine, heater core, or radiatorcorrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant could require changingsooner, at 50 000 km(30,000miles) or 24months,whichever occurs first. Anyrepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Always useDEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolantin the vehicle.

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in the vehicle isfilled with DEX-COOL® enginecoolant. This coolant is designed toremain in the vehicle for 5 years or240 000 km (150,000 miles),whichever occurs first.

The following explains the coolingsystem and how to check and addcoolant when it is low. If there is aproblem with engine overheating,see Engine Overheating onpage 10‑20.

Vehicle Care 10-17

What to Use

{ WARNING

Adding only plain water to thecooling system can bedangerous. Plain water, or someother liquid such as alcohol, canboil before the proper coolantmixture will. The vehicle's coolantwarning system is set for theproper coolant mixture. With plainwater or the wrong mixture, theengine could get too hot but youwould not get the overheatwarning. The engine could catchfire and you or others could beburned. Use a 50/50 mixture ofclean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL® coolant.

Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL®

coolant. If using this mixture,nothing else needs to be added.This mixture:. Gives freezing protection down

to −37°C (−34°F), outsidetemperature.

. Gives boiling protection up to129°C (265°F), enginetemperature.

. Protects against rust andcorrosion.

. Will not damage aluminum parts.

. Helps keep the proper enginetemperature.

Notice: If an improper coolantmixture is used, the engine couldoverheat and be badly damaged.The repair cost would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Too much water in the mixturecan freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core, and otherparts.

Checking Coolant

The vehicle must be on a levelsurface when checking the coolantlevel.

Check to see if coolant is visible inthe coolant surge tank. If the coolantinside the coolant surge tank isboiling, do not do anything else untilit cools down. If coolant is visiblebut the coolant level is not at theindicated mark, add a 50/50 mixtureof clean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL® coolant at the coolantsurge tank, but be sure the coolingsystem is cool before this is done.

The coolant surge tank is located inthe engine compartment on thedriver side of the vehicle. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for more information onlocation.

10-18 Vehicle Care

How to Add Coolant to theCoolant Surge Tank

Notice: This vehicle has aspecific coolant fill procedure.Failure to follow this procedurecould cause the engine tooverheat and be severelydamaged.

If no problem is found, check to seeif coolant is visible in the coolantsurge tank. If coolant is visible butthe coolant level is not at theindicated level mark, add a50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL® coolant atthe coolant surge tank, but be surethe cooling system, including thecoolant surge tank pressure cap, iscool before you do it.

{ WARNING

Steam and scalding liquids from ahot cooling system can blow outand burn you badly. They areunder pressure, and if you turn

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

the coolant surge tank pressurecap— even a little— they cancome out at high speed. Neverturn the cap when the coolingsystem, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap, is hot.Wait for the cooling system andcoolant surge tank pressure capto cool if you ever have to turnthe pressure cap.

{ WARNING

Adding only plain water tothe cooling system can bedangerous. Plain water, or someother liquid such as alcohol, canboil before the proper coolantmixture will. The vehicle's coolantwarning system is set for theproper coolant mixture. With plainwater or the wrong mixture, the

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

engine could get too hot but youwould not get the overheatwarning. The engine could catchfire and you or others could beburned. Use a 50/50 mixture ofclean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL® coolant.

Notice: In cold weather, watercan freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core and otherparts. Use the recommendedcoolant and the proper coolantmixture.

{ WARNING

You can be burned if you spillcoolant on hot engine parts.Coolant contains ethylene glycoland it will burn if the engine partsare hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

Vehicle Care 10-19

2.0 L L4 Engine Shown, 2.4 L L4Engine Similar

1. Remove the coolant surge tankpressure cap when the coolingsystem, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap andupper radiator hose, is nolonger hot.

Turn the pressure cap slowlycounterclockwise aboutone-quarter of a turn. If you heara hiss, wait for that to stop. Thiswill allow any pressure still left tobe vented out thedischarge hose.

2. Keep turning the pressure capslowly and remove it.

3. Fill the coolant surge tank withthe proper DEX-COOL® coolantmixture to the indicatedlevel mark.

4. With the coolant surge tankpressure cap off, start theengine and let it run until youcan feel the upper radiator hosegetting hot. Watch out for theengine cooling fans.

By this time, the coolant levelinside the coolant surge tankmay be lower. If the level islower, add more of the properDEX-COOL® coolant mixture tothe coolant surge tank until thelevel reaches the indicatedlevel mark.

5. Replace the pressure cap. Besure the pressure cap ishand-tight.

Check the level in the coolant surgetank when the cooling system hascooled down. If the coolant is not atthe proper level, repeat Steps 1through 3 and reinstall the pressurecap. If the coolant still is not at theproper level when the system coolsdown again, see your dealer.

10-20 Vehicle Care

Engine OverheatingThe vehicle has several indicatorsto warn of engine overheating.

You will find an engine coolanttemperature gauge on the vehicle'sinstrument panel cluster. SeeEngine Coolant Temperature Gaugeon page 5‑9 .

If it is decided not to lift the hoodwhen this warning appears, butinstead get service help right away,see Roadside Assistance Programon page 13‑5.

If it is decided to lift the hood , makesure the vehicle is parked on a levelsurface.

Then check to see if the enginecooling fans are running. If theengine is overheating, both fansshould be running. If they are not,do not continue to run the engineand have the vehicle serviced.

Notice: Engine damage fromrunning the engine withoutcoolant is not covered by thewarranty.

If Steam Is Coming from theEngine Compartment

{ WARNING

Steam from an overheated enginecan burn you badly, even if youjust open the hood. Stay awayfrom the engine if you see or hearsteam coming from it. Just turn itoff and get everyone away fromthe vehicle until it cools down.Wait until there is no sign ofsteam or coolant before you openthe hood.

If you keep driving when yourengine is overheated, the liquidsin it can catch fire. You or otherscould be badly burned. Stop yourengine if it overheats, and get outof the vehicle until the engineis cool.

If No Steam Is Coming fromthe Engine Compartment

If an engine overheat warning isdisplayed but no steam can be seenor heard, the problem may not betoo serious. Sometimes the enginecan get a little too hot when thevehicle:. Climbs a long hill on a hot day.. Stops after high-speed driving.. Idles for long periods in traffic.. Tows a trailer.

If the overheat warning is displayedwith no sign of steam:

1. Turn the air off.

2. Turn the heater on to the highesttemperature and to the highestfan speed. Open the windows asnecessary.

3. In heavy traffic, let the engineidle in N (Neutral) while stopped.If it is safe to do so, pull off theroad, shift to P (Park) orN (Neutral), and let theengine idle.

Vehicle Care 10-21

If the temperature overheat gaugeis no longer in the overheat zone oran overheat warning no longerdisplays, the vehicle can be driven.Continue to drive the vehicle slowfor about 10 minutes. Keep a safevehicle distance from the car in frontof you. If the warning does not comeback on, continue to drive normally.

If the warning continues, pull over,stop, and park the vehicleright away.

If there is no sign of steam, idle theengine for three minutes whileparked. If the warning is stilldisplayed, turn off the engineuntil it cools down.

Power Steering Fluid

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for reservoir location.

When to Check Power SteeringFluid

It is not necessary to regularlycheck power steering fluid unless aleak is suspected in the system,or an unusual noise is heard. A fluidloss in this system could indicate aproblem. Have the system inspectedand repaired.

How to Check Power SteeringFluid

To check the power steering fluid:

2.0 L L4 Dipstick Shown, 2.4 L L4Dipstick Similar

1. Turn the key off and let theengine compartment cool down.

2. Wipe the cap and the top of thereservoir clean.

3. Unscrew the cap and wipe thedipstick with a clean rag.

10-22 Vehicle Care

4. Replace the cap and completelytighten it.

5. Remove the cap again and lookat the fluid level on the dipstick.

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN (Minimum) and MAX(Maximum) marks when the engineis cold, and at the MAX mark whenthe engine is hot. If the fluid is at theMIN mark when the engine is coldor hot, power steering fluid shouldbe added.

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on thedipstick.

If the fluid is at or below the MINmark on the dipstick, add justenough fluid to bring the levelbetween the MIN and MAX marks.

What to Use

To determine what kind of fluid touse, see Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑6. Alwaysuse the proper fluid.

Washer Fluid

What to Use

When windshield washer fluid isneeded, be sure to read themanufacturer's instructions beforeuse. If operating the vehicle in anarea where the temperature may fallbelow freezing, use a fluid that hassufficient protection againstfreezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

Open the cap with the washersymbol on it. Add washer fluid untilthe tank is full. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for reservoir location.

Notice:. When using concentratedwasher fluid, follow themanufacturer's instructionsfor adding water.

. Do not mix water withready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause the solutionto freeze and damage thewasher fluid tank and otherparts of the washer system.Also, water does not clean aswell as washer fluid.

. Fill the washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it isvery cold. This allows forfluid expansion if freezingoccurs, which could damagethe tank if it iscompletely full.

. Do not use engine coolant(antifreeze) in the windshieldwasher. It can damage thevehicle's windshield washersystem and paint.

Vehicle Care 10-23

BrakesThis vehicle has disc brakes. Discbrake pads have built-in wearindicators that make a high-pitchedwarning sound when the brake padsare worn and new pads are needed.The sound can come and go or beheard all the time the vehicle ismoving, except when applying thebrake pedal firmly.

{ WARNING

The brake wear warning soundmeans that soon the brakes willnot work well. That could lead toa crash. When the brake wearwarning sound is heard, have thevehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive withworn-out brake pads could resultin costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climatescan cause a brake squeal when thebrakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not meansomething is wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts arenecessary to help prevent brakepulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear andevenly tighten wheel nuts in theproper sequence to torquespecifications in Capacities andSpecifications on page 12‑2.

Brake linings should always bereplaced as complete axle sets.

Brake Pedal Travel

See your dealer if the brake pedaldoes not return to normal height,or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a signthat brake service might berequired.

Brake Adjustment

Every time the brakes are applied,with or without the vehicle moving,the brakes adjust for wear.

Replacing Brake System Parts

The braking system on a vehicle iscomplex. Its many parts have to beof top quality and work well togetherif the vehicle is to have really goodbraking. The vehicle was designedand tested with top-quality brakeparts. When parts of the brakingsystem are replaced, be sure to getnew, approved replacement parts.If this is not done, the brakes mightnot work properly. For example,installing disc brake pads that arewrong for the vehicle, can changethe balance between the front andrear brakes — for the worse. Thebraking performance expected canchange in many other ways if thewrong replacement brake parts areinstalled.

10-24 Vehicle Care

Brake Fluid

The brake master cylinder reservoiris filled with DOT 4 brake fluid asindicated on the reservoir cap. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for the location of thereservoir.

There are only two reasons why thebrake fluid level in the reservoirmight go down:. The brake fluid level goes down

because of normal brake liningwear. When new linings areinstalled, the fluid level goesback up.

. A fluid leak in the brakehydraulic system can also causea low fluid level. Have the brake

hydraulic system fixed, since aleak means that sooner or laterthe brakes will not work well.

Do not top off the brake fluid.Adding fluid does not correct a leak.If fluid is added when the linings areworn, there will be too much fluidwhen new brake linings areinstalled. Add or remove brake fluid,as necessary, only when work isdone on the brake hydraulic system.

{ WARNING

If too much brake fluid is added, itcan spill on the engine and burn,if the engine is hot enough. Youor others could be burned, andthe vehicle could be damaged.Add brake fluid only when work isdone on the brake hydraulicsystem.

When the brake fluid falls to a lowlevel, the brake warning light comeson. See Brake System WarningLight on page 5‑14.

What to Add

Use only new DOT 4 brake fluidfrom a sealed container. It isrecommended that the brakehydraulic system be flushed andrefilled with new DOT 4 fluid at aregular maintenance service everytwo years. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 11‑2 andRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑6.

Always clean the brake fluidreservoir cap and the area aroundthe cap before removing it. Thishelps keep dirt from entering thereservoir.

{ WARNING

With the wrong kind of fluid in thebrake hydraulic system, thebrakes might not work well. Thiscould cause a crash. Always usethe proper brake fluid.

Vehicle Care 10-25

Notice:. Using the wrong fluid canbadly damage brakehydraulic system parts. Forexample, just a few drops ofmineral-based oil, such asengine oil, in the brakehydraulic system candamage brake hydraulicsystem parts so badly thatthey will have to be replaced.Do not let someone put inthe wrong kind of fluid.

. If brake fluid is spilled on thevehicle's painted surfaces,the paint finish can bedamaged. Be careful not tospill brake fluid on thevehicle. If you do, wash it offimmediately.

BatteryRefer to the replacement numbershown on the original battery labelwhen a new battery is needed. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for battery location.

{ DANGER

Battery posts, terminals, andrelated accessories contain leadand lead compounds, chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and reproductiveharm. Wash hands after handling.

Vehicle Storage

{ WARNING

Batteries have acid that can burnyou and gas that can explode.You can be badly hurt if you arenot careful. See Jump Starting onpage 10‑68 for tips on workingaround a battery withoutgetting hurt.

Infrequent Usage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery to keep the battery fromrunning down.

Extended Storage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery or use a battery tricklecharger.

Starter Switch Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parkingbrake and the regular brake.See Parking Brake onpage 9‑29.

Do not use the acceleratorpedal, and be ready to turn offthe engine immediately if itstarts.

10-26 Vehicle Care

3. For automatic transmissionvehicles, try to start the enginein each gear. The vehicle shouldstart only in P (Park) orN (Neutral). If the vehicle startsin any other position, contactyour dealer for service.

For manual transmissionvehicles, put the shift lever inNeutral, push the clutch pedaldown halfway, and try to startthe engine. The vehicle shouldstart only when the clutch pedalis pushed down all the way tothe floor. If the vehicle startswhen the clutch pedal is notpushed all the way down,contact your dealer for service.

Automatic TransmissionShift Lock ControlFunction Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle. It should beparked on a level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake.See Parking Brake onpage 9‑29.

Be ready to apply the regularbrake immediately if the vehiclebegins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn theignition to ON/RUN, but do notstart the engine. Withoutapplying the regular brake, try tomove the shift lever out ofP (Park) with normal effort. If theshift lever moves out of P (Park),contact your dealer for service.

Ignition TransmissionLock CheckWhile parked, and with the parkingbrake set, try to turn the ignition toLOCK/OFF in each shift leverposition.. The ignition should turn to

LOCK/OFF only when the shiftlever is in P (Park).

. The ignition key should comeout only in LOCK/OFF.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Vehicle Care 10-27

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing this check,the vehicle could begin to move.You or others could be injuredand property could be damaged.Make sure there is room in frontof the vehicle in case it begins toroll. Be ready to apply the regularbrake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with thevehicle facing downhill. Keepingyour foot on the regular brake, setthe parking brake.. To check the parking brake's

holding ability: With the enginerunning and the transmission inN (Neutral), slowly remove footpressure from the regular brakepedal. Do this until the vehicle isheld by the parking brake only.

. To check the P (Park)mechanism's holding ability:With the engine running, shift toP (Park). Then release theparking brake followed by theregular brake.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Wiper Blade ReplacementWindshield wiper blades should beinspected for wear or cracking. SeeScheduled Maintenance onpage 11‑2 for more information.

It is a good idea to clean or replacethe wiper blade assembly on aregular basis or when worn. Forproper windshield wiper bladelength and type, see MaintenanceReplacement Parts on page 11‑8.

Notice: Allowing the wiper bladearm to touch the windshield whenno wiper blade is installed coulddamage the windshield. Anydamage that occurs would not becovered by your warranty. Do notallow the wiper blade arm totouch the windshield.

To replace the wiper blade:

1. Pull the wiper assembly awayfrom the windshield.

2. Lift up on the latch in the middleof the wiper blade where thewiper arm attaches.

10-28 Vehicle Care

3. With the latch open, pull thewiper blade down towards thewindshield far enough to releaseit from the J-hooked end of thewiper arm.

4. Remove the wiper blade.

5. Reverse steps 1 through 3 forwiper blade replacement.

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp aim has been preset atthe factory and should need nofurther adjustment.

However, if the vehicle is damagedin a crash, the headlamp aim maybe affected. Aim adjustment to thelow-beam headlamps may benecessary if oncoming drivers flashtheir high-beam headlamps at you(for vertical aim).

If the headlamps need to bere-aimed, it is recommended thatthe vehicle be taken to a dealer forservice.

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacementbulbs, see Replacement Bulbs onpage 10‑32.

For any bulb changing procedurenot listed in this section, contactyour dealer.

Halogen Bulbs

{ WARNING

Halogen bulbs have pressurizedgas inside and can burst if youdrop or scratch the bulb. You orothers could be injured. Be sureto read and follow the instructionson the bulb package.

Vehicle Care 10-29

Headlamps, Front TurnSignal and ParkingLamps

Base Headlamp Assembly(Passenger Side Shown, DriverSide Similar)

A. High‐Beam Headlamp

B. Turn Signal Lamp

C. Low‐Beam Headlamp/DaytimeRunning Lamp (DRL)

D. Parking Lamp

E. Side Marker Lamp

Up–Level Headlamp Assembly(Passenger Side Shown, DriverSide Similar)

A. High/Low‐Beam Headlamp ‐ Tobe replaced at the dealer only

B. Turn Signal Lamp

Low-Beam Headlamps/DaytimeRunning Lamps (DRL),High-Beam Headlamps (Base)

1. For the driver side bulb, removethe windshield washer bottlefiller neck by firmly pulling itstraight up and out of the bottle.

2. Remove the outside cap for thelow-beam headlamp/DRL bulbreplacement from the back of theheadlamp assembly.

3. Remove the inside cap for thehigh-beam headlamp bulbreplacement from the back ofthe headlamp assembly.

4. Disconnect the electricalconnector.

5. Remove the bulb socket fromthe headlamp assembly.

6. Replace the bulb in the bulbsocket.

7. Install the bulb socket in theheadlamp assembly.

8. Reverse Steps 1 through 4 toreinstall the outside or inside capon the headlamp assembly.

High/Low‐Beam Headlamps(Up-Level)

The high/low beam headlamps onthe up-level headlamp system areHigh Intensity Discharge (HID) andshould be replaced at the dealer.

10-30 Vehicle Care

Front Turn Signal/Parking/SideMarker Lamps (Base andUp-Level)

To replace the front turn signal,parking lamp, or side marker lamp:

1. For the driver side bulb, removethe windshield washer bottlefiller neck by firmly pulling itstraight up and out of the bottle.

2. Remove the bulb socket fromthe headlamp assembly byturning it counterclockwise.

3. Remove the bulb from thesocket.

4. Replace the bulb in the bulbsocket.

5. Install the bulb socket in theheadlamp assembly by turning itclockwise.

6. For the driver side, reinstall thewindshield washer bottle fillerneck by firmly pushing it straightinto the bottle. Ensure that thefiller neck clip engages into theunderhood electrical centerretainer.

Fog LampsTo replace the fog lamp bulb:

1. Locate the bulb assembly underthe front fascia.

2. Disconnect the electricalconnector from the bulbassembly.

3. Remove the bulb by turning itcounterclockwise and pulling itstraight out of the assembly.

4. Install the new bulb by turning itclockwise into the assembly.

5. Reconnect the electricalconnector to the bulb assembly.

Taillamps, Turn Signal,Stoplamps, and Back-UpLamps

A. Taillamp/Side Marker Lamp

B. Taillamp

C. Stop/Turn Signal Lamp

D. Back-up Lamp

To replace any one of these bulbs:

1. Open the trunk. See TrunkRelease on page 1‑5.

2. Remove taillamp assembly trimcover.

Vehicle Care 10-31

3. Remove the two nuts thatsecure the taillamp assembly.

4. Remove the taillamp assemblyand detach the wiring harnessconnector.

A. Back-up Lamp

B. Taillamp

C. Stop/Turn Signal Lamp

D. Taillamp/Side Marker Lamp

5. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise to remove it.

6. Pull the bulb from the socket.

7. Install a new bulb.

8. Turn the bulb socket clockwiseto install it.

9. Reverse Steps 2 through 4 toreinstall the taillamp assembly.

License Plate LampTo replace one of these bulbs:

Passenger Side Shown, DriverSide Similar

1. Push the release tab (A) towardthe lamp assembly.

2. Pull the lamp assembly down toremove.

A. Bulb Socket

B. Bulb

C. Lamp Assembly

3. Turn the bulb socket (A)counterclockwise to remove itfrom the lamp assembly (C).

4. Pull the bulb (B) straight out ofthe bulb socket.

10-32 Vehicle Care

5. Push the replacement bulbstraight into the bulb socket andturn the bulb socket clockwise toinstall it into the lamp assembly.

6. Push the lamp assembly backinto position until the release tablocks into place.

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior LampBulb

Number

Back-Up Lamp 4157 K

Fog Lamp H10

Front TurnSignal Lamp

4157 NAK

Front Side MarkerLamp (Base)

194

High‐BeamHeadlamp (Base)

H7

Exterior LampBulb

Number

License Plate Lamp 194

Low‐BeamHeadlamp/DaytimeRunningLamp (DRL)

H11

Stop Lamp/TurnSignal Lamp

4157 K

Taillamp 4157 K

For replacement bulbs not listedhere, contact your dealer.

Electrical System

Electrical SystemOverloadThe vehicle has fuses and circuitbreakers to protect against anelectrical system overload.

When the current electrical load istoo heavy, the circuit breaker opensand closes, protecting the circuituntil the current load returns tonormal or the problem is fixed. Thisgreatly reduces the chance of circuitoverload and fire caused byelectrical problems.

Vehicle Care 10-33

Fuses and circuit breakers protectthe following in the vehicle:. Headlamp Wiring. Windshield Wiper Motor. Power Windows and other

Power Accessories

Replace a bad fuse with a new oneof the identical size and rating.

If there is a problem on the road anda fuse needs to be replaced, thesame amperage fuse can beborrowed. Choose some feature ofthe vehicle that is not needed to useand replace it as soon as possible.

Headlamp Wiring

An electrical overload may causethe lamps to go on and off, or insome cases to remain off. Have theheadlamp wiring checked right awayif the lamps go on and off orremain off.

Windshield Wipers

If the wiper motor overheats due toheavy snow or ice, the windshieldwipers will stop until the motor coolsand will then restart.

Although the circuit is protectedfrom electrical overload, overloaddue to heavy snow or ice maycause wiper linkage damage.Always clear ice and heavy snowfrom the windshield before using thewindshield wipers.

If the overload is caused by anelectrical problem and not snow orice, be sure to get it fixed.

Fuses and CircuitBreakersThe wiring circuits in the vehicle areprotected from short circuits by acombination of fuses and circuitbreakers. This greatly reduces thechance of damage caused byelectrical problems.

To check a fuse, look at thesilver-colored band inside the fuse.If the band is broken or melted,replace the fuse. Be sure to replacea bad fuse with a new one of theidentical size and rating.

Fuses of the same amperage canbe temporarily borrowed fromanother fuse location, if a fuse goesout. Replace the fuse as soon aspossible.

To identify and check fuses, circuitbreakers, and relays, see EngineCompartment Fuse Block onpage 10‑34 and Instrument PanelFuse Block on page 10‑37.

10-34 Vehicle Care

Engine CompartmentFuse Block

To remove the fuse block cover,press the three retaining clips onthe cover and lift it straight up.

Notice: Spilling liquid on anyelectrical components on thevehicle may damage it. Alwayskeep the covers on any electricalcomponent.

Engine Compartment Fuse Block

FuseNumber

Usage

1TransmissionControl Module

2Engine ControlModule

3 Not Used

4 Not Used

5

Ignition,TransmissionControl Module,Engine ControlModule

6 Windshield Wiper

7 Not Used

8Fuel Injection,IgnitionSystem Even

9Fuel Injection,Ignition System Odd

10Engine ControlModule

11 Oxygen Sensor

Vehicle Care 10-35

FuseNumber

Usage

12 Starter

13Fuel System ControlModule

14Secondary AirInduction

15 Not Used

16 Vacuum Pump

17 Ignition, Airbag

18 Not Used

19 Not Used

20 Not Used

21Rear PowerWindows

22Antilock BrakeSystem Valve

23Variable EffortSteering

24Front PowerWindows

FuseNumber

Usage

25 Power Outlets

26Antilock BrakeSystem Pump

27Electric ParkingBrake

28Heated RearWindow

29Left Hand SeatLumbar

30Right Hand SeatLumbar

31 Not Used

32Body ControlModule 6

33 Heated Front Seats

34 Sunroof

35 Infotainment System

36 Not Used

FuseNumber

Usage

37Right HandHigh‐BeamHeadlamp

38Left HandHigh‐BeamHeadlamp

39 Not Used

40 Not Used

41 Vacuum Pump

42 Radiator Fan 1

43 Not Used

44Headlamp WasherSystem (if equipped)

45 Radiator Fan 2

46Terminal 87, MainRelay

47 Oxygen Sensor

48 Fog Lamps

10-36 Vehicle Care

FuseNumber

Usage

49

Right Hand LowBeam, High IntensityDischargeHeadlamp

50

Left Hand LowBeam, High IntensityDischargeHeadlamp

51 Horn

52MotorIndicator Lamp

53Ignition, Inside RearView Mirror

54 Not Used

55 Power Windows

56 Windshield Washer

57 Not Used

58 Not Used

FuseNumber

Usage

59Secondary AirInduction

60 Heated Mirrors

61 Not Used

62Canister VentSolenoid

63 Not Used

64 Not Used

65 Not Used

66 Not Used

67 Fuel System ControlModule

68 Not Used

69 Battery Sensor

70 Not Used

71 Not Used

RelayNumber

Usage

K1 Not Used

K2 Starter

K3 Cooling Fan (LHU)

K4 Front Wiper (Step 2)

K5Front Wiper (Step 1,Interval)

K6 SAI Valve

K7 Main Relay

K8 Not Used

K9Cooling Fan(LAF/LHU)

K10 Cooling Fan (LAF)

K11 Not Used

K12 Cooling Fan (LHU)

K13Cooling Fan(LAF/LHU)

K14High IntensityDischarge Lamps

Vehicle Care 10-37

RelayNumber

Usage

K15 Ignition

K16SecondaryAIR Pump

K17Window/MirrorDefog

Instrument Panel FuseBlock

The instrument panel fuse block islocated in the instrument panel, onthe driver side of the vehicle.

To access the fuses, open thestorage compartment. Press in onthe sides of the compartment torelease it from the instrument panel.Pull the door toward you to releaseit from the hinge.

Instrument Panel Fuse Block

Number Usage

1Suspension ControlModule



Number Usage

4 Radio

5

Radio Displays,Park assist,Infotainment,Module TunnelControl

6 Power Outlet 1

7 Power Outlet 2




11Front HeaterVentilation AirConditioning/Blower

12Right Hand PowerFront Seat

10-38 Vehicle Care

Number Usage

13 Left Hand PowerFront Seat

14Diagnostic LinkConnector

15 Airbag

16 Trunk Release

17Heater VentilationAir ConditioningController

18Service Fuse,Logistic Relay

19 Not Used

Number Usage

20 Automatic OccupantSensing

21Instrument PanelCluster

22Discrete LogicIgnition Switch



25 OnStar®

26 Power Outlet, Trunk

Wheels and Tires

TiresYour new vehicle comes withhigh-quality tires made by aleading tire manufacturer. If youever have questions about yourtire warranty and where toobtain service, see your vehicleWarranty booklet for details. Foradditional information refer tothe tire manufacturer.

{ WARNING

. Poorly maintained andimproperly used tires aredangerous.

. Overloading your tires cancause overheating as a resultof too much flexing. Youcould have a blowout and aserious accident. See VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑12.

(Continued)

Vehicle Care 10-39

WARNING (Continued)

. Under inflated tires pose thesame danger as overloadedtires. The resulting crashcould cause serious injury.Check all tires frequently tomaintain the recommendedpressure. Tire pressureshould be checked when yourtires are cold.

. Over inflated tires are morelikely to be cut, punctured,or broken by a suddenimpact — such as when youhit a pothole. Keep tires atthe recommended pressure.

. Worn or old tires can cause acrash. If your tread is badlyworn, replace them.

. Replace any tires that havebeen damaged by impactswith potholes, curbs, etc.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Improperly repaired tires cancause a crash. Only yourdealer or an authorized tireservice center should repair,replace, dismount, and mountthe tires.

. Do not spin the tires inexcess of 55 km/h (35 mph)on slippery surfaces suchas snow, mud, ice, etc.Excessive spinning maycause the tires to explode.

See Tire Pressure for High-SpeedOperation on page 10‑47 for inflationpressure adjustment for high-speeddriving.

Winter TiresIf you expect to drive on snow or icecovered roads often, you may wantto get winter tires for your vehicle.All season tires provide good overallperformance on most surfaces butthey may not offer the traction youwould like or the same level ofperformance as winter tires on snowor ice covered roads.

Winter tires, in general, aredesigned for increased traction onsnow and ice covered roads. Withwinter tires, there may be decreaseddry road traction, increased roadnoise, and shorter tread life. Afterswitching to winter tires, be alert forchanges in vehicle handling andbraking.

See your dealer for detailsregarding winter tire availability andproper tire selection. Also, seeBuying New Tires on page 10‑54.

10-40 Vehicle Care

If you choose to use winter tires:. Use tires of the same brand and

tread type on all four wheelpositions.

. Use only radial ply tires of thesame size, load range, andspeed rating as the originalequipment tires.

Winter tires with the same speedrating as your original equipmenttires may not be available for H, V,W, Y, and ZR speed rated tires.If you choose winter tires with alower speed rating, never exceedthe tire's maximum speed capability.

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire ismolded into its sidewall. Theexamples below show a typicalpassenger vehicle tire and acompact spare tire sidewall.

Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire Example

(A) Tire Size: The tire size isa combination of letters andnumbers used to define aparticular tire's width, height,aspect ratio, construction type,and service description. See the“Tire Size” illustration later in thissection for more detail.

(B) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performance

criteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meet orexceed all federal safetyguidelines.

(C) DOT (Department ofTransportation): TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates thatthe tire is in compliance withthe U.S. Department ofTransportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

(D) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT (Departmentof Transportation) code is theTire Identification Number(TIN). The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

Vehicle Care 10-41

(E) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(F) Uniform Tire QualityGrading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are required tograde tires based on threeperformance factors: treadwear,traction, and temperatureresistance. For more informationsee Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 10‑56 .

(G) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum loadthat can be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load.

Compact Spare Tire Example

(A) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(B) Temporary Use Only: Thecompact spare tire or temporaryuse tire has a tread life ofapproximately 5 000 km(3,000 miles) and should not bedriven at speeds over 105 km/h(65 mph). The compact sparetire is for emergency use when aregular road tire has lost air andgone flat. If your vehicle has a

compact spare tire, seeCompact Spare Tire onpage 10‑67 and If a Tire GoesFlat on page 10‑60 .

(C) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT (Departmentof Transportation) code is theTire Identification Number(TIN). The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(D) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum loadthat can be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load.

10-42 Vehicle Care

(E) Tire Inflation: Thetemporary use tire or compactspare tire should be inflated to420 kPa (60 psi). For moreinformation on tire pressure andinflation see Tire Pressure onpage 10‑46 .

(F) Tire Size : A combination ofletters and numbers define atire's width, height, aspect ratio,construction type, and servicedescription. The letter T as thefirst character in the tire sizemeans the tire is for temporaryuse only.

(G) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meet orexceed all federal safetyguidelines.

Tire Designations

Tire Size

The following illustration showsan example of a typicalpassenger vehicle tire size.

(A) Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire:The United States version of ametric tire sizing system. Theletter P as the first character inthe tire size means a passengervehicle tire engineered tostandards set by the U.S. Tireand Rim Association.

(B) Tire Width: The three‐digitnumber indicates the tire sectionwidth in millimeters fromsidewall to sidewall.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digitnumber that indicates the tireheight‐to‐width measurements.For example, if the tire sizeaspect ratio is 60, as shown initem C of the illustration, it wouldmean that the tire's sidewall is60 percent as high as it is wide.

(D) Construction Code: Aletter code is used to indicatethe type of ply construction inthe tire. The letter R meansradial ply construction; theletter D means diagonal orbias ply construction; and theletter B means belted‐bias plyconstruction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.

Vehicle Care 10-43

(F) Service Description: Thesecharacters represent the loadindex and speed rating of thetire. The load index representsthe load carrying capacity a tireis certified to carry. The speedrating is the maximum speed atire is certified to carry a load.

Tire Terminology andDefinitionsAir Pressure: The amount ofair inside the tire pressingoutward on each square inchof the tire. Air pressure isexpressed in psi (pounds persquare inch) or kPa (kilopascal).

Accessory Weight: Thismeans the combined weight ofoptional accessories. Someexamples of optionalaccessories are, automatictransmission, power steering,

power brakes, power windows,power seats, and airconditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationshipof a tire's height to its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer ofcords that is located betweenthe plies and the tread. Cordsmay be made from steel or otherreinforcing materials.

Bead: The tire bead containssteel wires wrapped by steelcords that hold the tire ontothe rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tirein which the plies are laid atalternate angles less than90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: Theamount of air pressure in a tire,measured in psi (pounds persquare inch) or kPa (kilopascal)

before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Tire Pressureon page 10‑46 .

Curb Weight: The weight of amotor vehicle with standard andoptional equipment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil,and coolant, but withoutpassengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code moldedinto the sidewall of a tiresignifying that the tire is incompliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation(DOT) motor vehicle safetystandards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumericdesignator which can alsoidentify the tire manufacturer,production plant, brand, anddate of production.

10-44 Vehicle Care

GVWR: Gross Vehicle WeightRating. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑12.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle WeightRating for the front axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑12.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle WeightRating for the rear axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑12.

Intended Outboard Sidewall:The side of an asymmetrical tire,that must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metricunit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire: Atire used on light duty trucks andsome multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index: An assignednumber ranging from 1 to 279that corresponds to the loadcarrying capacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure:The maximum air pressure towhich a cold tire can be inflated.The maximum air pressure ismolded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: Theload rating for a tire at themaximum permissible inflationpressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded VehicleWeight: The sum of curbweight, accessory weight,vehicle capacity weight, andproduction options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: Thenumber of occupants a vehicleis designed to seat multiplied by68 kg (150 lbs). See VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑12.

Occupant Distribution:Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: Theside of an asymmetrical tire thathas a particular side that facesoutward when mounted on avehicle. The side of the tire thatcontains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bearsmanufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding that ishigher or deeper than the samemoldings on the other sidewallof the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: Atire used on passenger cars andsome light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Vehicle Care 10-45

Recommended InflationPressure: Vehiclemanufacturer's recommendedtire inflation pressure as shownon the tire placard. See TirePressure on page 10‑46 andVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑12.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatictire in which the ply cords thatextend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tireand upon which the tire beadsare seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating: Analphanumeric code assigned toa tire indicating the maximumspeed at which a tire canoperate.

Traction: The friction betweenthe tire and the road surface.The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire thatcomes into contact withthe road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrowbands, sometimes called wearbars, that show across the treadof a tire when only 1.6 mm(1/16 inch) of tread remains.See When It Is Time for NewTires on page 10‑53.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire QualityGrading Standards): A tireinformation system that providesconsumers with ratings for atire's traction, temperature,and treadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tiremanufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures.

The ratings are molded into thesidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading onpage 10‑56.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: Thenumber of designated seatingpositions multiplied by 68 kg(150 lbs) plus the rated cargoload. See Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑12.

Vehicle Maximum Load on theTire: Load on an individual tiredue to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, andcargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A labelpermanently attached to avehicle showing the vehicle'scapacity weight and the originalequipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure.See “Tire and LoadingInformation Label” under VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑12.

10-46 Vehicle Care

Tire PressureTires need the correct amount ofair pressure to operateeffectively.

Notice: Do not let anyone tellyou that under‐inflation orover‐inflation is all right. It isnot. If your tires do not haveenough air (under‐inflation),you can get the following:. Tire overloading andover-heating which couldlead to a blowout.

. Premature orirregular wear.

. Poor handling.

. Reduced fuel economy.

If your tires have too much air(over‐inflation), you can getthe following:. Unusual wear.. Poor handling.

. Rough ride.

. Needless damage fromroad hazards.

A vehicle-specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to your vehicle. Thislabel shows your vehicle'soriginal equipment tires and thecorrect inflation pressures foryour tires when they are cold.The recommended cold tireinflation pressure, shown on thelabel, is the minimum amount ofair pressure needed to supportyour vehicle's maximum loadcarrying capacity.

For additional informationregarding how much weight yourvehicle can carry, and anexample of the Tire and LoadingInformation label, see VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑12. Howyou load your vehicle affectsvehicle handling and ride

comfort. Never load your vehiclewith more weight than it wasdesigned to carry.

When to Check

Check your tires once a monthor more. Do not forget to checkthe compact spare tire, if thevehicle has one. The compactspare should be at 420 kPa(60 psi). For additionalinformation regarding thecompact spare tire, seeCompact Spare Tire onpage 10‑67.

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-typegauge to check tire pressure.You cannot tell if your tires areproperly inflated simply bylooking at them. Radial tires maylook properly inflated even whenthey are under‐inflated. Checkthe tire's inflation pressure whenthe tires are cold. Cold means

Vehicle Care 10-47

your vehicle has been sitting forat least three hours or driven nomore than 1.6 km (1 mile).

Remove the valve cap from thetire valve stem. Press the tiregauge firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement.If the cold tire inflation pressurematches the recommendedpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label, nofurther adjustment is necessary.If the inflation pressure is low,add air until you reach therecommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, release airby pushing on the metal stem inthe center of the tire valve.Re‐check the tire pressure withthe tire gauge.

Be sure to put the valve capsback on the valve stems. Theyhelp prevent leaks by keepingout dirt and moisture.

Tire Pressure forHigh-Speed Operation

{ WARNING

Driving at high speeds, 160 km/h(100mph) or higher, puts anadditional strain on tires.Sustained high-speed drivingcauses excessive heat build upand can cause sudden tire failure.You could have a crash and youor others could be killed. Somehigh-speed rated tires requireinflation pressure adjustment forhigh speed operation. Whenspeed limits and road conditionsare such that a vehicle can bedriven at high speeds, make surethe tires are rated for high speedoperation, in excellent condition,and set to the correct cold tireinflation pressure for thevehicle load.

Vehicles with P235/50R18 size tiresrequire inflation pressure adjustmentwhen driving the vehicle at speedsof 160 km/h (100 mph) or higher.Set the cold inflation pressure to270 kPa (39 psi).

Vehicles with P245/40R19 size tiresrequire inflation pressure adjustmentwhen driving the vehicle at speedsof 160 km/h (100 mph) or higher.Set the cold inflation pressure to310 kPa (45 psi).

When you end this high-speeddriving, return the tires to the coldtire inflation pressure shown on theTire and Loading Information label.See Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑12 and Tire Pressure onpage 10‑46.

10-48 Vehicle Care

Tire Pressure MonitorSystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) uses radio and sensortechnology to check tire pressurelevels. The TPMS sensors monitorthe air pressure in your tires andtransmit tire pressure readings to areceiver located in the vehicle.

Each tire, including the spare (ifprovided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard ortire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tireinflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with atire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire

pressure telltale when one ormore of your tires is significantlyunder‐inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate themto the proper pressure. Driving on asignificantly under‐inflated tirecauses the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Under‐inflationalso reduces fuel efficiency and tiretread life, and may affect thevehicle's handling and stoppingability.

Please note that the TPMS isnot a substitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver'sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under‐inflation hasnot reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also beenequipped with a TPMS malfunctionindicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly.

The TPMS malfunction indicator iscombined with the low tire pressuretelltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and thenremain continuously illuminated.This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start‐ups aslong as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not beable to detect or signal low tirepressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a varietyof reasons, including the installationof replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly.Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.

See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10‑49 foradditional information.

Vehicle Care 10-49

Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) andIndustry Canada

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑15 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-210/220/310.

Tire Pressure MonitorOperationThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).The TPMS is designed to warn thedriver when a low tire pressurecondition exists. TPMS sensors aremounted onto each tire and wheelassembly, excluding the spare tireand wheel assembly. The TPMSsensors monitor the air pressure inthe vehicle's tires and transmit thetire pressure readings to a receiverlocated in the vehicle.

When a low tire pressure conditionis detected, the TPMS illuminatesthe low tire pressure warning lightlocated on the instrument panelcluster. If the warning light comeson, stop as soon as possible andinflate the tires to the recommendedpressure shown on the Tire Loadingand Information label. See VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑12.

A message to check the pressure ina specific tire also appears on theDriver Information Center (DIC)display. The low tire pressurewarning light and the DIC warningmessage come on at each ignitioncycle until the tires are inflated tothe correct inflation pressure. Usingthe DIC, tire pressure levels can beviewed by the driver. For additionalinformation and details about the

DIC operation and displays, seeDriver Information Center (DIC) onpage 5‑21.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as you start to drive. Thiscould be an early indicator that theair pressure in the tire(s) are gettinglow and need to be inflated to theproper pressure.

A Tire and Loading Informationlabel, attached to your vehicle,shows the size of your vehicle'soriginal equipment tires and thecorrect inflation pressure for yourvehicle's tires when they are cold.See Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑12, for an example of theTire and Loading Information labeland its location on your vehicle.Also see Tire Pressure onpage 10‑46.

10-50 Vehicle Care

Your vehicle's TPMS can warn youabout a low tire pressure condition,but it does not replace normal tiremaintenance. See Tire Inspectionon page 10‑52, Tire Rotation onpage 10‑52, and Tires onpage 10‑38.

Notice: Tire sealant materials arenot all the same. A non-approvedtire sealant could damage the TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS)sensors. TPMS sensor damagecaused by using an incorrect tiresealant is not covered by thevehicle warranty. Always use onlythe GM approved tire sealantavailable through your dealer orincluded in the vehicle.

TPMS Malfunction Light andMessage

The TPMS will not function properlyif one or more of the TPMS sensorsare missing or inoperable. When thesystem detects a malfunction, thelow tire warning light flashes forabout one minute and then stays onfor the remainder of the ignitioncycle. A DIC warning message isalso displayed. The low tire warninglight and DIC warning messagecome on at each ignition cycle untilthe problem is corrected. Some ofthe conditions that can cause themalfunction light and DIC messageto come on are:. One of the road tires has been

replaced with the spare tire. Thespare tire does not have aTPMS sensor. The TPMSmalfunction light and DICmessage should go off once youre‐install the road tire containingthe TPMS sensor.

. The TPMS sensor matchingprocess was started but notcompleted or not completedsuccessfully after rotating thevehicle's tires. The DIC messageand TPMS malfunction lightshould go off once the TPMSsensor matching process isperformed successfully. See“TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess” later in this section.

. One or more TPMS sensorsare missing or damaged. TheDIC message and the TPMSmalfunction light should gooff when the TPMS sensorsare installed and the sensormatching process is performedsuccessfully. See your dealer forservice.

. Replacement tires or wheels donot match your vehicle's originalequipment tires or wheels. Tiresand wheels other than thoserecommended for your vehiclecould prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. See BuyingNew Tires on page 10‑54.

Vehicle Care 10-51

. Operating electronic devices orbeing near facilities using radiowave frequencies similar to theTPMS could cause the TPMSsensors to malfunction.

If the TPMS is not functioning itcannot detect or signal a low tirecondition. See your dealer forservice if the TPMS malfunctionlight and DIC message come onand stay on.

TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess

Each TPMS sensor has a uniqueidentification code. Any time yourotate your vehicle's tires or replaceone or more of the TPMS sensors,the identification codes need to bematched to the new tire/wheelposition. The sensors are matchedto the tire/wheel positions in thefollowing order: driver side front tire,passenger side front tire, passengerside rear tire, and driver side reartire using a TPMS diagnostic tool.See your dealer for service.

The TPMS sensors can also bematched to each tire/wheel positionby increasing or decreasing thetire's air pressure. If increasing thetire's air pressure, do not exceedthe maximum inflation pressureindicated on the tire's sidewall.

To decrease air pressure out of atire you can use the pointed end ofthe valve cap, a pencil-style airpressure gage, or a key.

You have two minutes to matchthe first tire/wheel position, andfive minutes overall to match all fourtire/wheel positions. If it takes longerthan two minutes to match the firsttire and wheel, or more thanfive minutes to match all four tireand wheel positions, the matchingprocess stops and you need tostart over.

The TPMS sensor matching processis outlined below:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN withthe engine off.

3. Use the MENU button to selectthe Vehicle Information Menu inthe Driver InformationCenter (DIC).

4. Use the thumbwheel to scroll tothe Tire Pressure Menu Itemscreen.

5. Press the SET/CLR button tobegin the sensor matchingprocess.

A message asking if you aresure you want to begin thisprocess should appear.

6. Press the SET/CLR button againto confirm the selection.

The horn sounds twice to signalthe receiver is in relearn modeand the TIRE LEARNINGACTIVE message displays onthe DIC screen.

7. Start with the driver sidefront tire.

8. Remove the valve cap from thevalve cap stem. Activate theTPMS sensor by increasing ordecreasing the tire's air pressure

10-52 Vehicle Care

for five seconds, or until a hornchirp sounds. The horn chirp,which may take up to30 seconds to sound, confirmsthat the sensor identificationcode has been matched to thistire and wheel position.

9. Proceed to the passenger sidefront tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 8.

10. Proceed to the passenger siderear tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 8.

11. Proceed to the driver side reartire, and repeat the procedurein Step 8. The horn sounds twotimes to indicate the sensoridentification code has beenmatched to the driver side reartire, and the TPMS sensormatching process is no longeractive. The TIRE LEARNINGACTIVE message on the DICdisplay screen goes off.


13. Set all four tires to therecommended air pressurelevel as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.

14. Put the valve caps back on thevalve stems.

Tire InspectionWe recommend that youregularly inspect your vehicle'stires, including the spare tire,if the vehicle has one, for signsof wear or damage at least oncea month.

Always remove the tires if any ofthe following statementsare true:. You can see the indicators at

three or more places aroundthe tire.

. You can see cord or fabricshowing through the tire'srubber.

. The tread or sidewall iscracked, cut, or snaggeddeep enough to show cord orfabric.

. The tire has a bump, bulge,or split.

. The tire has a puncture, cut,or other damage that cannotbe repaired well because ofthe size or location of thedamage.

Tire RotationTires should be rotated every12 000 km (7,500 miles). SeeScheduled Maintenance onpage 11‑2.

The purpose of a regular tirerotation is to achieve a uniformwear for all tires on the vehicle.This will ensure that the vehiclecontinues to perform most like itdid when the tires were new.

Vehicle Care 10-53

Any time you notice unusualwear, rotate the tires as soonas possible and check wheelalignment. Also check fordamaged tires or wheels. SeeWhen It Is Time for New Tires onpage 10‑53 and WheelReplacement on page 10‑58.

When rotating the vehicle's tires,always use the correct rotationpattern shown here.

Do not include the compactspare tire in the tire rotation.

After the tires have beenrotated, adjust the front and rearinflation pressures as shown onthe Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑46 and Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑12.

Reset the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem. See Tire PressureMonitor Operation on page 10‑49.

Make certain that all wheel nutsare properly tightened. See“Wheel Nut Torque” underCapacities and Specifications onpage 12‑2.

{ WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove any

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

rust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, use a cloth or apaper towel to do this; but be sureto use a scraper or wire brushlater, if needed, to get all the rustor dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flaton page 10‑60.

When It Is Time for NewTiresVarious factors, such asmaintenance, temperatures, drivingspeeds, vehicle loading, and roadconditions influence when you neednew tires.

10-54 Vehicle Care

One way to tell when it is time fornew tires is to check the treadwearindicators, which appear when thetires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in) orless of tread remaining. See TireInspection on page 10‑52 and TireRotation on page 10‑52 foradditional information.

The rubber in tires ages over time.This is also true for the spare tire,if the vehicle has one, even if it isnot being used. Multiple conditionsaffect how fast this aging takesplace, including temperatures,loading conditions, and inflationpressure maintenance. Tires will

typically need to be replaced due towear before they may need to bereplaced due to age. Consult the tiremanufacturer for more informationon when tires should be replaced.

Vehicle Storage

Tires age when stored normallymounted on a parked vehicle. Parka vehicle that will be stored for atleast a month in a cool, dry, cleanarea away from direct sunlight toslow aging. This area should be freeof grease, gasoline, or othersubstances that can deterioraterubber.

Parking for an extended period cancause flat spots on the tires thatmay result in vibrations whiledriving. When storing a vehicle forat least a month, remove the tires orraise the vehicle to reduce theweight from the tires.

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matchedspecific tires for your vehicle.The original equipment tiresinstalled on your vehicle, whenit was new, were designed tomeet General Motors TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification (TPC Spec)system rating. If you needreplacement tires, GM stronglyrecommends that you get tireswith the same TPC Spec rating.This way, your vehicle willcontinue to have tires that aredesigned to give the sameperformance and vehicle safety,during normal use, as theoriginal tires.

GM's exclusive TPC Specsystem considers over a dozencritical specifications that impactthe overall performance of yourvehicle, including brake systemperformance, ride and handling,

Vehicle Care 10-55

traction control, and tirepressure monitoringperformance. GM's TPC Specnumber is molded onto the tire'ssidewall near the tire size. If thetires have an all‐season treaddesign, the TPC Spec numberwill be followed by an MS formud and snow. See TireSidewall Labeling on page 10‑40for additional information.

GM recommends replacing tiresin sets of four. This is becauseuniform tread depth on all tireswill help keep your vehicleperforming most like it did whenthe tires were new. Replacingless than a full set of tires canaffect the braking and handlingperformance of your vehicle.See Tire Inspection on page 10‑52and Tire Rotation on page10‑52for information on proper tirerotation.

{ WARNING

Tires could explode duringimproper service. You or otherscould be injured or killed if youattempt to mount or dismount atire. Only your dealer or anauthorized tire service centershould mount and dismount thetires.

{ WARNING

Mixing tires could cause youto lose control while driving.If you mix tires of differentsizes, brands, or types (radialand bias-belted tires), thevehicle may not handleproperly, and you could havea crash. Using tires of differentsizes, brands, or types mayalso cause damage to yourvehicle. Be sure to use the

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

correct size, brand, and typeof tires on all wheels. It is allright to drive with yourcompact spare temporarily, asit was developed for use onyour vehicle. See CompactSpare Tire on page 10‑67.

{ WARNING

If you use bias-ply tires on thevehicle, the wheel rim flangescould develop cracks aftermany miles of driving. A tireand/or wheel could failsuddenly, causing a crash.Use only radial-ply tires withthe wheels on the vehicle.

If you must replace yourvehicle's tires with those that donot have a TPC Spec number,make sure they are the same

10-56 Vehicle Care

size, load range, speed rating,and construction type (radial andbias‐belted tires) as yourvehicle's original tires.

Vehicles that have a tirepressure monitoring systemcould give an inaccuratelow‐pressure warning if non‐TPCSpec rated tires are installedon your vehicle. Non‐TPCSpec rated tires may give alow‐pressure warning that ishigher or lower than the properwarning level you would get withTPC Spec rated tires. See TirePressure Monitor System onpage 10‑48.

Your vehicle's originalequipment tires are listed on theTire and Loading Informationlabel. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑12 for moreinformation about the Tire andLoading Information label and itslocation on your vehicle.

Different Size Tires andWheelsIf you add wheels or tires that are adifferent size than your originalequipment wheels and tires, thiscould affect the way your vehicleperforms, including its braking, rideand handling characteristics,stability, and resistance to rollover.Additionally, if your vehicle haselectronic systems such as antilockbrakes, rollover airbags, tractioncontrol, and electronic stabilitycontrol, the performance of thesesystems can be affected.

{ WARNING

If you add different sized wheels,your vehicle may not provide anacceptable level of performanceand safety if tires notrecommended for those wheelsare selected. You may increasethe chance that you will crash and

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

suffer serious injury. Only use GMspecific wheel and tire systemsdeveloped for your vehicle, andhave them properly installed by aGM certified technician.

See Buying New Tires onpage 10‑54 and Accessories andModifications on page 10‑3 foradditional information.

Uniform Tire QualityGradingQuality grades can be foundwhere applicable on the tiresidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width. Forexample:

Treadwear 200 Traction AATemperature A

The following information relatesto the system developed by theUnited States National Highway

Vehicle Care 10-57

Traffic Safety Administration(NHTSA), which grades tiresby treadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. Thisapplies only to vehicles sold inthe United States. The gradesare molded on the sidewalls ofmost passenger car tires. TheUniform Tire Quality Grading(UTQG) system does not applyto deep tread, winter-type snowtires, space-saver, or temporaryuse spare tires, tires withnominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),or to some limited-productiontires.

While the tires available onGeneral Motors passenger carsand light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, theymust also conform to federalsafety requirements andadditional General Motors TirePerformance Criteria (TPC)standards.

All Passenger Car Tires MustConform to Federal SafetyRequirements In Addition ToThese Grades.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on aspecified government testcourse. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one anda half (1½) times as well on thegovernment course as a tiregraded 100. The relativeperformance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and maydepart significantly from thenorm due to variations indriving habits, service practicesand differences in roadcharacteristics and climate.

Traction – AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, fromhighest to lowest, are AA, A, B,and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on wetpavement as measured undercontrolled conditions onspecified government testsurfaces of asphalt andconcrete. A tire marked C mayhave poor traction performance.Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not includeacceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

Temperature – A, B, C

The temperature grades areA (the highest), B, and C,representing the tire's resistanceto the generation of heat and itsability to dissipate heat whentested under controlled

10-58 Vehicle Care

conditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause thematerial of the tire to degenerateand reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature canlead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a levelof performance which allpassenger car tires must meetunder the Federal Motor SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades B andA represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimumrequired by law. Warning: Thetemperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that isproperly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and TireBalanceThe tires and wheels on the vehiclewere aligned and balanced carefullyat the factory to give the longest tirelife and best overall performance.Adjustments to wheel alignment andtire balancing will not be necessaryon a regular basis. However, if thereis unusual tire wear or the vehiclepulls to one side or the other, thealignment should be checked. If thevehicle vibrates when driving on asmooth road, the tires and wheelsmight need to be rebalanced. Seeyour dealer for proper diagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent,cracked, or badly rusted orcorroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, andwheel nuts should be replaced.If the wheel leaks air, replace it(except some aluminum wheels,

which can sometimes be repaired).See your dealer if any of theseconditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind ofwheel you need.

Each new wheel should have thesame load-carrying capacity,diameter, width, offset, and bemounted the same way as the one itreplaces.

If you need to replace any of thewheels, wheel bolts, wheel nuts,or Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) sensors, replace them onlywith new GM original equipmentparts. This way, you will be sure tohave the right wheel, wheel bolts,wheel nuts, and TPMS sensors forthe vehicle.

{ WARNING

Using the wrong replacementwheels, wheel bolts, or wheelnuts on your vehicle can be

(Continued)

Vehicle Care 10-59

WARNING (Continued)

dangerous. It could affect thebraking and handling of yourvehicle, make your tires lose airand make you lose control. Youcould have a collision in whichyou or others could be injured.Always use the correct wheel,wheel bolts, and wheel nuts forreplacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel canalso cause problems with bearinglife, brake cooling, speedometeror odometer calibration,headlamp aim, bumper height,vehicle ground clearance, and tireor tire chain clearance to thebody and chassis.

See If a Tire Goes Flat onpage 10‑60 for more information.

Used Replacement Wheels

{ WARNING

Putting a used wheel on thevehicle is dangerous. You cannotknow how it has been used orhow far it has been driven.It could fail suddenly and cause acrash. If you have to replace awheel, use a new GM originalequipment wheel.

Tire Chains

{ WARNING

Do not use tire chains. There isnot enough clearance. Tire chainsused on a vehicle without theproper amount of clearance cancause damage to the brakes,suspension or other vehicle parts.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

The area damaged by the tirechains could cause you to losecontrol of the vehicle and you orothers may be injured in a crash.

Use another type of tractiondevice only if its manufacturerrecommends it for use on thevehicle and tire size combinationand road conditions. Follow thatmanufacturer's instructions. Tohelp avoid damage to the vehicle,drive slowly, readjust or removethe device if it is contacting thevehicle, and do not spin thevehicle's wheels. If you do findtraction devices that will fit, installthem on the front tires.

10-60 Vehicle Care

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blowoutwhile you are driving, especially ifyou maintain your vehicle's tiresproperly. If air goes out of a tire, it ismuch more likely to leak out slowly.But if you should ever have ablowout, here are a few tips aboutwhat to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tirecreates a drag that pulls the vehicletoward that side. Take your foot offthe accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer tomaintain lane position, and thengently brake to a stop well out of thetraffic lane.

A rear blowout, particularly on acurve, acts much like a skid andmay require the same correctionyou would use in a skid. In any rearblowout remove your foot from theaccelerator pedal. Get the vehicleunder control by steering the wayyou want the vehicle to go. It may

be very bumpy and noisy, but youcan still steer. Gently brake to astop, well off the road if possible.

{ WARNING

Driving on a flat tire will causepermanent damage to the tire.Re-inflating a tire after it has beendriven on while severelyunder-inflated or flat may cause ablowout and a serious crash.Never attempt to re-inflate a tirethat has been driven on whileseverely under-inflated or flat.Have your dealer or an authorizedtire service center repair orreplace the flat tire as soon aspossible.

{ WARNING

Lifting a vehicle and gettingunder it to do maintenance orrepairs is dangerous without theappropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only forchanging a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others couldbe badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 6‑3.

Vehicle Care 10-61

{ WARNING

Changing a tire can bedangerous. The vehicle can slipoff the jack and roll over or fall onyou or other people. You and theycould be badly injured or evenkilled. Find a level place tochange your tire. To help preventthe vehicle from moving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put an automatictransmission shift lever inP (Park), or shift a manualtransmission to 1 (First) orR (Reverse).

3. Turn off the engine and donot restart while the vehicleis raised.

4. Do not allow passengers toremain in the vehicle.

To be certain the vehicle will notmove, put blocks at the front andrear of the tire farthest away from

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

the one being changed. Thatwould be the tire on the otherside, at the opposite end of thevehicle.

When the vehicle has a flat tire (B),use the following example as aguide to assist you in the placementof wheel blocks (A).

A. Wheel Block

B. Flat Tire

The following information explainshow to repair or change a tire.

Tire Changing

Removing the Spare Tire andTools

To access the spare tire and tools:

1. Open the trunk.

2. Remove the spare tire cover.

10-62 Vehicle Care

3. Turn the retainer nutcounterclockwise and removethe spare tire. Place the sparetire next to the tire beingchanged.

4. The jack and tools are storedbelow the spare tire. Removethem from their container andplace them near the tire beingchanged.

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire

Take off the wheel cover or centercap, if the vehicle has one, to reachthe wheel bolts.

1. Do a safety check beforeproceeding. See If a Tire GoesFlat on page 10‑60 for moreinformation.

2. Turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise to loosen andremove the wheel nut caps.

Do not try to remove plastic capsfrom the cover or center cap.

3. Pull the cover or center capaway from the wheel. Store thewheel cover in the cargo areauntil you have the flat tirerepaired or replaced.

4. Turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise to loosen allthe wheel nuts, but do notremove them yet.

5. Place the jack near the flat tire.

Vehicle Care 10-63

Notice: Make sure that the jacklift head is in the correct positionor you may damage your vehicle.The repairs would not be coveredby your warranty.

6. Position the jack lift head at thejack location nearest the flat tire.The location is indicated by amark on the bottom edge of thefront and rear door plasticmolding. The jack must not beused in any other position.

Place the jack notch, as shown.

7. Put the compact spare tirenear you.

{ WARNING

Getting under a vehicle when it isjacked up is dangerous. If thevehicle slips off the jack, youcould be badly injured or killed.Never get under a vehicle when itis supported only by a jack.

{ WARNING

Raising your vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned candamage the vehicle and evenmake the vehicle fall. To helpavoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lifthead into the proper locationbefore raising the vehicle.

{ WARNING

Lifting a vehicle and getting underit to do maintenance or repairs isdangerous without theappropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only forchanging a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others couldbe badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.

10-64 Vehicle Care

8. Attach the jack handle extensiononto the jack by sliding the hookthrough the end of the jack.

9. Place the jack under the vehicle.

10. Raise the vehicle by turning thejack handle clockwise. Raisethe vehicle far enough off theground so there is enoughroom for the road tire to clearthe ground.

11. Remove all of the wheel nuts.

12. Remove the flat tire.

{ WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, use a cloth or a

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

paper towel to do this; but be sureto use a scraper or wire brushlater, if needed, to get all the rustor dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flaton page 10‑60.

13. Remove any rust or dirt fromthe wheel bolts, mountingsurfaces, and spare wheel.

14. Place the compact spare tireon the wheel-mounting surface.

Vehicle Care 10-65

{ WARNING

Never use oil or grease on boltsor nuts because the nuts mightcome loose. The vehicle's wheelcould fall off, causing a crash.

15. Reinstall the wheel nuts.Tighten each nut by hand untilthe wheel is held againstthe hub.

16. Lower the vehicle by turningthe jack handlecounterclockwise.

{ WARNING

Wheel nuts that are improperly orincorrectly tightened can causethe wheels to become loose orcome off. The wheel nuts shouldbe tightened with a torque wrenchto the proper torque specificationafter replacing. Follow the torquespecification supplied by the

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

aftermarket manufacturer whenusing accessory locking wheelnuts. See Capacities andSpecifications on page 12‑2 fororiginal equipment wheel nuttorque specifications.

Notice: Improperly tightenedwheel nuts can lead to brakepulsation and rotor damage. Toavoid expensive brake repairs,evenly tighten the wheel nuts inthe proper sequence and to theproper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications onpage 12‑2 for the wheel nuttorque specification.

17. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly ina crisscross sequence, asshown.

18. Lower the jack all the way andremove the jack from under thevehicle.

19. Tighten the wheel nuts firmlywith the wheel wrench.

10-66 Vehicle Care

When reinstalling the wheel cover orcenter cap on the full-size tire,tighten all five plastic caps handsnug with the aid of the wheelwrench and tighten them withthe wheel wrench an additionalone‐quarter of a turn.

Notice: Wheel covers will not fiton your vehicle's compact spare.If you try to put a wheel cover onthe compact spare, the cover orthe spare could be damaged.

Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

{ WARNING

Storing a jack, a tire, or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these inthe proper place.

To store the flat tire:

1. If the flat tire is larger than thespare tire, use the longermounting bolt from the tool bag.

2. Slide the shorter bolt to removeit from the floor and insert thelonger one.

3. Replace the jack and tools intheir original storage location.

4. Place the tire, lying flat, facingup in the spare tire well.

5. Turn the retainer nut clockwiseto secure the tire.

6. Place the floor cover on thewheel.

Vehicle Care 10-67

To store the compact spare tire, usethe shorter mounting bolt.

The compact spare is for temporaryuse only. Replace the compactspare tire with a full-size tire assoon as you can.

Compact Spare Tire

{ WARNING

Driving with more than onecompact spare tire at a time couldresult in loss of braking andhandling. This could lead to acrash and you or others could beinjured. Use only one compactspare tire at a time.

If this vehicle has a compact sparetire it was fully inflated when thevehicle was new, however, it canlose air after a time. Check theinflation pressure regularly. It shouldbe 420 kPa (60 psi).

After installing the compact spareon the vehicle, stop as soon aspossible and make sure the sparetire is correctly inflated. Thecompact spare is made to performwell at speeds up to 105 km/h(65 mph) for distances up to5 000 km (3,000 miles), so you canfinish your trip and have the full-sizetire repaired or replaced at yourconvenience. Of course, it is best toreplace the spare with a full-size tireas soon as possible. The spare tirewill last longer and be in goodshape in case it is needed again.

Notice: When the compact spareis installed, do not take thevehicle through an automatic carwash with guide rails. Thecompact spare can get caught onthe rails which can damage thetire, wheel and other parts of thevehicle.

Do not use the compact spare onother vehicles.

Do not mix the compact spare tire orwheel with other wheels or tires.They will not fit. Keep the spare tireand its wheel together.

Notice: Tire chains will not fit thecompact spare. Using them candamage the vehicle and candamage the chains too. Do notuse tire chains on the compactspare.

10-68 Vehicle Care

Jump StartingIf the battery has run down, try touse another vehicle and somejumper cables to start your vehicle.Be sure to use the following steps todo it safely.

{ WARNING

Batteries can hurt you. They canbe dangerous because:

. They contain acid that canburn you.

. They contain gas that canexplode or ignite.

. They contain enoughelectricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these stepsexactly, some or all of thesethings can hurt you.

Notice: Ignoring these stepscould result in costly damage tothe vehicle that would not becovered by the warranty.

Trying to start the vehicle bypushing or pulling it will notwork, and it could damage thevehicle.

The jump start negative (A) is thepower steering line fitting and bolton the top of the powersteering pump.

2.0L Engine Shown, 2.4L Similar

The jump start positive (B) islocated under a trim cover in theengine compartment on the driverside of the vehicle.

2.0L Engine Shown, 2.4L Similar

These locations are used instead ofa direct connection to the battery.

1. Check the other vehicle. It musthave a 12-volt battery with anegative ground system.

Notice: If the other vehicle'ssystem is not a 12-volt systemwith a negative ground, bothvehicles can be damaged. Onlyuse vehicles with 12-volt systemswith negative grounds to jumpstart your vehicle.

Vehicle Care 10-69

2. Position the two vehicles so thatthey are not touching.

3. Set the parking brake firmly andput the shift lever in P (Park).See Shifting Into Park onpage 9‑21.

Notice: If you leave the radio orother accessories on during thejump starting procedure, theycould be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by thewarranty. Always turn off theradio and other accessories whenjump starting the vehicle.

4. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFFand switch off all lights andaccessories in both vehicles,except the hazard warningflashers if needed.

{ WARNING

An electric fan can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can injure you. Keep hands,clothing and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

{ WARNING

Using a match near a battery cancause battery gas to explode.People have been hurt doing this,and some have been blinded.Use a flashlight if you need morelight.

Be sure the battery has enoughwater. You do not need to addwater to the battery installed inyour new vehicle. But if a batteryhas filler caps, be sure the rightamount of fluid is there. If it is low,

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

add water to take care of thatfirst. If you don't, explosive gascould be present.

Battery fluid contains acid thatcan burn you. Do not get it onyou. If you accidentally get it inyour eyes or on your skin, flushthe place with water and getmedical help immediately.

{ WARNING

Fans or other moving engineparts can injure you badly. Keepyour hands away from movingparts once the engine is running.

10-70 Vehicle Care

5. Connect one end of the redpositive (+) cable to the jumpstart positive (+) post (A). Use aremote positive (+) terminal if thevehicle has one.

6. Do not let the other end of thered positive (+) cable touchmetal. Connect it to thepositive (+) terminal of the goodbattery (B). Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehiclehas one.

7. Connect one end of the blacknegative (–) cable to thenegative (–) terminal of the goodbattery (C). Use a remotenegative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.

Do not let the other end touchanything until the next step. Theother end of the negative (–)cable does not go to the deadbattery. It goes to a heavy,unpainted metal engine part orto a remote negative (–) terminalon the vehicle with the deadbattery.

8. Connect the other end of theblack negative (–) cable to anunpainted heavy metal enginepart (D) away from the deadbattery, but not near engineparts that move.

9. Start the engine in the vehiclewith the good battery and runthe engine at idle speed for atleast four minutes.

10. Try to start the vehicle that hadthe dead battery. If it will notstart after a few tries, itprobably needs service.

Notice: If the jumper cables areconnected or removed in thewrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage thevehicle. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always connect and remove thejumper cables in the correctorder, making sure that thecables do not touch each otheror other metal.

Vehicle Care 10-71

Jumper Cable Removal

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal EnginePart or Remote Negative (–)Terminal

B. Good Battery or RemotePositive (+) and RemoteNegative (–) Terminals

C. Dead Battery or RemotePositive (+) Terminal

To disconnect the jumper cablesfrom both vehicles:

1. Disconnect the blacknegative (−) cable from thevehicle that had the deadbattery.

2. Disconnect the blacknegative (−) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+)cable from the vehicle with thegood battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+)cable from the other vehicle.

5. Return the caps over thepositive (+) and negative (–)terminals to their originalpositions.

Towing

Towing the VehicleNotice: To avoid damage, thedisabled vehicle should be towedwith all four wheels off theground. Care must be taken withvehicles that have low groundclearance and/or specialequipment.

Consult your dealer or aprofessional towing service if thedisabled vehicle must be towed.See Roadside Assistance Programon page 13‑5.

To tow the vehicle behind anothervehicle for recreational purposes,such as behind a motor home, see“Recreational Vehicle Towing” in thissection.

10-72 Vehicle Care

Recreational VehicleTowingRecreational vehicle towing meanstowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle, such as behind amotorhome. The two most commontypes of recreational vehicle towingare known as dinghy towing anddolly towing. Dinghy towing istowing the vehicle with all fourwheels on the ground. Dolly towingis towing the vehicle with twowheels on the ground and twowheels up on a device known as adolly.

Here are some important things toconsider before recreational vehicletowing:. What is the towing capacity

of the towing vehicle? Be sureto read the tow vehiclemanufacturer'srecommendations.

. What is the distance that will betravelled? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and howlong they can tow.

. Is the proper towing equipmentgoing to be used? See yourdealer or trailering professionalfor additional advice andequipment recommendations.

. Is the vehicle ready to betowed? Just as preparing thevehicle for a long trip, make surethe vehicle is prepared to betowed.

Dinghy Towing From the Front

When dinghy towing, the vehicleshould be run at the beginning ofeach day and at each RV fuel stopfor about five minutes. This willensure proper lubrication oftransmission components.

Use the following procedure todinghy tow the vehicle from the frontwith all four wheels on the ground:

1. Position the vehicle being towedbehind the tow vehicle and shiftthe transmission to P (Park).

2. Turn the engine off and firmly setthe parking brake.

3. Following the manufacturer'sinstructions, securely attach thevehicle being towed to the towvehicle.

4. Turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY and shift thetransmission to N (Neutral).

Vehicle Care 10-73

5. Release the parking brake onlyafter the vehicle being towed isfirmly attached to the towingvehicle.

When towing the vehicle forextended periods of time, start thevehicle as often as possible toprevent battery drain. This shouldbe done when the tow vehicle isparked.

Dinghy Towing From the Rear

The vehicle was not designed to betowed from the rear with all fourwheels on the ground.

Dolly Towing From the Front

Vehicles with front-wheel drive canbe dolly towed from the front.

Use the following procedure to dollytow the vehicle from the front:

1. Attach the dolly to the towvehicle following the dollymanufacturer's instructions.

2. Drive the front wheels onto thedolly.

3. Shift the transmission toP (Park).

4. Firmly set the parking brake.

5. Use an adequate clampingdevice designed for towing toensure that the front wheels arelocked into the straight-aheadposition.

6. Secure the vehicle to the dollyfollowing the manufacturer'sinstructions.

7. Release the parking brake onlyafter the vehicle being towed isfirmly attached to the towingvehicle.


10-74 Vehicle Care

Dolly Towing From the Rear

The vehicle cannot be dolly towedfrom the rear.

Appearance Care

Exterior Care

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses

Use only lukewarm or cold water, asoft cloth, and a car washing soapto clean exterior lamps and lenses.Follow instructions under “Washingthe Vehicle” later in this section.

Finish Care

Occasional waxing or mild polishingof the vehicle by hand may benecessary to remove residue fromthe paint finish. Approved cleaningproducts can be obtained from yourdealer.

If the vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, the clearcoatgives more depth and gloss to thecolored basecoat. Always usewaxes and polishes that arenon-abrasive and made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish.

Notice: Machine compounding oraggressive polishing on abasecoat/clearcoat paint finishmay damage it. Use onlynon-abrasive waxes and polishesthat are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on thevehicle.

Foreign materials such as calciumchloride and other salts, ice meltingagents, road oil and tar, tree sap,bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., candamage the vehicle's finish if theyremain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible.If necessary, use non-abrasivecleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreignmatter.

Exterior painted surfaces aresubject to aging, weather, andchemical fallout that can take theirtoll over a period of years. To keepthe paint finish looking new, keepthe vehicle garaged or coveredwhenever possible.

Vehicle Care 10-75

Protecting Exterior Bright MetalParts

Bright metal parts should becleaned regularly to keep theirluster. Wash with water or usechrome polish on chrome orstainless steel trim, if necessary.

Use special care with aluminumtrim. To avoid damaging protectivetrim, never use auto or chromepolish, steam, or caustic soapto clean aluminum. A coating ofwax, rubbed to high polish, isrecommended for all bright metalparts.

Washing the Vehicle

To preserve the vehicle's finish,keep it clean by washing it often.

Do not wash the vehicle in directsunlight and use a carwashing soap.

Notice: Certain cleaners containchemicals that can damage theemblems or nameplates on thevehicle. Check the cleaningproduct label. If it states that it

should not be used on plasticparts, do not use it on the vehicleor damage may occur and itwould not be covered by thewarranty.

Do not use cleaning agents that arepetroleum based or that containacid or abrasives, as they candamage the paint, metal, or plasticon the vehicle. Approved cleaningproducts can be obtained from yourdealer. Follow all manufacturerdirections regarding correct productusage, necessary safetyprecautions, and appropriatedisposal of any vehicle careproduct.

Rinse the vehicle well, beforewashing and after, to remove allcleaning agents completely. If theyare allowed to dry on the surface,they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel toavoid surface scratches and waterspotting.

High pressure car washes couldcause water to enter the vehicle.Avoid using high pressure washescloser than 30 cm (12 in) to thesurface of the vehicle. Use of powerwashers exceeding 8,274 kPa(1,200 psi) can result in damage orremoval of paint and decals.

Notice: Conveyor systems onsome automatic car washes coulddamage the vehicle. There maynot be enough clearance for theundercarriage. Check with the carwash manager before using theautomatic car wash.

Weatherstrips

Silicone grease on weatherstrips willmake them last longer, seal better,and not stick or squeak. Applysilicone grease with a clean cloth.During very cold, damp weatherfrequent application may berequired. See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 11‑6.

10-76 Vehicle Care

Wheels and Trim—Aluminumor Chrome

The vehicle may have eitheraluminum or chrome-plated wheels.

Keep the wheels clean using a soft,clean cloth with mild soap andwater. Rinse with clean water. Afterrinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft,clean towel. A wax may then beapplied.

Notice: Chrome wheels and otherchrome trim may be damaged ifthe vehicle is not washed afterdriving on roads that have beensprayed with magnesium, calciumor sodium chloride. Thesechlorides are used on roads forconditions such as ice and dust.Always wash the vehicle'schrome with soap and water afterexposure.

Notice: Using strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes,cleaners, brushes, or cleanersthat contain acid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels, coulddamage the surface of the

wheel(s). The repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Use only approvedcleaners on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels.

The surface of these wheels issimilar to the painted surface of thevehicle. Do not use strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes,abrasive cleaners, cleaners withacid, or abrasive cleaning brusheson them because the surface couldbe damaged. Do not use chromepolish on aluminum wheels.

Notice: Using chrome polish onaluminum wheels could damagethe wheels. The repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Use chrome polish onchrome wheels only.

Use chrome polish only onchrome-plated wheels, but avoidany painted surface of the wheel,and buff off immediately afterapplication.

Notice: Driving the vehiclethrough an automatic car washthat has silicone carbide tirecleaning brushes, could damagethe aluminum or chrome-platedwheels. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Never drive a vehicle that hasaluminum or chrome-platedwheels through an automatic carwash that uses silicone carbidetire cleaning brushes.

Windshield and Wiper Blades

Clean the outside of the windshieldwith glass cleaner.

Clean the rubber blades using a lint‐free cloth or paper towel soakedwith windshield washer fluid or amild detergent. Wash the windshieldthoroughly when cleaning theblades. Bugs, road grime, sap, anda buildup of vehicle wash/waxtreatments may cause wiperstreaking. Replace the wiper bladesif they are worn or damaged.

Vehicle Care 10-77

Wipers can be damaged by:. Extreme dusty conditions. Sand and salt. Heat and sun. Snow and ice, without proper

removal

Tires

Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner toclean the tires.

Notice: Using petroleum-basedtire dressing products on thevehicle may damage the paintfinish and/or tires. When applyinga tire dressing, always wipe offany overspray from all paintedsurfaces on the vehicle.

Sheet Metal Damage

If the vehicle is damaged andrequires sheet metal repair orreplacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosionmaterial to parts repaired orreplaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacementparts will provide the corrosionprotection while maintaining thevehicle warranty.

Finish Damage

Any stone chips, fractures, or deepscratches in the finish should berepaired right away. Bare metal willcorrode quickly and may developinto major repair expense.

Minor chips and scratches can berepaired with touch-up materialsavailable from your dealer. Largerareas of finish damage can becorrected in your dealer's body andpaint shop.

Underbody Maintenance

Chemicals used for ice and snowremoval and dust control can collecton the underbody. If these are notremoved, corrosion and rust candevelop on the underbody partssuch as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,and exhaust system even thoughthey have corrosion protection.

At least every spring, flush thesematerials from the underbody withplain water. Clean any areas wheremud and debris can collect. Dirtpacked in close areas of the frameshould be loosened before beingflushed. Your dealer or anunderbody car washing system cando this.

Chemical Paint Spotting

Some weather and atmosphericconditions can create a chemicalfallout. Airborne pollutants can fallupon and attack painted surfaces onthe vehicle. This damage can taketwo forms: blotchy, ring-shapeddiscolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paintsurface.

Interior CareThe vehicle's interior will continue tolook its best if it is cleaned often.Dust and dirt can accumulate on theupholstery and cause damage tothe carpet, fabric, leather, and

10-78 Vehicle Care

plastic surfaces. Stains should beremoved quickly as extreme heatcould cause them to set rapidly.

Lighter colored interiors may requiremore frequent cleaning.Newspapers and garments that cantransfer color to home furnishingscan also transfer color to thevehicle's interior.

Remove dust from small buttonsand knobs with a small brush withsoft bristles.

Your dealer has products forcleaning the vehicle's interior. Whencleaning the vehicle's interior, onlyuse cleaners specifically designedfor the surfaces that are beingcleaned. Permanent damage canresult from using cleaners onsurfaces for which they were notintended. Apply the cleaner directlyto the cleaning cloth to preventover-spray. Remove any accidentalover-spray from other surfacesimmediately.

Notice: Using abrasive cleanerswhen cleaning glass surfaces onthe vehicle, could scratch theglass and/or cause damage to therear window defogger. Whencleaning the glass on the vehicle,use only a soft cloth and glasscleaner.

Cleaners can contain solvents thatcan become concentrated in thevehicle's interior. Before usingcleaners, read and adhere to allsafety instructions on the label.While cleaning the vehicle's interior,maintain adequate ventilation byopening the vehicle's doors andwindows.

Do not clean the interior using thefollowing cleaners or techniques:. Never use a knife or any other

sharp object to remove a soilfrom any interior surface.

. Never use a stiff brush. It cancause damage to the vehicle'sinterior surfaces.

. Never apply heavy pressure orrub aggressively with a cleaningcloth. Use of heavy pressure candamage the interior and doesnot improve the effectiveness ofsoil removal.

. Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps.Avoid laundry detergents ordishwashing soaps withdegreasers. Using too muchsoap will leave a residue thatleaves streaks and attracts dirt.For liquid cleaners, about20 drops per 3.78 L (1 gal) ofwater is a good guide.

. Do not heavily saturate theupholstery while cleaning.

. Damage to the vehicle's interiormay result from the use of manyorganic solvents such as naptha,alcohol, etc.

Fabric/Carpet

Use a vacuum cleaner with a softbrush attachment to remove dustand loose dirt. A canister vacuumwith a beater bar in the nozzle may

Vehicle Care 10-79

only be used on floor carpet andcarpeted floor mats. For soils,always try to remove them first withplain water or club soda. Beforecleaning, gently remove as much ofthe soil as possible using one of thefollowing techniques:. For liquids: gently blot the

remaining soil with a papertowel. Allow the soil to absorbinto the paper towel until nomore can be removed.

. For solid dry soils: remove asmuch as possible and thenvacuum.

To clean:

1. Saturate a lint-free, clean whitecloth with water or club soda.

2. Remove excess moisture.

3. Start on the outside edge of thesoil and gently rub toward thecenter. Continue cleaning, usinga clean area of the cloth eachtime it becomes soiled.

4. Continue to gently rub thesoiled area.

5. If the soil is not completelyremoved, use a mild soapsolution and repeat the cleaningprocess with plain water.

If any of the soil remains, acommercial fabric cleaner or spotlifter may be necessary. Test a smallhidden area for colorfastness beforeusing a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. If the locallycleaned area gives any impressionthat a ring formation may result,clean the entire surface.

A paper towel can be used to blotexcess moisture from the fabric orcarpet after the cleaning process.

Leather

To remove dust, a soft clothdampened with water can be used.If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a soft cloth dampenedwith a mild soap solution can beused. Allow the leather to drynaturally. Do not use heat, steam,spot lifters or spot removers,or shoe polish on leather. Manycommercial leather cleaners and

coatings that are sold to preserveand protect leather maypermanently change theappearance and feel of the leatherand are not recommended. Do notuse silicone or wax-based products,or those containing organic solventsto clean the vehicle's interiorbecause they can alter theappearance by increasing the glossin a non-uniform manner.

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, andOther Plastic Surfaces

To remove dust, a soft clothdampened with water can be used.If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a clean soft clothdampened with a mild soap solutioncan be used to gently remove dustand dirt. Never use spot lifters orremovers on plastic surfaces.Many commercial cleaners andcoatings that are sold to preserveand protect soft plastic surfacesmay permanently change theappearance and feel of the interiorand are not recommended. Do not

10-80 Vehicle Care

use silicone or wax-based products,or those containing organic solventsto clean the vehicle's interiorbecause they can alter theappearance by increasing the glossin a non-uniform manner.

Some commercial products mayincrease gloss on the instrumentpanel. The increase in gloss maycause annoying reflections in thewindshield and even make it difficultto see through the windshield undercertain conditions.

Care of Safety Belts

Keep belts clean and dry.

{ WARNING

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Floor MatsGM floor mats are designed for usein GM vehicles.

Use the following guidelines forproper floor mat usage.. Use the floor mat with the

correct side up. Do not turnit over.

. Do not place anything on top ofthe driver side floor mat.

. Use only a single floor mat. Donot place one floor mat on top ofanother.

. Use only GM floor mats that aredesigned specifically for thisvehicle.

. When using replacement floormats, make sure they do notinterfere with the accelerator orbrake pedal.

Both floor mats are held in place bytwo button-type retainers.

Removing and Replacing theFloor Mats

Pull up on the rear of the floor matto unlock each retainer and remove.

Reinstall by lining up the floor matretainer openings over the carpetretainers and snap into position.

Make sure the floor mat is properlysecured in place.

Verify the floor mat does notinterfere with the accelerator or thebrake pedal.

Service and Maintenance 11-1

Service andMaintenance

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Scheduled MaintenanceScheduled Maintenance . . . . . 11-2

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and PartsRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6

Maintenance ReplacementParts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Maintenance RecordsMaintenance Records . . . . . . . . 11-9

General InformationNotice: Maintenance intervals,checks, inspections,recommended fluids, andlubricants are necessary to keepthis vehicle in good workingcondition. Damage caused byfailure to follow scheduledmaintenance might not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

As the vehicle owner, you areresponsible for the scheduledmaintenance in this section. Werecommend having your dealerperform these services. Propervehicle maintenance helps tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition, improves fuel economy,and reduces vehicle emissions forbetter air quality.

Because of all the different wayspeople use vehicles, maintenanceneeds vary. The vehicle might needmore frequent checks and services.Please read the information underScheduled Maintenance. To keepthe vehicle in good condition, seeyour dealer.

The maintenance schedule is forvehicles that:. Carry passengers and cargo

within recommended limits onthe Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑12.

. Are driven on reasonable roadsurfaces within legal drivinglimits.

. Use the recommended fuel. SeeRecommended Fuel onpage 9‑41.

11-2 Service and Maintenance

{ WARNING

Performing maintenance work canbe dangerous. Some jobs cancause serious injury. Performmaintenance work only if youhave the required know-how andthe proper tools and equipment.If in doubt, see your dealer tohave a qualified technician do thework. See Doing Your OwnService Work on page 10‑4.

At your dealer, you can be certainthat you will receive the highestlevel of service available. Yourdealer has specially trained servicetechnicians, uses genuinereplacement parts, as well as,up‐to‐date tools and equipment toensure fast and accuratediagnostics.

The proper replacement parts,fluids, and lubricants to use arelisted in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑6 andMaintenance Replacement Parts onpage 11‑8. We recommend the useof genuine parts from your dealer.

Rotation of New Tires

To maintain ride, handling, andperformance of the vehicle, it isimportant that the first rotationservice for new tires be performed.Tires should be rotated every12 000 km/7,500 miles. See TireRotation on page 10‑52.

ScheduledMaintenanceWhen the Change Engine OilSoon Message Displays

Change engine oil and filter. SeeEngine Oil on page 10‑9. AnEmission Control Service.

When the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message displays, service isrequired for the vehicle as soon aspossible, within the next 1 000 km/600 miles. If driving under the bestconditions, the engine oil life systemmight not indicate the need forvehicle service for more than a year.The engine oil and filter must bechanged at least once a year andthe oil life system must be reset.Your dealer has trained servicetechnicians who will perform thiswork and reset the system. If theengine oil life system is resetaccidentally, service the vehiclewithin 5 000 km/3,000 miles sincethe last service. Reset the oil life


system whenever the oil is changed.See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑12.

Every Engine Oil Change. Change engine oil and filter.

Reset oil life system. SeeEngine Oil on page 10‑9 andEngine Oil Life System onpage 10‑12. An Emission ControlService.

. Engine coolant level check. SeeEngine Coolant on page 10‑16.

. Engine cooling systeminspection. Visual inspectionof hoses, pipes, fittings, andclamps and replacement,if needed.

. Windshield washer fluid levelcheck. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑22.

. Windshield wiper bladeinspection for wear, cracking,or contamination and windshieldand wiper blade cleaning,if contaminated. See ExteriorCare on page 10‑74. Worn or

damaged wiper bladereplacement. See Wiper BladeReplacement on page 10‑27.

. Tire inflation pressures check.See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑46.

. Tire wear inspection. See TireInspection on page 10‑52.

. Rotate tires if necessary. SeeTire Rotation on page 10‑52.

. Fluids visual leak check (orevery 12 months, whicheveroccurs first). A leak in anysystem must be repaired andthe fluid level checked.

. Engine air cleaner filterinspection. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 10‑13.

. Brake system inspection (orevery 12 months, whicheveroccurs first).

. Steering and suspensioninspection. Visual inspection fordamaged, loose, or missingparts or signs of wear.

. Body hinges and latches, keylock cylinders, folding seathardware, and sunroof (ifequipped) lubrication. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑6. Morefrequent lubrication may berequired when the vehicle isexposed to a corrosiveenvironment. Applying siliconegrease on weatherstrips with aclean cloth makes them lastlonger, seal better, and not stickor squeak.

. Restraint system componentcheck. See Safety SystemCheck on page 3‑22.

. Fuel system inspection fordamage or leaks.

. Exhaust system and nearby heatshields inspection for loose ordamaged components.


Additional Required Services

Every 12 000 km/7,500Miles. Rotate tires. Tires should be

rotated every 12 000 km/7,500 miles. See Tire Rotationon page 10‑52.

At Each Fuel Stop. Engine oil level check. See

Engine Oil on page 10‑9.. Engine coolant level check. See

Engine Coolant on page 10‑16.. Windshield washer fluid level

check. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑22.

Once a Month. Tire inflation check. See Tire

Pressure on page 10‑46.. Tire wear inspection. See Tire

Inspection on page 10‑52.. Sunroof track and seal

inspection, if equipped. SeeSunroof on page 2‑15.

Once a Year. See Starter Switch Check on

page 10‑25.. See Automatic Transmission

Shift Lock Control FunctionCheck on page 10‑26.

. See Ignition Transmission LockCheck on page 10‑26.

. See Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check onpage 10‑27.

. Accelerator pedal check fordamage, high effort, or binding.Replace if needed.

. Underbody flushing service.

Once Every Two Years. Change brake hydraulic fluid at

a regular maintenance serviceevery two years.

First Engine Oil Change AfterEvery 40 000 km/25,000Miles. Passenger compartment air

filter replacement (or every24 months, whichever occursfirst). More frequent replacementmay be needed if you drive inareas with heavy traffic, areaswith poor air quality, or areaswith high dust levels.Replacement may also beneeded if you notice reduced airflow, windows fogging up,or odors. Your dealer can helpyou determine when it is theright time to replace the filter.


First Engine Oil Change AfterEvery 80 000 km/50,000Miles. Engine air cleaner filter

replacement. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 10‑13.

. Automatic transmission fluidchange (severe service) forvehicles mainly driven in heavycity traffic in hot weather, in hillyor mountainous terrain, or usedfor taxi, police, or deliveryservice. See AutomaticTransmission Fluid onpage 10‑13.

. Evaporative control systeminspection. Check all fuel andvapor lines and hoses for properhook‐up, routing, and condition.Check that the purge valve,if the vehicle has one, worksproperly. Replace as needed. AnEmission Control Service. TheU.S. Environmental ProtectionAgency or the California AirResources Board hasdetermined that the failure toperform this maintenance itemwill not nullify the emissionwarranty or limit recall liabilityprior to the completion of thevehicle's useful life. We,however, urge that allrecommended maintenanceservices be performed at theindicated intervals and themaintenance be recorded.

First Engine Oil Change AfterEvery 160 000 km/100,000Miles. Automatic transmission fluid

change (normal service). SeeAutomatic Transmission Fluid onpage 10‑13.

. Spark plug replacement andspark plug wires inspection.An Emission Control Service.

First Engine Oil Change AfterEvery 240 000 km/150,000Miles. Engine cooling system drain,

flush, and refill (or everyfive years, whichever occursfirst). See Cooling System onpage 10‑15. An Emission ControlService.

. Engine drive belts inspection forfraying, excessive cracks, orobvious damage (or every10 years, whichever occursfirst). Replace, if needed. AnEmission Control Service.


Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil (2.4L Engine)

Engine oil which meets GM Standard GM6094M and displays theAmerican Petroleum Institute Certified for Gasoline Engines starburstsymbol. To determine the proper viscosity for the vehicle's engine, seeEngine Oil on page 10‑9.

Engine Oil (2.0L Engine)The engine requires a special oil meeting the dexos™ specification. Lookfor and use only an oil that meets dexos™ specification. For the properviscosity, see Engine Oil on page 10‑9.

Engine Coolant50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL® Coolant.See Engine Coolant on page 10‑16.

Hydraulic Brake SystemDOT 4 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 88862828, inCanada 88862829).

Windshield Washer Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

Hydraulic Power Steering System DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Automatic Transmission (2.4L Engine) DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Automatic Transmission (2.0L Engine)Automatic Transmission Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 19256039,in Canada 19256040).

Key Lock CylindersMulti-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).


Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Hood Latch Assembly, SecondaryLatch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and

Release Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, inCanada 992723) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood and Door HingesMulti-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Weatherstrip ConditioningWeatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 3634770, in Canada 10953518)or Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. U.S. 12345579, inCanada 992887).


Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your retailer.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 55560894 A3128C

Engine Oil Filter

2.0L L4 Engine 12605565 PF458G

2.4L L4 Engine 12605566 PF457G

Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element 13271191 CF176

Spark Plugs

2.0L L4 Engine 12620540 41–108

2.4L L4 Engine 12620540 41–108

Wiper Blades

Driver Side – 60.0 cm (23.62 in) 13227404 —

Passenger Side – 45.0 cm (17.7 in) 13227405 —


Maintenance RecordsAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and thetype of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record

DateOdometerReading

Serviced By Services Performed


Maintenance Record (cont'd)

Date OdometerReading










Technical Data 12-1

Technical Data

Vehicle IdentificationVehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Service Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Vehicle DataCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-4

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

This legal identifier is in the frontcorner of the instrument panel, onthe left side of the vehicle. It can beseen through the windshield fromoutside. The VIN also appears onthe Vehicle Certification and ServiceParts labels and certificates of titleand registration.

Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VINis the engine code. This codeidentifies the vehicle's engine,specifications, and replacementparts. See “Engine Specifications”under Capacities and Specificationson page 12‑2 for the vehicle'sengine code.

Service PartsIdentification LabelThis label, located either in theglove box or the trunk area, hasthe following information:. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN). Model designation. Paint information. Production options and special

equipment

Do not remove this label fromthe vehicle.

12-2 Technical Data

Vehicle Data

Capacities and Specifications

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134aFor the air conditioning system refrigerant chargeamount, see the refrigerant label located underthe hood. See your dealer for more information.

Engine Cooling System

2.0L L4 Engine 7.8 L 8.2 qt


Engine Oil with Filter



Fuel Tank

2.0L, 2.4L L4 Engine (with NU5 and NT7 emissions) 73.9 L 19.5 gal

2.4L L4 Engine (with NU6 emissions) 70.0 L 18.5 gal

Technical Data 12-3

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Transmission Fluid* (Drain and Refill)

2.0L L4 Engine, 6–Speed Automatic (TransmissionRequires No Fluid Replacement)

— —

2.4L L4 Engine, 6–Speed Automatic 8.4 L 8.9 qt

Wheel Nut Torque 150Y 110 lb ft

*See Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 10‑13 for information on checking fluid level.

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

Engine Specifications

Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

2.0L L4 Engine V Automatic 0.9 mm (0.035 in)

2.4L L4 Engine C Automatic 0.9 mm (0.035 in)

12-4 Technical Data

Engine Drive Belt Routing

Customer Information 13-1

CustomerInformation

Customer InformationCustomer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Customer AssistanceOffices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 13-4

Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-4GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Scheduling ServiceAppointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8

Collision Damage Repair . . . . 13-9Service PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . 13-11

Reporting Safety DefectsReporting Safety Defects tothe United StatesGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

Reporting Safety Defects tothe CanadianGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacyVehicle Data Recording andPrivacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14

Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-14OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15Navigation System . . . . . . . . . 13-15Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-15

Radio FrequencyStatement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15

Customer Information

Customer SatisfactionProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill areimportant to your dealer and toBuick. Normally, any concerns withthe sales transaction or theoperation of your vehicle will beresolved by your dealer's sales orservice departments. Sometimes,however, despite the best intentionsof all concerned, misunderstandingscan occur. If your concern has notbeen resolved to your satisfaction,the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concernwith a member of dealershipmanagement. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level.If the matter has already beenreviewed with the sales, service,or parts manager, contact the ownerof the dealership or the generalmanager.

13-2 Customer Information

STEP TWO: If after contacting amember of dealership management,it appears your concern cannot beresolved by the dealership withoutfurther help, in the U.S., call1-800-521-7300, CustomerAssistance prompt. In Canada,contact General Motors of CanadaCustomer Communication Centre at1‐800-263-3777 (English) or1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call thetoll-free number in order to give yourinquiry prompt attention. Have thefollowing information available togive the Customer Assistancerepresentative:. Vehicle Identification Number.

This is available from the vehicleregistration or title, or the plateat the top left of the instrumentpanel and visible through thewindshield.

. Dealership name and location.

. Vehicle delivery date andpresent mileage.

When contacting Buick, rememberthat your concern will likely beresolved at a dealer's facility. That iswhy we suggest following Step Onefirst.

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners:Both General Motors and yourdealer are committed to makingsure you are completely satisfiedwith your new vehicle. However,if you continue to remain unsatisfiedafter following the procedureoutlined in Steps One and Two, youcan file with the Better BusinessBureau (BBB) Auto Line® Programto enforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is anout of court program administeredby the Council of Better BusinessBureaus to settle automotivedisputes regarding vehicle repairs orthe interpretation of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. Although you maybe required to resort to this informaldispute resolution program prior tofiling a court action, use of theprogram is free of charge and yourcase will generally be heard within

40 days. If you do not agree with thedecision given in your case, youmay reject it and proceed with anyother venue for relief availableto you.

You may contact the BBB AutoLine Program using the toll-freetelephone number or write them atthe following address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better BusinessBureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100www.dr.bbb.org/goauto

This program is available in all50 states and the District ofColumbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage, and otherfactors. General Motors reservesthe right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue itsparticipation in this program.


STEP THREE — CanadianOwners: In the event that you donot feel your concerns have beenaddressed after following theprocedure outlined in Steps Oneand Two, General Motors of CanadaLimited wants you to be aware of itsparticipation in a no-chargeMediation/Arbitration program.General Motors of Canada Limitedhas committed to binding arbitrationof owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle serviceclaims. The program provides forthe review of the facts involved byan impartial third party arbiter, andmay include an informal hearingbefore the arbiter. The program isdesigned so that the entire disputesettlement process, from the timeyou file your complaint to the finaldecision, should be completed inapproximately 70 days. We believeour impartial program offersadvantages over courts in mostjurisdictions because it is informal,quick, and free of charge.

For further information concerningeligibility in the Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or callthe General Motors CustomerCommunication Centre,1-800-263-3777 (English),1-800-263-7854 (French),or write to:

Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer CommunicationCentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Your inquiry should be accompaniedby the Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

Customer AssistanceOfficesBuick encourages customers to callthe toll-free number for assistance.However, if a customer wishes towrite or e-mail Buick, the lettershould be addressed to:

United States

Buick Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33136Detroit, MI 48232-5136www.Buick.com

1-800-521-73001-800-832-8425 (For TextTelephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-252-1112

From Puerto Rico:

1-800-496-9992 (English)1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)

From U.S. Virgin Islands:

1-800-496-9994


Canada

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre,Mail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7www.gm.ca

1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For TextTelephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-268-6800

All Overseas Locations

Please contact the local GeneralMotors Business Unit.

Mexico, Central America andCaribbean Islands/Countries(Except Puerto Rico and U.S.Virgin Islands)

General Motors de Mexico,S. de R.L. de C.V.Customer Assistance CenterAv. Ejercito Nacional #843Col. GranadaC.P. 11520, Mexico, D.F.

01-800-466-0818Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0818

Customer Assistance forText Telephone (TTY)UsersTo assist customers who are deaf,hard of hearing, or speech-impairedand who use Text Telephones(TTYs), Buick has TTY equipmentavailable at its Customer AssistanceCenter. Any TTY user cancommunicate with Buick by dialing:1-800-832-8425. TTY users inCanada can dial 1‐800‐263-3830.

Online Owner Center

Online Owner Center (U.S.) —www.gmownercenter.com/buick

Information and servicescustomized for your specificvehicle — all in one convenientplace.. Digital owner manual, warranty

information, and more. Online service and maintenance

records. Buick dealer locator for service

nationwide. Exclusive privileges and offers. Recall notices for your specific

vehicle. OnStar® and GM Cardmember

Services Earnings summaries

Other Helpful Links:

Buick — www.buick.com

Buick Merchandise —www.buickmerchandise.com


Help Center — www.buick.com/helpcenter. FAQ. Contact Us

My GM Canada (Canada) —www.gm.ca

My GM Canada is apassword-protected section ofwww.gm.ca where you can saveinformation on GM vehicles, getpersonalized offers, and use handytools and forms with greater ease.

Here are a few of the valuable toolsand services you will haveaccess to:. My Showroom: Find and save

information on vehicles andcurrent offers in your area.

. My Dealers: Save details suchas address and phone numberfor each of your preferred GMdealers.

. My Driveway: Access quick linksto parts and service estimates,check trade-in values,

or schedule a serviceappointment by adding thevehicles you own to yourdriveway profile.

. My Preferences: Manage yourprofile and use tools and formswith greater ease.

To sign up, visit the My GM Canadasection within www.gm.ca.

GM MobilityReimbursement Program

This program is available toqualified applicants for costreimbursement of eligibleaftermarket adaptive equipmentrequired for your vehicle, such ashand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift for the vehicle.

For more information on the limitedoffer, visit www.gmmobility.com orcall the GM Mobility AssistanceCenter at 1-800-323-9935. TextTelephone (TTY) users, call1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada alsohas a Mobility Program. Call1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) fordetails. TTY users call1-800-263-3830.

Roadside AssistanceProgramFor U.S.‐purchased vehicles, call1-800-252-1112; (Text Telephone(TTY): 1‐888‐889‐2438).

For Canadian‐purchased vehicles,call 1-800-268-6800.

Service is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year.


Calling for Assistance

When calling Roadside Assistance,have the following informationready:. Your name, home address, and

home telephone number. Telephone number of your

location. Location of the vehicle. Model, year, color, and license

plate number of the vehicle. Odometer reading, Vehicle

Identification Number (VIN), anddelivery date of the vehicle

. Description of the problem

Coverage

Services are provided up to 5 years/160 000 km (100,000miles),whichever comes first.

In the U.S., anyone driving thevehicle is covered. In Canada, aperson driving the vehicle withoutpermission from the owner is notcovered.

Roadside Assistance is not a part ofthe New Vehicle Limited Warranty.Buick and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right tomake any changes or discontinuethe Roadside Assistance program atany time without notification.

Buick and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right tolimit services or payment to anowner or driver if they decide theclaims are made too often, or thesame type of claim is made manytimes.

Services Provided. Emergency Fuel Delivery:

Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearestservice station.

. Lock‐Out Service: Service tounlock the vehicle if you arelocked out. A remote unlock maybe available if you haveOnStar®. For security reasons,the driver must presentidentification before this serviceis given.

. Emergency Tow From a PublicRoad or Highway: Tow to thenearest Buick dealer forwarranty service, or if the vehiclewas in a crash and cannot bedriven. Assistance is also givenwhen the vehicle is stuck insand, mud, or snow.

. Flat Tire Change: Service tochange a flat tire with the sparetire. The spare tire, if equipped,must be in good condition andproperly inflated. It is the owner'sresponsibility for the repair orreplacement of the tire if it is notcovered by the warranty.

. Battery Jump Start: Service tojump start a dead battery.

Services Not Included inRoadside Assistance. Impound towing caused by

violation of any laws.. Legal fines.. Mounting, dismounting,

or changing of snow tires,chains, or other traction devices.


. Towing or services for vehiclesdriven on a non-public road orhighway.

Services Specific toCanadian‐Purchased Vehicles. Fuel delivery: Reimbursement

is approximately $5 Canadian.Diesel fuel delivery may berestricted. Propane and otherfuels are not provided throughthis service.

. Lock-Out Service: Vehicleregistration is required.

. Trip Routing Service: Detailedmaps of North America areprovided when requested eitherwith the most direct route or themost scenic route. There is a sixrequest limit per year. Additionaltravel information is alsoavailable. Allow three weeks fordelivery.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: Must be over250♦kilometers from where yourtrip was started to qualify.

General Motors of CanadaLimited requirespre-authorization, originaldetailed receipts, and a copy ofthe repair orders. Onceauthorization has been received,the Roadside Assistance advisorwill help you make arrangementsand explain how to receivepayment.

. Alternative Service: Ifassistance cannot be providedright away, the RoadsideAssistance advisor may givepermission to get localemergency road service. You willreceive payment, up to $100,after sending the original receiptto Roadside Assistance.Mechanical failures may becovered, however any cost forparts and labor for repairs notcovered by the warranty are theowner responsibility.

Scheduling ServiceAppointmentsWhen your vehicle requireswarranty service, contact yourdealer and request an appointment.By scheduling a serviceappointment and advising yourservice consultant of yourtransportation needs, your dealercan help minimize yourinconvenience.

If your vehicle cannot be scheduledinto the service departmentimmediately, keep driving it until itcan be scheduled for service,unless, of course, the problem issafety related. If it is, please callyour dealership, let them know this,and ask for instructions.

If the dealer requests you to bringthe vehicle for service, you areurged to do so as early in the workday as possible to allow for thesame day repair.


Courtesy TransportationProgramTo enhance your ownershipexperience, we and our participatingdealers are proud to offer CourtesyTransportation, a customer supportprogram for vehicles with theBumper to Bumper (Base WarrantyCoverage period in Canada),extended powertrain, and/orhybrid‐specific warranties in boththe U.S. and Canada.

Several Courtesy Transportationoptions are available to assist inreducing your inconvenience whenwarranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not apart of the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. A separate bookletentitled “Warranty and OwnerAssistance Information” furnishedwith each new vehicle providesdetailed warranty coverageinformation.

Transportation Options

Warranty service can generally becompleted while you wait. However,if you are unable to wait, GM helpsto minimize your inconvenience byproviding several transportationoptions. Depending on thecircumstances, your dealer canoffer you one of the following:

Shuttle Service

Shuttle service is the preferredmeans of offering CourtesyTransportation. Dealers may provideshuttle service to get you to yourdestination with minimal interruptionof your daily schedule. This includesone‐way or round‐trip shuttle servicewithin reasonable time and distanceparameters of the dealer's area.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursement

If your vehicle requires overnightwarranty repairs, and publictransportation is used instead of thedealer's shuttle service, the expensemust be supported by original

receipts and can only be up to themaximum amount allowed by GMfor shuttle service. In addition, forU.S. customers, should you arrangetransportation through a friend orrelative, limited reimbursement forreasonable fuel expenses may beavailable. Claim amounts shouldreflect actual costs and besupported by original receipts.See your dealer for informationregarding the allowance amountsfor reimbursement of fuel or othertransportation costs.

Courtesy Rental Vehicle

Your dealer may arrange to provideyou with a courtesy rental vehicle orreimburse you for a rental vehiclethat you obtain if your vehicle iskept for an overnight warrantyrepair. Rental reimbursement will belimited and must be supported byoriginal receipts. This requires thatyou sign and complete a rentalagreement and meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicleprovider requirements.


Requirements vary and may includeminimum age requirements,insurance coverage, credit card, etc.You are responsible for fuel usagecharges and may also beresponsible for taxes, levies, usagefees, excessive mileage, or rentalusage beyond the completion of therepair.

It may not be possible to provide alike vehicle as a courtesy rental.

Additional ProgramInformation

All program options, such as shuttleservice, may not be available atevery dealer. Please contact yourdealer for specific information aboutavailability. All CourtesyTransportation arrangements will beadministered by appropriate dealerpersonnel.

General Motors reserves the right tounilaterally modify, change,or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time and toresolve all questions of claim

eligibility pursuant to the terms andconditions described herein at itssole discretion.

Collision Damage RepairIf your vehicle is involved in acollision and it is damaged, have thedamage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the properequipment and quality replacementparts. Poorly performed collisionrepairs diminish your vehicle'sresale value, and safetyperformance can be compromisedin subsequent collisions.

Collision Parts

Genuine GM Collision parts are newparts made with the same materialsand construction methods as theparts with which your vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine GMCollision parts are your best choiceto ensure that your vehicle'sdesigned appearance, durability,and safety are preserved. The use

of Genuine GM parts can helpmaintain your GM New VehicleLimited Warranty.

Recycled original equipment partsmay also be used for repair. Theseparts are typically removed fromvehicles that were total losses inprior crashes. In most cases, theparts being recycled are fromundamaged sections of the vehicle.A recycled original equipment GMpart may be an acceptable choice tomaintain your vehicle's originallydesigned appearance and safetyperformance; however, the history ofthese parts is not known. Such partsare not covered by your GM NewVehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered bythat warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are alsoavailable. These are made bycompanies other than GM and maynot have been tested for yourvehicle. As a result, these parts mayfit poorly, exhibit prematuredurability/corrosion problems, andmay not perform properly in


subsequent collisions. Aftermarketparts are not covered by your GMNew Vehicle Limited Warranty, andany vehicle failure related to suchparts is not covered by thatwarranty.

Repair Facility

GM also recommends that youchoose a collision repair facility thatmeets your needs before you everneed collision repairs. Your dealermay have a collision repair centerwith GM-trained technicians andstate‐of‐the‐art equipment, or beable to recommend a collision repaircenter that has GM-trainedtechnicians and comparableequipment.

Insuring Your Vehicle

Protect your investment in your GMvehicle with comprehensive andcollision insurance coverage. Thereare significant differences in thequality of coverage afforded byvarious insurance policy terms.

Many insurance policies providereduced protection to your GMvehicle by limiting compensation fordamage repairs by usingaftermarket collision parts. Someinsurance companies will notspecify aftermarket collision parts.When purchasing insurance, werecommend that you ensure thatyour vehicle will be repaired withGM original equipment collisionparts. If such insurance coverage isnot available from your currentinsurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

If your vehicle is leased, the leasingcompany may require you to haveinsurance that ensures repairs withGenuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts orGenuine Manufacturer replacementparts. Read your lease carefully, asyou may be charged at the end ofyour lease for poor quality repairs.

If a Crash Occurs

If there has been an injury, callemergency services for help. Do notleave the scene of a crash until allmatters have been taken care of.Move the vehicle only if its positionputs you in danger, or you areinstructed to move it by a policeofficer.

Give only the necessary informationto police and other parties involvedin the crash.

For emergency towing seeRoadside Assistance Program onpage 13‑5.

Gather the following information:. Driver's name, address, and

telephone number. Driver's license number. Owner's name, address, and

telephone number. Vehicle license plate number. Vehicle make, model, and

model year


. Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

. Insurance company and policynumber

. General description of thedamage to the other vehicle

Choose a reputable repair facilitythat uses quality replacement parts.See “Collision Parts” earlier in thissection.

If the airbag has inflated, see WhatWill You See After an AirbagInflates? on page 3‑28.

Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair Process

In the event that your vehiclerequires damage repairs, GMrecommends that you take an activerole in its repair. If you have apre-determined repair facility ofchoice, take your vehicle there,or have it towed there. Specify tothe facility that any requiredreplacement collision parts beoriginal equipment parts, either newGenuine GM parts or recycled

original GM parts. Remember,recycled parts will not be covered byyour GM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair,but you must live with the repair.Depending on your policy limits,your insurance company mayinitially value the repair usingaftermarket parts. Discuss this withyour repair professional, and insiston Genuine GM parts. Remember,if your vehicle is leased, you may beobligated to have the vehiclerepaired with Genuine GM parts,even if your insurance coveragedoes not pay the full cost.

If another party's insurancecompany is paying for the repairs,you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on thatinsurance company's collision policyrepair limits, as you have nocontractual limits with that company.In such cases, you can have controlof the repair and parts choices aslong as the cost stays withinreasonable limits.

Service PublicationsOrdering Information

Service Manuals

Service Manuals have the diagnosisand repair information on theengines, transmission, axle,suspension, brakes, electrical,steering, body, etc.

Service Bulletins

Service Bulletins give additionaltechnical service informationneeded to knowledgeably serviceGeneral Motors cars and trucks.Each bulletin contains instructionsto assist in the diagnosis andservice of your vehicle.

Owner Information

Owner publications are writtenspecifically for owners and intendedto provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle. TheOwner Manual includes theMaintenance Schedule for allmodels.


In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,Owner Manual, and WarrantyBooklet.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$35.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees

Without Portfolio: OwnerManual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees

Current and Past Models

Technical Service Bulletins andManuals are available for currentand past model GM vehicles.

ORDER TOLL FREE:1-800-551-4123 Monday - Friday8:00 AM - 6:00 PM Eastern Time

For Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visitHelm, Inc. on the World Wide Webat: www.helminc.com

Or you can write to:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Prices are subject to change withoutnotice and without incurringobligation. Allow ample time fordelivery.

Note to Canadian Customers: Alllisted prices are quoted in U.S.funds. Canadian residents are tomake checks payable in U.S. funds.

Reporting SafetyDefects

Reporting Safety Defectsto the United StatesGovernmentIf you believe that your vehiclehas a defect which could causea crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediatelyinform the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifyingGeneral Motors.

If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds thata safety defect exists in a groupof vehicles, it may order a recalland remedy campaign.


However, NHTSA cannotbecome involved in individualproblems between you, yourdealer, or General Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you maycall the Vehicle Safety Hotlinetoll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; orwrite to:

Administrator, NHTSA1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.Washington D.C. 20590

You can also obtain otherinformation about motorvehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defectsto the CanadianGovernmentIf you live in Canada, and youbelieve that your vehicle has asafety defect, notify TransportCanada immediately, and notifyGeneral Motors of Canada Limited.Call them at 1-800-333-0510 orwrite to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch2780 Sheffield RoadOttawa, Ontario K1B 3V9

Reporting Safety Defectsto General MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (orTransport Canada) in a situation likethis, please notify General Motors.

Call 1-800-521-7300, or write:

Buick Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33136Detroit, MI 48232-5136

In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854(French), or write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre,Mail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7


Vehicle DataRecording andPrivacyYour GM vehicle has a number ofsophisticated computers that recordinformation about the vehicle’sperformance and how it is driven.For example, your vehicle usescomputer modules to monitor andcontrol engine and transmissionperformance, to monitor theconditions for airbag deployment, todeploy airbags in a crash, and toprovide antilock braking to help thedriver control the vehicle. Thesemodules may store data to helpyour dealer technician service yourvehicle. Some modules may alsostore data about how you operatethe vehicle, such as rate of fuelconsumption or average speed.These modules may also retain theowner’s personal preferences, suchas radio pre-sets, seat positions,and temperature settings.

Event Data RecordersThis vehicle has an Event DataRecorder (EDR). The main purposeof an EDR is to record, in certaincrash or near crash-like situations,such as an airbag deployment orhitting a road obstacle, data that willassist in understanding how avehicle's systems performed. TheEDR is designed to record datarelated to vehicle dynamics andsafety systems for a short period oftime, typically 30 seconds or less.The EDR in this vehicle is designedto record such data as:. How various systems in your

vehicle were operating. Whether or not the driver and

passenger safety belts werebuckled/fastened

. How far, if at all, the driver waspressing the accelerator and/orbrake pedal

. How fast the vehicle wastraveling

This data can help provide a betterunderstanding of the circumstancesin which crashes and injuries occur.

Important: EDR data is recordedby your vehicle only if a non-trivialcrash situation occurs; no data isrecorded by the EDR under normaldriving conditions and no personaldata (e.g., name, gender, age, andcrash location) is recorded.However, other parties, such as lawenforcement, could combine theEDR data with the type ofpersonally identifying data routinelyacquired during a crashinvestigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR,special equipment is required, andaccess to the vehicle or the EDR isneeded. In addition to the vehiclemanufacturer, other parties, such aslaw enforcement, that have thespecial equipment, can read theinformation if they have access tothe vehicle or the EDR.


GM will not access this data orshare it with others except: with theconsent of the vehicle owner or,if the vehicle is leased, with theconsent of the lessee; in responseto an official request by police orsimilar government office; as part ofGM's defense of litigation throughthe discovery process; or, asrequired by law. Data that GMcollects or receives may also beused for GM research needs or maybe made available to others forresearch purposes, where a need isshown and the data is not tied to aspecific vehicle or vehicle owner.

OnStar®

If the vehicle has OnStar and yousubscribe to the OnStar services,please refer to the OnStar Termsand Conditions in the OnStarOwners Guide for information ondata collection and use.

Navigation SystemIf the vehicle has a navigationsystem, use of the system mayresult in the storage of destinations,addresses, telephone numbers, andother trip information. Refer to thenavigation system operating manualfor information on stored data andfor deletion instructions.

Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID)RFID technology is used in somevehicles for functions such as tirepressure monitoring and ignitionsystem security, as well as inconnection with conveniences suchas key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and starting, andin-vehicle transmitters for garagedoor openers. RFID technology inGM vehicles does not use or recordpersonal information or link with anyother GM system containingpersonal information.

Radio FrequencyStatementThis vehicle has systems thatoperate on a radio frequency thatcomply with Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and with Industry CanadaStandards RSS‐210/220/310.

Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. The device may not causeinterference.

2. The device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of thedevice.

Changes or modifications to any ofthese systems by other than anauthorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.


2 NOTES

INDEX i-1

AAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18Add-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . 3-34

AdjustmentsLumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-13Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3Airbag SystemCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28

What Will You See Afteran Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . .3-28

Airbag System (cont.)When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26

Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-25AirbagsAdding Equipment to theVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34

Passenger Status Indicator . . . 5-11Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Servicing Airbag-EquippedVehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34

System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23Alarm SystemAnti-Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7AntennaSatellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14

Anti-TheftAlarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Alarm System Messages . . . . .5-28

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16

Appearance CareExterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77

Assistance Program,Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14

Audio SystemBackglass Antenna . . . . . . . . . . .7-13Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2

AutomaticHeadlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . 9-24Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27

Automatic TransmissionShift Lock ControlFunction Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26

Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16

i-2 INDEX

BBattery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24

Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-27Bluetooth . . . . 7-19, 7-20, 7-23, 7-33Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-28Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24

Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-16Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-30, 6-4Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

Bulb Replacement (cont.)Headlamps, Front TurnSignal and ParkingLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29

License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-31Taillamps, Turn Signal,Stoplamps, andBack-Up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54

CCalibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4CaliforniaFuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-42Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iiiCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Carbon MonoxideEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

Cargo Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Cautions, Danger, andWarnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-2Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-12CheckEngine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12IgnitionTransmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-26

Child RestraintsInfants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-44

Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-52, 3-54Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-41Where to Put the Restraint . . .3-42

INDEX i-3

Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33CleaningExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77

Climate Control SystemsDual Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Cluster, IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . 13-9Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-67Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Compass Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10CoolantEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Engine Temperature Gauge . . . 5-9

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25

Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20

Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-4Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-3Text Telephone (TTY)Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4

Customer InformationService PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . .13-11

Customer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

DDamage Repair, Collision . . . . . . 13-9Danger, Warnings, andCautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-14Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Devices, Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16

Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5DoorAjar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

DrivingDefensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-8If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . 9-11Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-12Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

Driving for Better FuelEconomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18

Dual Automatic ClimateControl System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

i-4 INDEX

EE85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43Electric Parking Brake Light . . . 5-15Electrical Equipment,Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47

Electrical SystemEngine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34


Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32Electronic Stability Control . . . . . 9-33Electronic Stability Control(ESC) Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13Check and Service EngineSoon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12

Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-6Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Coolant Temperature Gauge . . . 5-9Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15Cooling System Messages . . .5-25Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-24Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18

Engine OilLife System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26

Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-14Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-21Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . 6-2

FFilterEngine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-13

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-3Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60

INDEX i-5

Flat Tire, Changing . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80FluidAutomatic Transmission . . . . 10-13Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22

Fog LampsBulb Replacement . . . . . .10-30, 6-4Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20

Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Front SeatsAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . . . . . . .9-43Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-46

Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-44

Fuel (cont.)Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . .9-42Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-42Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . .5-19Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-41Requirements, California . . . . .9-42System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27

Fuel EconomyDriving for Better . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18

FusesEngine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34


Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

GGasolineSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42

GaugesEngine CoolantTemperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Warning Lights andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

General InformationService and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-46Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2

Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

i-6 INDEX

HHalogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-3Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2HeadlampsAiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-20High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . .5-20

Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20High-Speed Operation . . . . . . . . 10-47Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 9-8

Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . 9-31Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

IIgnition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26

Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Infants and Young Children,Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Instrument PanelStorage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

InteractiveDrive Control System . . . . . . . . .9-34

Interactive Drive ControlSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii, 7-1

JJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68

KKey and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-27Keyless EntryRemote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-3

Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . 2-3Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-40LampsDaytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-2Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lamps OffReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Headlamps, Front TurnSignal and ParkingLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29

INDEX i-7

Lamps (cont.)License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-12On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15LATCH SystemReplacing Parts After aCrash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-51

Latch, Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-44

LightElectric Parking Brake . . . . . . . .5-15Electronic Stability Control(ESC), Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17

LightingEntry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

LightsAirbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16

Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12

Lights (cont.)Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-18Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .5-10Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18Traction Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16Ultrasonic Parking Sensor . . . .5-16

LocksDoor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . 5-19Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSYSTEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44

Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

MMaintenanceRecords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9

Maintenance ScheduleRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6

Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . 11-2Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-12Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27MessagesAnti-Theft Alarm System . . . . . .5-28Battery Voltage andCharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24

Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-25Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27Object Detection System . . . . .5-27Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-27

i-8 INDEX

Messages (cont.)Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29

MirrorsAutomatic DimmingRearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10

Monitor System, TirePressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48

NNavigation SystemVehicle Data Recordingand Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15

NetCargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-16

OObject Detection SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27

Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Off-RoadRecovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

OilEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-12Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18

Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-36Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-4OnStar® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19Operation, InfotainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

OutletsPower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-20Overview, InfotainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

PParkShifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22

ParkingAssist, Ultrasonic . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-38Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-27

Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-22Ultrasonic Sensor Light . . . . . . .5-16

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-29Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements, California . . . . . 10-3

PhoneBluetooth . . . . . . . 7-19, 7-20,

7-23, 7-33

INDEX i-9

PowerDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-18Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12

Pregnancy, Using SafetyBelts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21

PrivacyRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-15

ProgramCourtesy Transportation . . . . . .13-8

Proposition 65 Warning,California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

RRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-15Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15

RadiosAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10

Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Rear Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Rearview MirrorsAutomatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6

Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41RecordsMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9

Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72

Reimbursement Program,GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32Replacement PartsAirbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-35Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts After aCrash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

Reporting Safety DefectsCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-13General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

i-10 INDEX

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18

Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . . 9-33Electronic Stability (ESC) . . . . .9-33Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15

Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-4Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24

SSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Replacing After a Crash . . . . . .3-22Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-21

Safety Defects ReportingCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-13General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-22Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . 11-2Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . 13-7SeatsAdjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Heated Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-5Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-4Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Securing ChildRestraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52, 3-54

SecurityLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

ServiceAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-4Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12Maintenance Records . . . . . . . . 11-9Maintenance, GeneralInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1Publications OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-11

Scheduling Appointments . . . . .13-7Servicing theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . 3-34

Shift Lock Control FunctionCheck, AutomaticTransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26

ShiftingInto Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22

Signals, Turn andLane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

INDEX i-11

Spare TireCompact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67

Specifications andCapacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Start Assist, Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-25Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Stoplamps and Back-Up LampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-30

StorageRear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Storage AreasCenter Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ivSystemInteractive Drive Control . . . . . .9-34

TTachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8TaillampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-30

Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-4Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . . 2-9Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4TiresBuying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42

Tires (cont.)Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-60Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-49Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-48Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-58When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53

Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39

i-12 INDEX

TowingGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . .9-46Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-72Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71

TractionControl System (TCS) . . . . . . . .9-31Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16

TransmissionAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28

Transportation Program,Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8

Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Turn SignalBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-30

UUltrasonic Parking Assist . . . . . . 9-38Ultrasonic Parking SensorLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56

Using this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

VVehicleCanadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iiiControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71

Vehicle CareTire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1Service Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1

Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

WWarning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iiiCautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . . iiiHazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22WheelsAlignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58

Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58

When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53

Where to Put the ChildRestraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12

WindshieldWiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-27

Automotive

2011 Buick Regal Toledo Owners Manual